JP2018015393A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having a characteristic with display.SOLUTION: A game machine includes operation means. The operation means can display many kinds of display. One of the many kinds of display is first variable display. One of the many kinds of display is second variable display. A first decoration symbol is larger in display size than a second decoration symbol. In the first variable display, first animation display may be displayed. At least in a part of states in which the first animation display is performed, the second variable display is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines that perform various displays have been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first display. It is a variable display of one decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first variable display”), and one of the plurality of types of display is a variable display of a second decorative symbol (hereinafter “second display”). The first decorative design has a larger display size than the second decorative design, and the first animated display is displayed in the first variable display. And the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the first animation display is displayed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the image control of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various tables used for the production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is 1st. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 5 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 6 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 7 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of an effect in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the example of an effect in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows the example of an effect in the modification of the pachinko machine 100 by 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table used with the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation display time determination table which determines the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation game with the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is 1st. The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit image control process. ing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is 2nd. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a flow of a selection effect control process that is one example of the effect control process (step S409) of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400, which is Example 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st effect means and the 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the operation means 700 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-3rd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-4th effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-4th effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st-4th effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed with the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 of Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 of Example 4 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the other example of the selection effect performed by the 1st and 2nd effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) which shows the effect performed by the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (3) which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (4) which shows the effect performed by the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (5) which shows the effect performed by the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect performed by the effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 1 of Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification 2 of Example 11 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 12 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the big hit game of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 12 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification of Example 12 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 13 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in the modification of Example 13 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 14 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 15 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 16 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 17 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 18 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation performed with the production | presentation means of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 19 by 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of 4th Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of 4th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]

  First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 29, a game table according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 1 to 45 are used only in the description of the first and second embodiments of the present invention in principle, and the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. In the description of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. Moreover, although the number of each Example of 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment will be used only for description of 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment as a general rule, of 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment Each example and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.
<Overall configuration>

  The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming table that allows a player to earn profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 100 through a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at an amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor is provided for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Note that the lamp is an example of a light emitting unit, and in the present embodiment, a light source that uses an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be locked and openable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for causing button 136 to emit light, ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return instruction for a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.
FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.
FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device (image display device) for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208j can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable prize opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out-port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the amusement island side.

The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specs of the gaming table is attached to the game board 200 at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality of the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), etc. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the dispensing device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. 12A shows 12 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure L” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special Figure A” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R special jackpot A or 16R probability variation A), and “Special Figure B” is a 16R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 16R special jackpot B or 16R). "Special figure C" is a 16R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R jackpot or 16R normal). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

  In addition, after the 16R special jackpot game ends and after the 16R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the short time state (electric support state). Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is called the normal high probability state (or electric support state), and the state that does not enter the time reduction state is the normal low probability state (or non-electrical state). It is called a support state. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 16R special jackpot symbols, are in a high probability state of special figure high probability, and “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability normal figure height. Probability state. These “special illustrations A” to “special illustration C” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  "Special Figure D" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot A or 4R probability variation A), and "Special Figure E" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot B or 4R probability variation B). Compared with “Special Drawing A” to “Special Drawing C” which is 16R, “Special Drawing D” and “Special Drawing E” are different in that they are 4R. “Special Figure F” is a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot A or 2R probability variation A), and “Special Figure G” is also referred to as a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 2R special jackpot B or 2R probability variation B). "Special figure H" is a 2R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R jackpot or 2R normal), compared to "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure C" which is 16R, "Special Figure F" ~ "Special Figure H" is different in that it is 2R. “Special Figure I” is a small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “small hit”), and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Also, “Special Figure J” is the off symbol 1, “Special Figure K” is the off symbol 2, and “Special L” is the off symbol 3, both of which are the profits to be given to the player. Is a symbol that has a relatively small profit amount.

  FIG. 96 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal variation, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, 2R probability variation B, or 2R normal variation is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) arranged in a row is stopped and displayed. Further, when reporting 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation B, or 2R probability variation A or 2R probability variation B, three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the small hit, “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying, the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stops symbol combinations other than.

FIG. 96 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, the stoppage display mode of the common figure is “common figure A” which is a winning symbol 1 (hereinafter also referred to as “1” per universal symbol) and a winning symbol 2 (hereinafter also referred to as “2 per universal symbol”). There are three types: “general map B” and “general map C”, which is an outlier design. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the usual figure variable game, the "usual figure A" or "common figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the "normal figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after the conversion processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is OFF, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure 1 variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45.
<Image display device>

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step. First, referring to FIG. The configuration will be described.

  The image display device 208 ′ of the present embodiment includes the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 (or includes a device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3), and a plurality (for example, three). Image display devices (a first image display device 2081, a second image display device 2082, and a third image display device 2083.

  In this example, the image display device 208 includes a first first image display device 2081, a second second image display device 2082, and a third image display device 2083.

  As an example, the first image display device 2081 is an image display device configured by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and the display area thereof is the other two image display devices (the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083). This is an image display device that is larger than the above and does not move. In this specification, the first image display device 2081 may be referred to as a main display device or a main liquid crystal. In this example, the first image display device 2081 has a configuration similar to (or corresponds to) the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  Each of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 is an image display device constituted by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and in this example, the sizes of both display areas are the same. In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device are arranged on both the left and right sides of the first image display device 2081. The image display device arranged on the left side of the first image display device 2081 as viewed from the player is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the right side is the third image display device 2083. In this specification, the second image display device 2082 may be referred to as a left sub display device or a left sub liquid crystal, and the third image display device 2083 may be referred to as a right sub display device or a right sub liquid crystal.

  In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged in the left-right direction so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or separated from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is possible to move to (slide movement).

  As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are shorter in length in the width direction than substantially half the length of the first image display device 2081 and slightly shorter in height. Further, the second image display device 2082 has at least the right end side portion overlapping the front side of the left end side portion of the first image display device 2081 at the initial position shown in FIG. Reference numeral 2083 denotes that at least the left end side portion overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the first image display device 2081 at the initial position shown in FIG.

  When the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 move so as to be close to each other from the initial position, the first image display device 2081 (display in) becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (visual recognition). If the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are moved in the direction of the initial position so as to be separated from each other, the first image display device 2081 (display on) is the player It will be easier for you to see.

  The first image display device 2081 may be moved, and the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083 may be configured not to move. Further, the size of the display area of the first image display device 2081 may be smaller than the display area of the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083, and the sizes of these three display areas are the same. It may be. Further, the number of image display devices 208 ′ may be two, or four or more.

Further, the number of image display devices 208 ′ may be one. In that case, all the displays shown in the following examples (production examples) are displayed on one image display device 208 ′.
<Image display device / first image display device>

  The first image display device 2081 has, in its display area, a first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) and an effect display area 208d for executing decorative symbol variation display (first variation display). As an effect display area 208d, an icon display area 800, an explanation display area TT1, and the like are provided.

  In this specification, the decorative symbols displayed in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) are referred to as “first decorative symbols”.

  In FIG. 14A, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the combination of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) of “decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the icon display area 800 includes, for example, five areas arranged side by side, and can display one variable icon and four hold icons that are the maximum number of hold of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) variable game. is there. In this example, a variable icon display area is provided at the right end of the icon display area 800 (near the center of the display area, below the middle symbol display area 208b). A hold icon display area corresponding to the first to fourth hold orders of the variable game is provided.

  In FIG. 14A, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and on the left side thereof, there are four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) suggesting that four hold icons can be displayed. In correspondence with the fact that three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed on the three pedestals, respectively. In this case, the hold icon h11 is a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold, and sequentially corresponds to the hold icon h12 and the third hold corresponding to the second hold sequentially toward the left. A hold icon h13 is displayed.

  The change icon h0 is a hold icon corresponding to the change. For example, when the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 shown in FIG. 14A are digested, the change icon h0 is an icon that changes from these hold icons. Moreover, the display mode (pattern, size, etc.) of the icon displayed as the hold icon and the icon displayed as the variable icon may be the same display mode or different display modes. .

On the right side of the icon display area 800, an explanation display area (tutorial display section) TT1 is provided. In the explanation display area TT1, various information relating to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. In the explanation display area TT1 shown in FIG. 14 (a), “Panda is the master of Tono-sama” is displayed, and the explanation about the Tono-sama character is made.
<Image display device / second image display device>

  In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) simulating the image of the chance button 137 is displayed at the bottom of the display area. For example, when the meter button 137 is operated (pressed), for example, a colored (other than white) colored portion of the button image increases and the button image is completely painted, the player An effect that increases expectations for the user (for example, a one-shot notification effect) is executed.

  Or, if the painted portion increases due to a certain effect and all of them are filled, it will be possible to execute the button effect once, and if the button is operated in that state, will the change be a big hit? An effect that increases expectations for the player, such as notification of whether or not, is configured.

  In addition, a stage name display area for displaying the name of the stage currently being performed and the reach name is provided below the meter. In the stage name display area of FIG. 14A, “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a second symbol display area 208Y (see (i) in the figure) is provided above the display area of the second image display device 2082 for executing a variation display of the decorative symbols (second variation display). ing.

  15 (o) to 15 (q), the second symbol display area 208Y includes three symbol display areas 208k to 208g (left symbol display area 208k, medium symbol display) for displaying decorative symbols. An area 208l and a right symbol display area 208g). In this specification, the decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y may be referred to as a “second decorative symbol”. When it is not necessary to distinguish from the first decorative symbol, for example, as apparent from the meaning of the text, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be described as “decorative symbols”.

  In this example, the case where the second symbol display area 208Y is provided in the second image display device 2082 will be described as an example. However, the second symbol display area 208Y may be provided in the first image display device 2081. The third image display device 2083 may be provided.

  The variation display (second variation display) of the decoration symbol (second decoration symbol) executed in the second symbol display area 208Y is the variation display (first variation) of the first decoration symbol executed in the first symbol display area 208X. May be executed in connection with the fluctuation display). That is, the second variable display is not visible (not displayed) to the player as shown in FIG. 14 (a), and is visible (displayed) to the player as shown in FIG. 14 (j). ) May be.

  The second symbol display area 208Y (each of the left symbol display area 208k, middle symbol display area 208l, and right symbol display area 208g) is the first symbol display area 208X (left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right The display area is smaller than each of the symbol display areas 208c), and the display size of the second decorative symbol is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol. The second variable display is executed in association with the first variable display executed by the first image display device 2081 and has a display size smaller than that of the first variable display. The second decorative design may be referred to as a “mini decorative design”.

In the effect example of this embodiment shown in FIGS. 14 to 29, the second decorative design has the same (same type) design as the first decorative design as shown in FIGS. 15 (o) to 15 (q). A symbol (decorated symbol) is displayed. As will be described in detail later, at a certain timing, the second decorative symbol may display the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol, or may display a different symbol combination. In addition, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be visible to the player at the same time, or only one of them may be visible to the player (easily visible).
<Image display device / third image display device>

In the third image display device 2083, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.
<Other production means>

  As an effect device other than the image display device 208 ′, for example, a speaker 120, a fourth symbol display device 284, operating means 136 and 137, an accessory 224 A, 224 B, and 224 C are provided.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 is a device for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or when the symbol is stopped). For example, the symbol changing device in FIG. The symbol change notification device shown in Fig. 2 is shown by a round graphic on the right side. In the following figures, the case where each is displayed in white indicates the state in which the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) is changing, and the case where it is displayed in gray fill. The special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) indicates the stoppage of stoppage, and when it is displayed in black, the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) hits and stops. Shows the state. In this example, the fourth symbol display device 284 is shown as a separate structure from the image display device 208 ′, but these may be images displayed on the image display device 208 ′. Good.

  The operation means 136 and 137 are operation buttons (for example, a chance button 136 and a chance button 137), respectively.

  In addition, each of the actors 224A, 224B, and 224C is a kind of the effect movable body 224. For example, the family crest actor 224A disposed below the first image display device 2081 and the upper portion of the first image display device 2081. Are the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C. The family crest character 224A is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the performance. The family crest member 224A has a built-in light-emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light-emitting modes depending on the contents of effects. Also, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C are each configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the production. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the speaker 120 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown above the image display device 208 ′ for convenience of explanation, but do not specify the positional relationship with the image display device 208 ′. The same applies to the positional relationship between the chance buttons 136 and 137 and the image display device 208 ′. Further, the family crest character 224A, the Yatsushiro character 224B, and the general character 224C are merely shown as examples of the operation, and the positional relationship with the image display device 208 ′ is not limited to that described here.

  Further, the speaker 120 is a diagram for showing audio output in each of the following embodiments, and an audio output example (for example, “don”, etc.) may be written together with the illustration of the speaker 120. The presence / absence of the example does not indicate the presence / absence of the audio output, and the audio may be output even if the example of the audio output is not described. .

  Here, the hold icon and the change icon are each configured to be changeable to white display, blue display, green display, red display, gold display, rainbow display, and the like. The chance buttons 136 and 137, the crest character 224A, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C can be changed to white light, blue light, green light, red light, gold light, rainbow light, etc. by the built-in LED. It is configured.

  For example, in FIG. 14A, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in white, the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, and the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white. In addition, the hold icon and the change icon are displayed in white as a default display, and the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue and prefetched in advance. Further, the display mode (display color, shape, etc.) of the variation icon and each hold icon classifies the produced effects according to the jackpot expectation level, and notifies the classification (rank of the expectation level) (therefore, the game It is also an effect that informs the effect that the person should wait for (this will be described later). The jackpot expectation degree means an expectation degree that the determination of whether or not the variable game is successful (the result of the final symbol change display) is a big hit.

  In addition, the LED built in the chance button 136 and the chance button 137 is lit white, the LED built in the family crest 224A is lit blue, and the LED built in the eight generations 224B and the general 244C is lit white. Yes. As an example, the crest character 224A emits light of the same color (blue in this example) in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and the built-in LED of the eight-generation character 224B and the general character 244C is rainbow-colored (rainbow) The light is emitted to notify the hit.

14 to 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. In addition, although the description of the configuration such as the general-purpose hold lamp 216 is omitted, these configurations are also provided as in FIG.
<Direction using the second decorative design>

With reference to FIGS. 14 to 29, as one embodiment of the present invention, a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted with respect to an effect example using the second decorative pattern executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to an enlarged view.
<Example A>

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 14A shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state in which the variation is stopped). In the first image display device 2081, “decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. The combination (decoration symbol combination) of the decoration symbol (first decoration symbol) of “decoration 1-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) are displayed on the left side, and the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed to notify that the hold in FIG. On the other hand, the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white (default), whereas the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue and a pre-reading notice is executed. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display “Panda is a master of the lord” is executed.

  In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) is displayed, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white to notify that the meter is zero. In the stage name display area, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third image display device 2083, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown. In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the hold of the special figure 1 is “3”. Special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating the number of holdings in special figure 2 are “0”.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (rectangle) and the special figure 2 (round shape) in gray, indicating that the off state is stopped. In addition, the chance buttons 136 and 137 have the built-in LEDs lit white. In the family crest member 224, the built-in LED emits blue light in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, below the first image display device 2081). In the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C, the built-in LED emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  In the following description, the description will mainly focus on effects that have changed from previous effects with the passage of time.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 14 (b), one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 14 (a)) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is performed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (first variation display and second variation display) is represented by a downward white arrow (hereinafter, the same applies to other examples). Moreover, the white arrow shown to the same figure (b) is an elongate arrow, and shows that the decoration design is fluctuating at high speed in the aspect which has permeability | transmittance in this case. On the other hand, when the white arrow is displayed as a short (thick) arrow (for example, (e) in the same figure), it indicates that the decorative symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the case of low-speed fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative symbol can be recognized.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by moving animations, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. Is displayed as a blue fluctuation icon h0, and a pre-reading notice is made. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, and the left of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively displayed on the two pedestals to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "2" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  In the explanation display portion TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the explanation display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 14C, the decorative design (here “decoration 6”) swings (temporarily stops) in the left design display area 208a of the first image display device 2081. The timing shown is a state in which the decorative design (here “decoration 6”) has been shaken (temporarily stopped) in the right design display area 208c of the first image display device 2081, and is pretending to be a reach (tempered pie). . The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) that has been subjected to fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c starts to fluctuate again. Note that the fluctuation of “decoration 6” in the right symbol display area 208c at this timing is a low-speed fluctuation as indicated by a white short (thick) arrow. In addition, the state in which the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate (temporarily stop) and then starts low-speed fluctuation may be referred to as “decorative symbol slips” or “decorative symbol is slell”.

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative design (first decorative design) shifts, a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) may be started. In this example, the case where the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) shifts as one of the start conditions of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. However, other start conditions may be used as the start condition of the pseudo-continuous effect. The design (first decorative design) may always be misaligned, may or may not be misaligned, or may not be misaligned. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects described below. It is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is changing in the right symbol display area 208c (temporarily stopped). In this way, when a certain decorative design (here “decoration 6”) is shifted and another (next) decorative design (here “decoration 7”) is shaking (temporarily stopped), The stopped decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) may be referred to as a “shift eye”.

  In the present embodiment, the occurrence of misalignment of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is one of notifications that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Note that the notification that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started may be other notifications, and may not be the occurrence of misalignment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol representing a number, for example, one symbol among the symbols related to the execution of the continuous effect (first effect). The special symbol is also one of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol refers to a symbol in which a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a continuous notice effect) is started when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As an example, the first animation of the present embodiment is an animation (a special symbol stop animation) that indicates whether or not a special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the present embodiment, as an example, a case where the first animation is an animation (middle symbol beat animation) that indicates whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b will be described as an example. Here, the stop display of the special symbol may be a shaking fluctuation stop display (temporary stop display), which is the same in the following embodiments.

  When the middle symbol beat animation ends, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the continuous effect may be executed.

  Here, the special symbol is a symbol of the character (dono) as shown in FIG. 5G, and when this special symbol (the symbol of the character (donor)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example, The pseudo-continuous production is executed as the continuous production. Thus, the special symbol related to the start of the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect may be referred to as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

  The continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In this case, the animation that beats (first animation) may be an animation that beats whether or not the last symbol of the three symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display such that at least one of the three symbols includes a fluctuation fluctuation.

  That is, the timing shown in FIG. 5G is the first animation (whether the middle symbol is turned on) whether or not the pseudo-continuous design (which is a start condition) related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. (Animation) is being performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. ing. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol in FIG. 11H has the same display size as the decorative symbols (“decoration 6” and “decoration 7”) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. The width of the pseudo continuous pattern (i) is increased. As a result, the right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap with the left end and the right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol is displayed on the upper part of the second image display device 2082. At this timing, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. Change, temporary stop display). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed, for example, with the symbol combination shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the symbol of the same character (dono) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l.

  In addition, as shown in the figure (i), as shown in the figure (j), without displaying "only the frame" of the 2nd design display area 208Y as a display plan area of the 2nd decoration design, as shown in the figure (j). The second decorative symbol may be displayed in the symbol display area 208Y (the second symbol display area 208Y can be recognized by the player by the start of the display of the second decorative symbol).

  At this timing, the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, more difficult to see than the pseudo-continuous symbol or the displayed second decorative symbol), and the first animation The first decorative symbol after the end of (the state of the first decorative symbol variation stop) is unconfirmed, but the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped by the second decorative symbol (the middle symbol display region 208l of the second symbol display region 208Y). The presence or absence of the display can be recognized by the player. In other words, for advanced users, by gazing at the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of the first decorative symbol is stopped, that is, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed continuously. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not (pseudo-continuous production) has been started. In this way, the state of the first decorative symbol change stoppage is unconfirmed, but the second decorative symbol can be recognized by the player as to whether or not the special symbol is stopped (the presence or absence of the continuous performance) (first state). In the present specification, the “first barre” is a state in which the state is notified in place of the first decorative symbol that is invisible (difficult to see) to the player in the symbol display area 208X.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols. Further, the left and right end portions of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  More specifically, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end of the pseudo-continuous design overlaps the second decorative design, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous design is at least the first (In this example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area). In the second decorative symbol, the stop display of the symbol combination in FIG. 15 (o) continues.

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, a part of the movable body (in this example, the family crest member 244A) starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081). . Thereby, a part of the display displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the family crest character 224A and cannot be visually recognized by the player (or the second decorative design or movable body (family crest character 224A or the like). ) Is more difficult to see). Specifically, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a part), a part of the display of the icon display area 800 (in this example, the fluctuation icon h0 (all), the hold icon h11 and a part of the pedestal), and an explanation display A part of the tutorial display in the area TT1 is invisible to the player (or more difficult to see than the second decorative symbol or movable body (family crest character 224A, etc.)).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. 10 (k)), and the elevated family crest character 244A is raised. , And a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120.

  At this timing, the symbol combination of the first decorative symbols is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, but the first decorative symbol is determined to be in a variable stop state. That is, at this timing, the player can recognize the stop display state of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect). The second decorative design is the same as (k) of FIG. 15 (state of FIG. 15 (o)).

  Therefore, even if the player does not notice the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display (first ballet) in the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing of FIG. It can be recognized that the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous effect are confirmed by the operation (here, the rotation operation) of the family crest actor 244A) and / or the sound effect from the speaker 120.

  For example, the family crest character 244A starts rotating after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous rendering are confirmed. Note that the family crest member 224A may rise after starting rotation at the initial position (the position below the first image display device 2081 shown in FIG. 6 (j)). After the stop display and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production are confirmed, the display moves to the stop position after the ascent (position (l) in the figure).

  Note that the family crest member 244A performs movements such as ascending and descending and rotating operations even during other effects. In addition, the family crest character 244A may be configured not to perform operations such as movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects, or to perform movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects. Some of the operations may be performed, or only some of the operations may not be performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state where the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is visible to the player after the first animation display is completed. Although illustration is omitted, an animation of a reduced display of an enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern is executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m), and as shown in FIG. (Display size equivalent to “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208c). As a result, “decoration 6” that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the left symbol display area 208a of the first symbol display area 208X, and a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the middle symbol display area 208b. In addition, “decoration 7” that fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208c becomes visible to the player, and the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. The second decorative design is the same as (k) of FIG. 15 (state of FIG. 15 (o)). That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (m), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player at the same time in the same display mode ((temporary) stop display of the same symbol combination). Yes.

  It should be noted that the animation of the pseudo-continuous symbol reduction display executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m) is the animation display of the pseudo-continuous symbol enlarged display (for example, FIG. The execution time may be the same as that in FIG. (K)), may be short, or may be long. Moreover, the animation of the reduced display of pseudo-continuous symbols may not be executed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 6 (m), the player stops and displays a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). This makes it possible to recognize that the start of the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game cannot visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. Even if it is difficult to visually recognize), it may be possible to recognize that the start of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of the movable body (family crest actor 224A). .

  In the present embodiment, the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to see) by the first animation display at a timing before those (FIG. (M), (l)). However, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the player recognizes that the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the second decorative symbol that is not overlapped in the first animation display. There is a case that can be made.

  In this example, the timing at which the display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. 5G is set as the start timing of the first animation, but the start timing of the first animation is limited to this timing. Absent. For example, the start timing of the first animation may be the timing at which the player can visually recognize the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing at which the pseudo-simultaneous symbols are temporarily stopped may be used, or the display mode of the special symbols changes at a timing later than (h) in the same figure (in this example, the pseudo-simulation as shown in (i) in the same figure). It may be the timing when the enlarged display of the continuous symbols is started).

  Also, the end timing of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of the first animation, or until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of FIG. When the special symbol reduction animation is executed during the same figure (m), until the reduced animation is completed, until the reduced animation is started, or until the enlarged animation is completed in the same figure (l). , And so on.

  That is, the display period of the first animation is a period defined as any combination of the start timing and the end timing of the above-mentioned first animation, but as an example, before the figure (m) When the special symbol reduction animation is executed, the first animation is displayed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (g) to (m). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (m), or before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (i) to (m). In addition, if the special symbol reduction animation is not executed before (m) in the same figure (when ending with the enlarged display), the display period of the first animation is from (g) to (l) in the same figure. (H) to FIG. (L), or (i) to (l), etc., and the same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) shows a state in which display of a second animation different from the first animation is started in the display area of the first image display device 2081.

  The second animation that is displayed at this timing (after the quasi-continuous symbol is stopped) is an animation that is displayed during the period until the quasi-continuous production starts, and here, it continues multiple times (for example, twice). This is an animation indicating that the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is confirmed.

  In this example, the second animation displays the character (dono) from the center to the left as shown in (n) of the figure, and the character (dono) moves to the center as shown in (o) of the figure. However, this is an animation in which the display size expands and the text “Still More !!” is displayed. In this example, the second animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. However, the second animation may be displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which execution of a pseudo-continuous effect that continues multiple times is started, and there is no change in the display of the icon display area and the digestion of the hold.

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X) of the first image display device 2081, the combination of the first decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. . In addition, it overlaps with a part of the first decorative design (in this example, a part of “decoration 6”) and is referred to as a display relating to the number of pseudo-continuous effects (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo continuous display”). “× 2”) indicating the number of times is displayed.

  Further, in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g (second symbol display area 208Y) of the second image display device 2082, the second decoration in the state of FIG. 15 (o) similar to FIG. 15 (j) to FIG. The display of symbols (decorative symbols including pseudo-continuous symbol stop display) continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the display of the first image display device 2081 is changed, accurate information (in this example, simulated information) is displayed according to the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The player can recognize that the rendition effect is being executed. In other words, the second decorative symbol displayed on the second image display device 2082 (second symbol display area 208Y) is a decorative symbol in which some information is notified to the player by displaying the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols). It can be said that it is a symbol that is displayed so as to exhibit its original function. In other words, the second decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol even when the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) is not visible or difficult for the player to see. Guarantee of information notification by.

  In this way, when a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed. Is stopped. Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed, a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the same number as the right symbol display region 208c (here, “decoration 7”)) is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. indicate. That is, at this timing, the symbol combination of the second decorative symbol (“decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”) is different from the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”). It is a combination.

  In this example, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is resumed, the numerical decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. However, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the same symbol as the second decorative symbol (that is, a special symbol) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (q) is the same for the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and first decorative symbol in the first symbol display region 208X of the first image display device 2081 and the second symbol display region 208Y of the second image display device 2082, respectively. This shows a state in which the variation display (high-speed variation) of the second decorative design has been resumed. Further, with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation in which the pseudo-continuous number display (in this example, “× 2”) is reduced and displayed is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first symbol display area 208X continues to display the first decorative symbol (high-speed variation), while the second symbol display area 208Y (second decorative symbol) It is hidden.

  In the above example, after the timing shown in (i) in the figure, after displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol as shown in (q) in the second symbol display area 208Y, ) May be temporarily stopped (stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols).

  Further, the second decorative symbol stop display (the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 15 (j)) including the special symbol stop symbol on the second image display device 2082 (FIG. 15 (o)) is the first image display device. It is only necessary for the player to be able to see the first decorative symbol including the special symbol 2081 before the stop display (FIG. (M)). For example, at the timing shown in FIG. The stop display of the second decorative symbol including the display (FIG. 15 (o)) may be displayed, or the second decorative symbol including the special symbol stop display may be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. You may display the stop display of 2 decoration symbols (FIG. 15 (o)).

  In the same figure (j), the timing (first timing) when the right symbol (“decoration 6”) and the left symbol (“decoration 7”) are overlapped with the enlarged middle symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol), The display timing of the second decorative symbol (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing is after the second timing. It may be.

  In addition, in the same figure (p), even if the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo continuous display is the same timing as the display start timing (resume timing, second timing) of the first decorative symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, in the same figure (q), the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous number display may be started from (q) in the same figure. In this case, the display timing of the pseudo continuous number display (first timing) and the start timing of the second decorative symbol variation display (first timing). The second timing may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

Also, in FIG. 8 (r), the timing at which the pseudo continuous display is reduced from the size shown in (q) (first timing) and the timing of erasing the second decorative symbol (second timing) are as follows. The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
<Matters common to each embodiment>
Matters common to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 14 to 29 including this embodiment are described.

  First, in the decorative symbol state (decorative symbol combination), which is the condition that the pseudo-continuous effect starts (may be), a shift occurs in the left symbol or right symbol (there is a special symbol in the middle symbol after that) Stop), the left symbol and the right symbol become a template (when stopped at the same symbol), the special symbol stops in the middle symbol, or the special symbol stops in the middle symbol regardless of the left symbol and right symbol Whether or not (only), etc.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when a misalignment occurs in the left symbol or the right design, if there is no misalignment, it becomes a tempered, and then the decorative pattern of the tempered number If the decorative pattern of the number added with 1 passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not started, if a misalignment does not occur, it becomes a temper, and thereafter, it is stopped and displayed with a numeral decorative symbol obtained by adding 1 to the tempered numeral decorative symbol.

  Also, in the configuration where the pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the left symbol and the right symbol are tempered, there is a state whether the pseudo-simultaneous symbol is stopped first, and then the number of the tempered number is displayed. If the decorative pattern of the number which added 1 to the decorative pattern passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the quasi-continuous effect is not started, the display is stopped with the numeral decoration symbol obtained by adding 1 to the numeral decoration symbol that has been tempered, and the display is lost.

  Also, for example, the left symbol is “decoration 6”, the middle symbol is “special symbol”, and the right symbol is “decoration 7” (the symbol combination “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7” is stopped). When the continuous production starts, the left symbol “decoration 6”, the middle symbol “special symbol”, and the right symbol “decoration 7” are stopped and displayed in the next pseudo-series production. “Decoration 6”, the right design is “decoration 6”, and it is configured to be a temperament (referred to as “decoration 6 temper”). In this case, “decoration 6 temper” is configured to have a higher probability of jackpot than reach other than “decoration 6 temper”.

  Accordingly, in the second decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 15J and FIG. 15O, among the symbol combinations “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”, the symbol “decoration 6” on the left is the player. When it becomes visible, the player may be able to recognize whether or not it will become a “decoration 6 tempered” when developed into a super reach, and may increase the player's expectation.

  Some temperament designs have different expectations of jackpots. For example, the left design is “decoration 7”, the right design is “decoration 7”, and the tempering (referred to as “decoration 7 tempering”) is followed by “hot” development. Become. In such a case, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the symbol combination of “decoration 7-special symbol-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed by the second ornament symbol, so that the subsequent development is “hot” to the player. May be recognized.

  In addition, the first animation (stopping animation of special symbol) includes an enlarged display, but it may also include a rotation display, and is attached to the symbol rather than an enlarged display of the symbol itself. The effect display may include a display that gradually expands. Moreover, the display other than the second decorative pattern may be overlapped by the enlarged display of the first animation.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol will be described by taking as an example a configuration in which it may be displayed or not displayed, but the second decorative symbol is excluded except for a configuration in which a third decorative symbol to be described later is displayed (FIG. 23). May be displayed constantly.

  In addition, in one of the roaring animations of the special symbols (first animation, special symbol stop-spinning animation, middle symbol roaring animation), the second decorative symbol may occur, There is no decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, and there may be a symbol that is caused by a stop display of the second decorative symbol by a symbol other than the special symbol.

  In addition, the stop display (redisplay) of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) that occurs after the pseudo-continuous effect does not include a special symbol in order to prevent the false continuous symbol from being falsely recognized again. Is desirable.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes (or can change) as the number advances (increases) increases. In this configuration, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon may be hidden at a certain timing.

Moreover, although the case where there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times is described as an example, the number of pseudo-continuous times may be one. The greater the number of pseudo-continuations (the longer the pseudo-continuous productions are), the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. In addition, in each effect example described in this specification, there may be an effect with a higher degree of jackpot expectation than a pseudo-ream effect, or an effect with a lower jackpot expectation than a pseudo-ream effect. May be.
<Example B>

  Next, other examples of effects will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.

  This production example is an example in which the special symbol is not stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished (that is, the continuous production is not started). FIGS. 15A to 15I are diagrams. Since it is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 14 (a) to FIG. In other cases, the description of the same configuration as the effect example A shown in FIG. 14 may be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 15 (j) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y in which only the frame portion (white square frame) has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Is done. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. )Is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208l, the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is being performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (k), an animation of the reduced display of the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the first symbol display area 208X. As shown in FIG. The display is reduced to “decoration 6” of 208a and the display size equivalent to “decoration 7” of the right symbol display area 208c), and an animation (middle symbol scrolling display) that descends from above in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed. It shows the state.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k in a swinging manner (temporarily stopped), and in the middle symbol display area 208l, the decorative symbol (second symbol, here “decoration 8”) is displayed. ) Is displayed in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. That is, at this timing, both the first symbol variation area 208X and the second symbol variation area 208Y are visible to the player, but the state of the first decorative symbol (whether there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) And the state of the second decorative symbol (whether or not there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) is different. Hereinafter, simply “decorated symbol state” refers to a state (display mode) such as a combination of decorative symbols and the presence or absence of (temporary) stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (l) shows a state in which a numerical decoration symbol (here, “decoration 8”) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation display in the first symbol variation area 208X. Show. That is, after the first animation display, it is determined that the special symbol (in this case, the pseudo-continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) due to the stop of the special symbol is not executed. It is in the state. Here, the first animation display refers to an animation with pseudo-continuous symbols (character (donor) symbols) in FIG.

  Further, at this timing, the stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol shown in (q) of the same figure is continued in the second symbol display area 208Y. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player in the same state (a temporary stop state where the combination of decorative symbols is “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”).

  Thus, in this example, the case where the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous effect) does not start after the first animation display is shown, and in this case, the middle symbol display of the first symbol display area 208X In the area 208b, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is not displayed in a stopped state, and a symbol of a different type from the special symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a number) is displayed in a stopped state (a fluctuation variation display or a temporary stop display). Further, in this case, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 8”) that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is a numeric decorative symbol (in FIG. 14 (p)) that is displayed when the continuous effect is executed. This is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a number different from the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b.

  The timing shown in (m) of FIG. 6 shows a state in which the second decorative symbol is erased in the second image display device 2082, and the timing shown in (n) of FIG. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (here, the second decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 8—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 1 (l), after the first animation has been displayed, the player can display a special image in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). Since the symbols (pseudo-continuous designs) are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that it has been determined that the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) will not be executed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game can move the movable body even when the state of the first symbol display area 208X is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. It may be possible to recognize that the start of continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of (family crest actor 224A).

  In the present embodiment, even if the stop display of the first decorative symbol is not fixed at the timing before that (the first animation display is being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (q)) in which the decorative symbols (numeric decorative symbols) other than the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area 208l. In some cases, the player can recognize this.

  Alternatively, even when the first animation display is being executed at a timing before the timing shown in FIG. 10L, as shown in FIG. The player may recognize that it is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (p)) that is fluctuating (the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed). There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, in the same figure (k), if the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b moves downward (shifts), it may return to the upper side and stop displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is a stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 14 (m), and the pseudo-continuous effect is started as in FIGS. 14 (n) to (r). In this case, if the player has previously viewed the second decorative symbol with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol, the first symbol is displayed with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol. If the middle symbol of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b) is shifted downward, the player may recognize that it is shifted and recognize that it returns to the upper side (becomes the first ballet).

  Note that the method of the case where the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal stop mode may be configured such that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the method in which the special symbol is shifted downward and then returned to the upper position and stopped.

  As described above, during the execution of the first animation ((j) and (k) in the figure), the first decorative symbol after the end (the state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped) is undetermined. Due to the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y), the fact that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not performed is prejudice. That is, for example, an advanced user, etc., pays attention to the second decorative symbol, so that the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) before the stoppage of the variation of the first decorative symbol. ) Can be recognized.

  For example, the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (q)) in which the middle symbol is stopped may be displayed at the display timing of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG.

  Further, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 14, there is no prior ballet due to the display of the second decorative symbol, and only when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 15. You may do it.

  Moreover, you may make it a tip-barre generate | occur | produce in any of the case where a pseudo-continuous production is performed as shown in FIG. 14, and the case where a pseudo-continuous production is not performed as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15 (k), the timing (first timing) at which the animation of the scroll display of the pseudo-continuous symbol starts and the timing (second timing) at which the second decorative symbol is displayed are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.
<Example C>

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.
(Example C-1)

  FIGS. 7B to 7F show that the first image display device 2081 has a second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for executing the variation display (second variation display) of the second decorative symbol. It is an example of production when there is.

  That is, FIG. 14B to FIG. 14F correspond to the timing shown in FIG. 14H to FIG. 14L, respectively, and in FIG. 14H to FIG. The second decorative symbol displayed on the two-image display device 2082 is displayed on the second symbol display area 208Y provided on the first image display device 2081.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 16B, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. 16C, the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is gradually enlarged. The right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap the left end and right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively. For example, on the upper left side of the one-image display device 2081, only the second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for displaying the second decorative symbol (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying (first symbol). 2 decorative symbols are not displayed).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the horizontal width of the pseudo-symbol pattern is further enlarged, and “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are both pseudo-continuous. The symbols are completely overlapped with each other and cannot be visually recognized by the player (both decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are more difficult for the player to see than the pseudo-continuous symbols).

  Further, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the second symbol display area 208Y has the state shown in FIG. A second decorative symbol is displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) Is displayed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the same character (donor) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. That is, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first ballet, and at this timing (or later timing), the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Confirmation may be recognizable to the player.

  At this timing, at least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed, and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol. Also, the family crest character 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The display of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is being continued.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged first overlaps the second decorative design (overlapped by the second decorative design), and then the second image display device. Display is started at 2082.

Even if the player is unaware of the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 4D, the player operates the movable body (family crest object 244A) shown in FIG. It can be recognized that the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production thereby have been confirmed by the sound effect (here, rotating operation) and / or the speaker 120. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.
(Example C-2)

  FIG. 16 (h) to FIG. 16 (l) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, and are examples of effects in which a part of the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the first animation.

  FIGS. 16 (h) to (l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 14 (h) to 14 (l), respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, and at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (i), the horizontal width of the pseudo continuous symbol gradually increases. Start displaying. At this timing, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are not displayed. In addition, for example, at the upper part of the second image display device 2082, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the figure) for displaying the second decorative symbol starts displaying. (The second decorative design is not displayed).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. This second decorative design is in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the character (donor) symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. Thereby, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-symbol symbols in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first barre, and at this timing (or later timing), the pseudo-sequential effects are executed. May be recognized by the player.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (k), the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The display of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is being continued. At least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation displayed on the second image display device 2082.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged is first displayed on the second image display device 2082, and then the second decorative design (FIG. 15 (o)). ) (Overlapped by the second decorative pattern).

  In this production example, the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a that are not displayed in FIG. 14 (i) are at least the second animation (pseudo) shown in FIG. 14 (n). In the state before the non-display at the timing (for example, the timing executed in the period until the start of the continuous production) (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 14M) (in this example, the left symbol display area 208a displays “ The decoration symbol “decoration 6” and the decoration symbol “decoration 7” are redisplayed in the right symbol display area 208a.

As described above, when the first decorative symbol is not displayed during the execution of the first animation, the player can recognize the state of the decorative symbol by displaying the second decorative symbol. Note that the display start timing of the second decorative symbol is the same as in the case of the effect example of FIG.
(Example C-3)

  FIGS. 16 (n) to (o) are diagrams showing other examples of production, and are examples of production in the case of becoming a temper (reach) in FIG. 14 (d).

  FIG. 16 (n) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 14 (d). In FIG. 14 (d), an effect that makes it look like a temper (not actually a temper) is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 16 (n). Shows the state of becoming a temperament.

  The timing shown in FIG. 16 (o) indicates a state in which a tempering (reach) effect is being executed. In this example, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a). , “Decoration 6”) are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the decorative symbol (eg, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as compared to the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a. An animation that is displayed in a poorly visible state is being executed.

  Further, since the left symbol and the right symbol which are enlarged are overlapped, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol itself is difficult for the player to see compared to the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Here, “animation displayed in a poorly visible state for a player” means an animation that is less visible than the left and right symbols due to high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, An animation that is displayed in a state where the transmittance is higher than that of the right design (decorative design is displayed lightly)

  In this case (in the case of a template), the second decorative design is not displayed on any of the image display devices 208 ′. In other words, in this embodiment, the animation display with the right symbol and / or the left symbol is in a state where the visibility of the scroll display of the middle symbol is hindered (the state where the information notification by the first decorative symbol is hindered). However, the display of the second decorative symbol (notification of the information) is not performed.

In FIG. 4D, the display of the second decorative symbol is started, but the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by the display start timing of the second decorative symbol and the expansion of the pseudo continuous symbol. The timing may be simultaneous, or may be such that after the second decorative symbol starts displaying, the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by expanding the pseudo continuous symbol, After the continuous symbols are enlarged, the display may be started so that the second decorative symbols overlap the pseudo continuous symbols. The same applies to FIG.
<Example D>

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 14A, for example, the first decorative symbol variation display as shown in FIGS. 14B to 14C is executed, and the timing shown in FIG. 17B follows the left symbol. For example, the decorative pattern “decoration 6” in the display area 208a and the decorative symbol “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are fluctuated (temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14C corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 14G, and is the state where the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol), but is a special symbol (in this case, the character (princess) symbol) different from the pseudo-continuous effect stopped and displayed? This is an animation that sings about how to do it. For example, when a special symbol different from the pseudo-continuous effect (here, the character (princess) symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is the same type as the pseudo-continuous effect but another continuous effect (for example, a mini character MC described later). For example, a continuous production by a program, a continuous announcement production, etc.).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the middle symbol scrolling animation in which the special symbol of the character (princess) descends from above is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed, and then, for example, a rotating animation (second position) is left unchanged. Running animation).

  In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing shown in FIG. 5E is determined as the execution of the continuous performance is determined as the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in FIG. The state (for example, before a continuous production start) (2nd animation) regarding the continuous production is shown. Here, the second animation is an animation including an image in which an image of a character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!” is displayed.

  That is, in this production example, the display period of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. 4D (until the character (princess) symbol is rotated in FIG. ) Period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” symbol combination stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary change) in the first symbol display area 208X. Stop)) is being executed.

  At this timing, a small character (mini character MC) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. In this example, the mini character MC is a mini character (princess), and this display is a continuous effect (an effect display constituting at least a part of the continuous effect).

  In this example, the special symbol is a different symbol from the pseudo-continuous symbol. However, after the animation after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (second animation) is finished, the decorative symbol is displayed (stop display). In the case of redisplaying, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are displayed in the decorative pattern ("decoration 6") of the left symbol display area 208a when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. ) And the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (“decoration 7”) in the right symbol display area 208a are displayed.

  In such a case, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") in the right symbol display area 208a (or the same as the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a ("decoration 6")). Decorative symbols may be stopped. That is, at this timing, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed, and the display of the first decorative symbol resumed after the animation (second animation) is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, the decoration display of the decoration combination of “decoration 6—decoration 7—decoration 7” is stopped (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G indicates that the special symbol 1 (rectangle) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and are in a state in which the disconnection is stopped. Show. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol with high-speed variation is performed.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a white variation icon h0. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, and the white hold icon h11 is displayed on the left base of the change icon h0. Is informed that the hold of 1 is 1.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "1" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  Note that the mini character (princess) of the information in the explanation display part TT1 continues to be displayed (display is continued (carried over) until the next change). The number (display number) of mini characters (princesses) is increased by a special symbol (here, character (princess)) is stopped (see (d) in the figure)) during the subsequent games, As the number of displays increases, for example, the expectation degree of jackpot increases, and the player's expectation degree increases. That is, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same kind of effect as the pseudo-continuous effect in terms of continuous effect.

  On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous production is a continuous production within one variation, while the production in which the mini character (princess) of the present embodiment appears is a continuous production (continuous production called a horizontal series) that spans multiple variations. It can be said that this is a different kind of continuous production.

Further, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be referred to as an effect display similar to the meter display in that the player's expectation level increases as the display number increases. Therefore, instead of the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess), an effect of meter display (display in which the meter increases (or decreases)) may be used.
Further, the display number of the mini character (princess) may correspond to the number of continuous effects.

  In this example, the display of the second decorative symbol is not performed on the image display device 208 ′ (no prior blurring occurs).

In this example, the case where the special symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in the second animation display has been described. However, the configuration may be enlarged similarly to the pseudo-continuous symbol.
<Example E>

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.
(Example E-1)

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 18 (d), the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, and then, for example, the vertical position is left as it is. Running, rotating animation.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed (stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the right figure of FIG. Specifically, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, a numerical decorative pattern (for example, “decoration 6”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporarily stopped), and in the middle symbol display area 208k, a numerical decoration is displayed. A symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and in the right symbol display area 208l, a numerical ornament symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporary stop).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H, except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. It is.

  That is, in the same figure (e), the second animation (an animation including an image in which an image of the character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!”) is executed is executed, and (f) in FIG. Is executed in the first symbol display area 208X by the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, stop display of the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop)). At the same time, a mini character (princess) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the special symbol 1 (square) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and the deviation is stopped. It is shown that. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place). The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  Thus, in the same figure (d) and the same figure (e), the 2nd decoration symbol of the combination of the same decoration design as the 1st decoration design displayed in the figure (f) and the same figure (g) is stopped and displayed. There is a tip-up.

  In this way, in this embodiment, even if the symbol is a special symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, the second decorative symbol causes a tip-up, but the symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol does not include a special symbol ( There is no special symbol), and there is a tip-barre due to the combination of all decorative symbols that do not include special symbols.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) is consumed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081 have high-speed fluctuation. The first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) is performed, and also in the symbol display areas 208j to 208l of the second image display device 2082, the high-speed variation second ornament symbol variation display (second variation). Display). Since other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

  In this example, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol that starts display in FIG. 4D may be the same as the stop timing (second timing) of the special symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol for starting display in FIG. 9 (d) and the rotation start timing (second timing) of the special symbol may be the same, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

In addition, the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol starting in FIG. 11 (h) is the same as the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
(Example E-2)

  FIG. 18 (m) to FIG. 18 (o) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, which are examples of effects when other special symbols are displayed.

  The timings shown in (m) and (n) are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b). The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (c), but is different from the special symbol of the character (princess) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. (A) An animation in which a special symbol is scroll-displayed (first animation) is being executed. The special symbol in this example is, for example, a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”), and when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A high-speed pseudo-ream effect is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area. In the timing shown in (q), when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative display variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. This shows a state in which the production is executed. In this case, for example, the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream (in this example, “second shot”) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the production of the high-speed pseudo-ream, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) is scrolled, stopped (temporarily stopped), and first changed (re-changed) is displayed at a high speed, for example 100. Repeated (until the display of the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream is “100th”).

  In this effect example, the special symbol may include a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream, a pseudo-continuous symbol (character (dono) symbol) as shown in FIG. 14, or a symbol in another effect mode. .

  Further, in this effect example, the second decorative symbol is not displayed and no prior ball is generated, but the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In this case, the display start timing of the second decorative symbol may be any timing from (n) to (p) in FIG. In addition, the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the figure (q). In this case, for example, the same stop display as the first decorative symbol in FIG. Display similar to the display in the first symbol display area 208X in FIG.

14 may be developed after the normal pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 14, or only one of them may be executed.
<Example F>

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing step by step another example of an effect (for example, an effect of a high-speed pseudo-ream) centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B to FIG. 6C is the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display, FIG. 8F) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. ) Is the same as the timing shown in FIGS. 18 (n) to (o) except that the display is performed, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X. , Temporarily stopped). Even at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 (not stopped).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6E, when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. A state in which a pseudo-ream effect is being executed is shown. Also at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed (not stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y. Other configurations are the same as the configurations of FIGS. 18 (n) to 18 (q).

  In this example, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 during the period of FIGS. continuing. And in the period of Drawing 19 (b)-the figure (d), the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design are in a different state. As described above, when the effect of the high-speed quasi-continuation is executed (even if a break (such as a temporary stop of a special symbol) may be provided during the performance of the high-speed quasi-continuation, the second variation display is continued. It may be.

In this example, since there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol, there is no prior blurring. However, if the way of viewing is changed, there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol (the display of variation of the second decorative symbol (second variation display) continues to be displayed), so that the normal pseudo-continuation is displayed. It can also be said that the player may be able to recognize whether it is an effect or a high-speed pseudo-ream effect (for example, it can be recognized by an advanced player).
<Example G>

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step, and is an example of effects when button effects are executed.
(Example G-1)

  The timing shown in FIG. 14B is the same as that shown in FIG. 14J except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display region 208j of the second symbol display region 208Y, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in a stopped manner (swaying fluctuation) in the right symbol display region 208l. , Temporarily stopped), and the middle symbol variation display (high-speed variation) is executed in the middle symbol display area 208k.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the pseudo continuous symbol that has been enlarged and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X stops its enlarged display. The display size of the pseudo-continuous symbols at this timing is, for example, the same display size as that in FIG. 10B, and more specifically, the display of pseudo-continuous symbols (FIG. 14G, etc.) that are scroll-displayed. The size is larger than the size and does not exceed the display area of the first image display device 2081 (a level where pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083).

  At this timing, an effect related to the operation means (button effect) is executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern (overlapping a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern). The animation related to the button effect includes, for example, a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and a display that indicates a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The display for prompting the operation of the operation means is, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 (button image BG), a character “arrow!” And an arrow, and a display indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 ( The elapsed time notification image TG) displays, for example, the entire reception valid period as a colored (other than white) painted image, and the filled image becomes smaller as the reception valid period elapses (the meter subtracts (decreases)). This is the display that executes the animation. In accordance with this, the chance button 136 notifies that the built-in LED is lit red and that the operation is possible.

  In this example, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are overlapped on the front of the enlarged pseudo-simulated symbol. Although the example in which the image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other is shown, at least the elapsed time notification image TG in which a meter is subtracted and displayed on at least a part of the front of the enlarged pseudo-simultaneous symbol is shown. You may be comprised so that a part may overlap.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 15 (p) continues for the second decorative symbol as in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this embodiment, until the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped, and the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. If this happens, the animation of the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 15 (p) continues for the second decorative symbol as in FIG.

  That is, in the figure (b)-the figure (d), the state of the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design differs.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbol is resumed by the operation of the chance button 136 and the width is further enlarged. At this timing, the left and right ends of the pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  Further, in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y by the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. (Provisional stop display) with the symbol combination of “pseudo-symbol-decoration 7”, and thus, the start of the pseudo-continuous effect has been confirmed (not visible in the first symbol display area 208X (difficult to see) (Instead of the first decorative symbol), a stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols is informed). In the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is at least the second decorative symbol. (In this example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area).

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, the family crest member 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (f), the enlarged display of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 5 (e)), and the family crest character that has risen 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120. In the state where the button image is not displayed ((e) and (f) in the figure), the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 (and the third image display device 2083) are spread over. A pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is displayed. In the second decorative design, the state shown in FIG.

  Since the configuration other than this is the same as the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 14K to 14N, description thereof will be omitted.

  In this example, the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation (stopping animation of special symbols, animation of middle symbols). That is, the first animation includes an animation related to the button effect (button effect animation). In this case, the button effect animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. The button effect animation may be displayed only on the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), or may be displayed on each of the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. One button effect animation may be displayed over the image display device 208 ′.

  When the button effect is executed, until the button effect starts (for example, until the button effect animation shown in FIG. 10C starts displaying), the first symbol display device 2081 displays an enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols. When (enlarged animation) is executed and the button effect starts, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbols is resumed.

  In addition, from the start of the button effect until the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 15 (p)). In this state, by operating the chance button 136, the decorative symbol (in this case, the pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 20 (e)). In the first image display device 2081, the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  That is, when the chance button 136 is operated at the time t1 from the start of the button effect, the second time is earlier than when the chance button 136 is operated after the time t2 (t2> t1) from the start of the button effect. The decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the presence or absence of execution of a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) can be recognized at an early stage (a leading ball is generated by the second decorative symbol).

  In this example, after the operation of the chance button 136, the second image display device 2082 performs the stop display of the second decorative symbol (first timing), and the first image display device 2081 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol. The timing at which the enlarged display resumes (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing is earlier than the first timing. It may be early.

Note that even when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10D, the second decorative symbol (medium symbol) is not stopped and the variable display may be continued in FIG.
(Example G-2)

  FIGS. 11 (h) to 11 (l) show a case where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is not performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The timings shown in FIGS. 1H to 1L correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 1B to 1F, respectively, and therefore redundant description is omitted. To do.

  Even in the case where the button effect is started in (i) in the same figure, as shown in (j) and (k) in the same figure, the operation is not performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed, and the variable display is continued (state shown in FIG. 15 (p)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L indicates a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In this case, when the time expires, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k (the state shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 20 (e)).

Further, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, and the enlarged display animation of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first image display device 2081 cannot be resumed, at the timing shown in FIG. The maximum size pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed.
(Example G-3)

  FIGS. (N) to (r) are cases where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. This is an example of the case where the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the timings shown in (n) to (r) of the same figure are shown in (b) to (f) of FIG. Since it corresponds to the timing shown, overlapping description is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated. Then, at the timing shown in (q) in the figure, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design is completed, and the display size before enlargement (in the initial state) in the middle design display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 is displayed. The display size) pseudo-continuous pattern shows a state where scroll display is started. Further, in the second image display device 2082, stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the second decorative symbol is executed. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the lower diagram of (q) in the figure, and is a (temporary) stop display of a symbol combination of a numerical decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”). . Thereby, the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed (the execution of the pseudo-continuous effects does not start) is prejudice.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”) having the same symbol combination as the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. Fluctuating, temporarily stopping), and notifying that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect does not start.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first symbol display area 208X is shown in the figure (q) from the display size shown in the figure (p) between the figure (p) and the figure (q). An animation that is reduced to the display size may be executed, or after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10 (p), the enlarged display is temporarily resumed and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, the maximum size). An animation that is later reduced to the display size shown in FIG.

  When the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 8 (p), the second image display device 2082 displays a second decorative pattern of numbers (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8- That the decorative combination of the symbol combination “decoration 7” is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the first image display device 2081 executes the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, and then the pseudo-continuous effect does not start to be executed. The suggested pseudo-continuous symbols are scrolled ((p) in the figure).

Note that the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) of the first decorative symbol does not start execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) because the special symbol does not stop at a predetermined position and the scroll display starts. There is also a configuration in which a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a false manner (a continuous effect (a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed), and the present embodiment can be applied even with this configuration. In that case, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (q), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol so that the first barre occurs. Alternatively, at the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative design and the second decorative design (decoration of the same design combination) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous design in the middle design as shown in FIG. (Design) may be stopped and displayed.
<Example H>

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is an effect example performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state where reach is formed, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the left symbol display region 208c of the first symbol display region 208X. In the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops), and in the middle symbol display region 208b, the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the middle symbol changes to low speed fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this low-speed fluctuation, for example, when the middle symbol passes “decoration 7”, other than the deviation is determined. Further, when the middle symbol stops before “decoration 5”, or when the middle symbol stops at “decoration 7”, the deviation is determined.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which an effect (notice effect) indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach (for example, a swordsman reach) has been started. That is, in the first image display device 2081, a reduced display animation is executed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually reduced while temporarily stopped. In addition, at a certain timing during the execution of the animation of the reduced display, the second image display device 2082 starts displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol. In the icon display area 800, a pedestal appears below the change icon h01.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the animation of the reduced display of the left symbol and the right symbol is further advanced in the first image display device 2081, and the first image is displayed while the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced. An animation that moves so as to be spaced apart from each other in the upper left and upper right of the display area of the device 2081 is executed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which a display (notice effect) for notifying that the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) effect is started is executed, and the first image display device 2081 cuts the swordsman. An in-image (here, a character (swordsman) and an image on which characters “swordsman see !!”) are displayed.

  In the icon display area 800, the pedestal of the change icon h0, the other hold icons h11 and h12, and the pedestal of the hold icon are deleted, and only the change icon h0 is displayed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows a state in which the scene changes in the first image display device 2081, the confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the character (swordsman) is displayed, and the super reach production has started. Yes.

  Further, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, the left symbol display area 208j and the right symbol display area 208l each have a decorative symbol (both in this example). “Decoration 6”) is temporarily displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display starts with the second decorative symbol in the variable display state in the reach effect ((d) in the figure), and after the notice effect (super (f) in the figure) of the super reach effect is executed. When the super reach production is started, a temporary stop of the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol is displayed ((g) in the figure).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state where a special effect (special display EX) is being executed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The special effect is, for example, one of the notice effects informing that the promotion effect is executed. The special effect is an effect that is not executed in the first symbol area 208X, and is, for example, a display that reduces the visibility of the second symbol display area 208Y. In this example, the character display “CHANCE” is displayed (special display EX) on the front side of the second decorative symbol shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, that is, over the symbol display areas 208j to 208l. )It is carried out. The special effects may or may not be executed, and the ratio of execution (appearance) varies. In other words, the probability that the special effect is executed differs depending on the super reach effect being executed. Another production having a higher jackpot expectation than a certain production is configured such that the execution probability of the special production is higher when other conditions are the same. The probability that this special effect is executed (appearance) is 0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, and the like.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which the scene immediately after the confrontation is displayed on the first image display device 2081. At this timing, the special display EX in the second symbol display area 208Y is erased, and the second decorative symbol in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the first image display device 2081 displays the scene where the character (dono) has won, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) shakes in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows a state of being fluctuated (temporarily stopped). Also, in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 8 (j), the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display area 208k, and the big hit The second decorative design fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state where the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, a jackpot symbol promotion effect, and a large button image BG that makes the first decorative symbol invisible or difficult to be viewed by the player is displayed overlapping the first decorative symbol. A display prompting an operation of 136 (in this example, a character “press!” And an image of an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The display of the button image BG makes it difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, but the second decorative symbol is the same jackpot symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, the same symbol (J) Fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) by the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” shown in the right figure is visible to the player.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at this timing (within the operation acceptance period indicated by the elapsed time notification image TG), the first symbol display area 208X and the second symbol display are displayed as shown in FIG. In any of the areas 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after the promotion (here, the decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” sways and fluctuates (temporarily stops) and becomes visible to the player. If the opportunity button 136 is not operated during the acceptance valid period and time is up, the promotion may be promoted and the display shown in FIG.

  In this effect example, when the button effect shown in FIG. 5K is executed, it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, and the second decorative symbol is visually recognized by the player in the second symbol display area 208Y. Although it is possible, the first ballet in the second decorative symbol (the first ballet of the combination of the decorative symbols after promotion shown in FIG. 1 (l)) does not occur.

  Thus, even in the case of developing into a super reach effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at least at any timing before the development.

  For the player, the most interesting point is the result of the success or failure of the super reach production. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first symbol display area 208X in the super reach effect, it is necessary to convey the state of the decorative symbol to the player by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The nature is low. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y during execution of the super reach effect, the special effect related to the second decorative symbol (for example, the visibility of the second decorative symbol is reduced). Such as production). This special effect is executed with a certain probability (0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.) depending on the situation.

  In FIG. 4D, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol starts (first timing) and the timing at which the reduced display of the first decorative symbol starts (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, in the same figure (g), the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stop (first timing) and the timing when the super reach production starts (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Moreover, the timing at which the special effect (special display EX) of the second decorative symbol starts is not limited to the timing in FIG.

  Also, in FIG. 6 (j), notification is made of the timing at which the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stops (first timing) and the result of whether or not the super reach effect is achieved (in this example, the character (donor) has won). The display timing (second timing) to be displayed may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. Good.

In FIG. 1L, the timing at which the first decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the second decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (second timing) are the same. It may be timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
<Example I>

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and is another example of effects performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  Since the timing shown in FIG. 21B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state in which the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, an extra ball effect, and a button image BG on the first image display device 281 and a display urging the user to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, the text “Add extra ball!”) An arrow image) and an elapsed time notification image TG representing a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  At this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after promotion (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in the right figure of FIG. 10C) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Barre is occurring.

  That is, as a result of the determination of success / failure, it is assumed that 16R jackpot is actually won, but in FIG. 4B, for example, a 4R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 5C, the ball-out effect is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won (first ballet by the second decorative symbol).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the number of extra balls is displayed (out of ball display TT2). This is a state in which an effect of notifying that the player has been added is being executed. Here, the extra ball display TT2 is a display of an image of “+600”, thereby notifying that 600 balls have been added. The state of the second decorative design is the same as the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the player who has visually recognized the number of extra balls displayed TT2 may be able to predict the number of rounds actually won from the number of extra balls displayed. That is, if the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit is 2400 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 16R) as an example, for example, as shown in FIG. The number of balls obtained by a combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is 600 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 4R).

  In other words, the player who has visually recognized the display of the number of extra balls shown in (d) of the figure can actually use this number (or its addition) (even if the actual number of winning rounds by the second decorative symbol is unknown). Can predict how many R jackpots are. In other words, the display of the number of extra balls in this case is a notification relating to the jackpot (notification regarding how many R jackpots the actual jackpot is (the number of rounds actually won)).

  In (e) to (i) in the figure, the button effect (progress on the ball appearance) (chance button 136 operation by the player) and the display number TT2 on the ball appearance on the ball are repeated several times. At the timing shown, an extra ball number display TT2 (in this example, “MAX”) indicating that the extra ball number has reached the maximum number is executed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), the 16R big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. It is notified that the number of balls (the number of prize balls) is a big hit of 2400 balls). During the period from FIG. 10C to FIG. 10K, the temporary stop display of the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) continues in the second symbol display area 208Y. (The first ballet with the second decorative pattern is continuing).

  In this example, the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit (for example, 2400 balls) and the number of balls that are added in the same figure (d), figure (f) and figure (h) Depending on the display TT2 (total), the player may be able to recognize that the player has won the 16R jackpot at the timing shown in FIG. In other words, it can be said that the tip ball is generated by the extra ball number display TT2 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 8C, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol on the second image display device 2082 starts (first timing), and the timing at which the button effect on the first image display device 2081 starts (second). May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Thus, in one effect (for example, the jackpot symbol promotion effect shown in FIGS. 21 (k) to 21 (l)) performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, the second decorative symbol is displayed before the chance button 136 is operated. In the other effects (for example, the effects such as the appearance of adding a ball as shown in FIG. 22 or the effect of adding a bonus R number) shown in FIG. The first burr (FIG. 22 (c)) may occur.
<Example J>

FIGS. 23A to 23G are diagrams showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. In addition to the above, it is an effect example in which the third decorative symbol is displayed.
(Example J-1)

  FIGS. 23A to 23F are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 16A to 16F except that the third decorative symbol is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z. Therefore, it demonstrates centering around a different point mainly and abbreviate | omits other description.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z separately from the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. As an example, the image display device One of 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081) is always displayed at least during the decorative symbol variation game (timing during execution of the decorative symbol variation display or stop display) (first display). 2 is a decorative symbol (displayed even if no decorative symbol is displayed). In addition, the display size of each of the third decorative symbols is at least smaller than the display size of each of the first decorative symbols, and the overall display size of the third decorative symbol is at least larger than the entire display size of the first decorative symbol. It is a small decorative design (mini decorative design). In the following description, when “the third decorative symbol is always displayed” is described, it means “the third decorative symbol is always displayed during the period in which the decorative symbol is displayed”. .

  The display of the third decorative symbol is continued during the period of FIG. 10 (a) to FIG. 10 (g). During the display, for example, as shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the position of 208Z may move.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, for example, after the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the other movable bodies (the eight generations 224B and the generals 224C) descend from the initial position, and the first image display device 2081 is displayed. It is in the state which overlaps with the upper front. At this timing, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol and a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y are covered by the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C so that it can be visually recognized by the player. It is difficult (not visible).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (g), the first image display device 2081 is provided with the third symbol display area 208Z and is always displayed during the variable game of FIG. Yes. In this example, since the period shown in FIGS. 23 (b) to 23 (g) is during the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (timing during decorative display of the decorative symbol), the first decorative symbol is not visible to the player. Even at the timing ((d) to (g) in the figure), the second decorative symbol is not displayed (difficult to see) (the timing (b), (c), (g) in the figure) The third decorative symbol is always displayed. Note that even if a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the third decorative symbol does not have a special symbol and is displayed in a stopped state. There is no.

Further, the third symbol display area 208Z is configured to be movable. As shown in FIGS. 9E to 9F, for example, a movable body or the like moves to the front of the image display device 208 ′, and Even when at least part of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize by the movable body, the third decorative symbol is always visible to the player by the movement of the third symbol display area 208Z. .
(Example J-2)

  FIGS. (N) to (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages. This is another example of the effect in which the third decorative symbol is displayed in addition to the decorative symbol.

  FIGS. (N) to (o) are the same timings as the effects in FIGS. 21 (c) to 21 (d), but the second symbol display is displayed on the upper left of the first image display device 2081, for example. An area 208Y is provided to display a second decorative symbol, and a third symbol display area 208Z is provided above the explanation display area TT1 to constantly display the third decorative symbol. That is, there is a case in which a plurality of mini decorative symbols may be displayed (simultaneously) on one image display device (first image display device 2081). However, the states of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are different.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (n), the right symbol and the left symbol (for example, “decoration 6”, respectively) of the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is changing at high speed (FIG. 21 (g) right). Figure state). In addition, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 10 (o), a reach effect is started and a reduced movement animation of a first decorative symbol (for example, a right symbol and a left symbol in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped, respectively) is being executed. It is. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In the figure (p) and the figure (q), the first decorative symbol approaches the second decorative symbol due to the reduced movement animation, and a part of the first decorative symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol. Is in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  FIG. 7 (r) shows a state where one (the first decorative symbol in this example) is not displayed after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are substantially overlapped. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in (n) to (r) in the figure, the second decorative design is displayed on, for example, the second image display device 2082, and the first decoration is shown in (p) to (q) in the figure. The left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol move to the left and right respectively, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third image display device 2083. You may comprise. In this case, it may be configured such that the left symbol of the first decorative symbol moves in the direction of the second decorative symbol in the second image display device 2082, and is erased (not displayed) when it overlaps.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed only for a certain period when a certain condition is satisfied, whereas the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is always displayed.

  In addition, although each Example (production example) described in this specification can be applied in appropriate combination, when applied in combination with the present Example, the second decorative design in each Example is always displayed. It will never be done.

  Further, the design of the third decorative design may be different from the design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. Even in this case, the third decorative design is always displayed.

  Also, as shown in (g), (p), and (q) in the figure, the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the first decorative symbol, a movable body, etc., and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). However, the third decorative symbol (which is configured to be able to move and display) is always displayed even if the first decorative symbol or the movable body moves.

On the other hand, the third decorative symbol is configured to be visible to a player whose decorative symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, and it is difficult to specify the symbol compared to the second decorative symbol. Further, since the third decorative symbol does not include a special symbol, the combination (state) of the decorative symbol is not notified to the player as an alternative to the first decorative symbol, unlike the second decorative symbol.
<Example of production K>

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the third image display. It is an effect example related to the operation of the device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083.
(Example of production K-1)

  FIGS. 9A to 10B show an example of effects produced by the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083. In this example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 17A shows the timing corresponding to the timing shown in FIG. 17B. The second image display device (left sub-liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub-liquid crystal) 2083 are background images. Only displayed. At this timing, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in the initial positions and are farthest from each other, and the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps with the left end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the left of the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 overlaps with the right end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is disposed on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which one special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is divided and displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 at the initial position. At this timing, only the frame portion of the second symbol display area 208Y starts displaying on the main liquid crystal 2081. In this embodiment, when the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to predetermined positions, the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and cannot be visually recognized by the player. In this example, the middle symbol display area 208k of the second decorative symbol is not overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 at the timing shown in FIG. In the state shown in j), a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized this may be able to recognize the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) (the first decorative symbol has occurred).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 start moving (sliding) in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 so as to be close to each other. Due to the movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is completely overlapped, and the whole is not visible to the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) at the front center of the main liquid crystal 2081 and stopped. When the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact with each other, the pseudo continuous images that are divided and displayed on both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are integrated (strand) over both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083. Is displayed. Thereby, it becomes the state of the stop display of a pseudo | simulation continuous symbol, and execution of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect is started after this. The first decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, and most of them cannot be recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative design once overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 is exposed from the left side of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is again visible to the player. The second decorative symbol is in the state shown in FIG. 6 (j). Similar to the display of the pseudo decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, the pseudo decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Stop is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 again start moving in directions away from each other toward the initial position. At this timing, the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 that has been overlapped by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 is again visible to the player. In this example, in the state where the special symbols are continuously displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, another symbol (in this case, “decoration”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the main liquid crystal 2081. 7 ”is temporarily stopped and the combination of the first decorative symbols“ decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X). Has been. Further, a pseudo continuous number display (in this example, “× 2” indicating two times) is displayed.

  At this timing, the second decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is again overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to the initial positions, and the special symbols displayed on both the sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are not displayed. Further, at this timing, a part of the second decorative design (FIG. (J)) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is not visible to the player by overlapping with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 are not displayed. The timing shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is resumed.

  Note that the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the start timing of movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (second timing) in FIG. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol non-display timing (first timing) and the completion timing (end of movement) of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 to the initial positions in FIG. 2) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In this production example, at least one sub liquid crystal is displayed in at least one of the states in which a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a state corresponding to a stop display of a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design)). (At least one of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a certain position.

The second decorative pattern is overlapped by the moving sub liquid crystal in at least a part of the period when the sub liquid crystal moves.
(Example of production K-2)

  24 (m) to 24 (r) show other examples of effects by the moving left sub liquid crystal 2082 and right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this example, one of the movable sub liquid crystals (for example, the left sub liquid crystal 2082) is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  (M) to (r) in the same figure, except that the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, respectively (b) to (g). Since the configuration is the same as that shown, only different portions will be described and redundant description will be omitted.

  That is, as in the same figure (b) to (g), in this production example, in a state of notifying that a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design) is stopped) In at least one of the corresponding states, at least one of the sub liquid crystals (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a position.

  At this time, since the second decorative symbol (FIG. (J)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 after the timing of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed while the second decorative symbol is being displayed. (N) to (r)) are not overlapped by other configurations and are always visible to the player.

  The second decorative design slides in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 in the left-right direction as the left sub liquid crystal 2082 moves.

  In this way, the (auxiliary) second decorative symbol that is an alternative to the first decorative symbol is always visible to the player during the display, and is moved and displayed, so that the decorative symbol can be changed or displayed. The player can easily recognize the state such as a temporary stop display.

In the example of production shown in FIG. 24, an example in which one special symbol is displayed by two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 has been described. However, a plurality of liquid crystals including at least one sub liquid crystal (image display device 208 ′) Two special symbols may be displayed. For example, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082 may be configured to display one special symbol, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 may be configured to display one special symbol, or all the liquid crystal display devices 208 may be configured. A configuration may be used in which one special symbol is displayed by '.
<Production example L>

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and shows the operation of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. It is another related production example.

  The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 may be arranged above and below the first image display device 208, respectively. As an example, the image display device arranged on the upper side of the first image display device 2081 is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the lower side is the third image display device 2083.

  As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the vertical (height) direction that is shorter than a half of the length of the first image display device 2081, and also have a length in the width direction. Slightly short. Further, at the initial position, the second image display device 2082 has at least the lower end side portion thereof overlapping the front side of the upper end side portion of the first image display device 2081, and the third image display device 2083 has at least the upper end side thereof. The portion overlaps the front side of the lower end side portion of the first image display device 2081.

In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or separated from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable in the vertical direction (sliding movement).
(Example L-1)

  First, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 25A to 25C, the second image display device 2082 and the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol are provided.

  The timing shown to (a) of the figure is the state which has started the variable display of the 1st decoration symbol. As described above, in this embodiment, the first symbol display area 208X is provided on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2083). The variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′.

  In addition, in the case of stop display (determined display), the first decorative symbol may be configured not to straddle the three image display devices 208 ′, or the first decorative design may be displayed on the first image display device 2081. A part of the decorative design may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), and among the first decorative symbols displayed on the first image display device 2081 Only the middle symbol may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is the first animation (special symbol) in the first image display device 2081 that is visible to the player from between the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. Is a state in which a stop-swing animation and a medium-scheming animation) are being executed. Further, the first animation in this case is an animation including a button effect animation, and a button image BG on the front of the special symbol (so as to overlap), an image suggesting button operation (here, “Press!”) And an elapsed time notification image TG are displayed.

  At this timing, the first animation is executed on the first image display device 2081 so that the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the second image display device 2082, at this timing, display of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 15 (o) is started, and the decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208j. ), A special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k, and a decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208l, and the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started. Is informed of the decision. In FIG. 25, all the second decorative symbols are in the state shown in FIG.

  In this example, the first animation is executed only on the first image display device 2081, but a part thereof may be executed on the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, an effect of notifying that a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed (in this example, a long scroll “ The notice effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed is executed. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  This notice effect is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′. That is, a part of the notice effect (in this example, a part of the scroll) is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, but the second decorative design is displayed overlapping the notice effect. The decorative design is visible to the player. In other words, the first decorative symbol (particularly the middle symbol) of the first image display device 2081 is not visible to the player, but the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed). Is recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′, but the special symbol or button image does not straddle the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. The image is displayed on the one-image display device 2081. Here, in this embodiment, “displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′” includes “displayed over a plurality of all image display devices 208 ′”. In other words, as shown in FIG. 5A, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device with the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 separated from each other. This means that the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner across 2083.

In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the structure by which the scroll display of the symbol (for example, middle symbol) with a 1st decoration symbol is displayed ranging over several image display apparatus 208 'may be sufficient. In addition, you may replace the structure which performs the button effect shown in FIG. 20 with a present Example.
(Example L-2)

  The effect examples shown in (d) to (e) of the figure are examples in which the notice effect is executed by the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 slide and move toward each other, abut (adjacent up and down), and the first decorative design is visually recognized by the player. It is a disabled state. Even at this timing, it is possible for the player to recognize the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed) by the second decorative symbol.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated and return to the initial position. At this timing, the same display as in FIG.
(Example L-3)
FIG. 25 (g) to FIG. 25 (h) show other examples of effects.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. This is a state in which an effect of notifying that (in this example, a notification effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed on the scroll) is being executed. The notice effect is executed only by the first image display device 2081, and behind that, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are displayed. Although it is visible to the player, the middle symbol is overlapped by the notice effect, and is not visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the player recognizes that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped) by the second decorative symbol. It is possible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entirety of the notice effect is visible to the player.

In addition, the second decorative symbol moves relatively downward as the second image display device 2082 moves, but does not overlap with the notice effect displayed on the two-image display device 2082, and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible.
(Example L-4)

  FIG. 25 (i) to FIG. 25 (j) show other examples of effects. In this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol of the first image display device 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5I is a state in which the first decorative design is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and a notice effect is executed overlapping with a part thereof. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  On the other hand, it moves to the 1st image display apparatus 2081, a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed above the 1st decoration symbol, and it can be visually recognized by a player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part of the second decorative symbol is not visible to the player.

  (Example L-5) FIGS. 25 (k) to 25 (l) show other examples. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (i), and the second decorative symbol moves to the first image display device 2081 and is displayed above the first decorative symbol. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 moves to the second image display device 2082 and is visible to the player.

  The timing at which the second decorative symbol moves may be before the second image display device 2082 is overlapped, may be at the same time as the overlap, or overlaps the second image display device 2082. It may be after.

  Thus, in the present embodiment (FIG. (A) to (c), FIG. (D) to (e), (g) to (h)), there are a plurality of special symbols. Displayed on each of the image display devices (here, the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082), and the other image (here, the image of the notice effect) is displayed only on the front of one of the special symbols. The notice effect is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  In this embodiment (FIG. (K) to (l)), the image display device (here, the second image display device 2082) is moved and another image display device (here, the first image display device is here). In the case of overlapping the second decorative symbol displayed in 2081), the second decorative symbol moves to the second image display device 2082 and maintains a state that can be recognized by the player. In this case, the other display (for example, the first decorative design) does not move to the second image display device 2082, but the other display (for example, the image of the notice effect) that is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (Part of the image) is displayed on the second image display device 2082 (moved to the second image display device 2082).

Further, as shown in FIGS. (I) to (j), the second decorative design may not move even if it is overlapped by the moving second image display device 2082.
<Example M>

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment step by step.
(Example of production M-1)
The same figure (b)-the same figure (e) are the example of effects during a big hit.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state before the big hit game is started, and a jackpot symbol combination (for example, “1” is displayed as the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081. “Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and the built-in LED of the chance button 136 is rainbow-colored. In the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, a second decorative symbol having the same contents as the first decorative symbol is displayed as shown in the lower diagram of FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is a state of a big hit game (for example, during a round game), and an effect during a big hit is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081 (including the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083). Yes. During the big hit game, in principle, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which the big hit game is continued, but is a state in which the error is notified by the occurrence of an error (for example, a lower pan full tank error). The error notification is, for example, an error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, display of characters “please remove the ball”). In this case, for example, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 displays the second decorative symbol (decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the error display E1 in the main liquid crystal 2081 is not displayed due to the cancellation of the error. At this timing, the second decorative symbol is also not displayed again.

  In this case, in FIG. 4D, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In FIG. 9E, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is not displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example of production M-2)

  Next, (g) to (l) in the figure are examples of effects in the case of performing effects using the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the same symbol (for example, “decoration 1”) is temporarily stopped for the right symbol and the left symbol, and the middle symbol is changing. Thus, the reach production has been started. In this case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 5F) is displayed.

The timing shown in FIGS. 11H to 11L is a state in which the middle symbol countdown display is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. On the other hand, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 5F (the countdown display is not performed). Thus, in the case of performing an effect using the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X (not limited to the countdown display), the middle symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display area 208Y. The display may be continued.
(Example of production M-3)

  Next, (m) to (o) in the figure are examples of effects when a triple line reach effect is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) is a state in which a triple line reach effect by the first decorative symbol is being executed, and in this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) is a state in which the turning effect of the line with the first decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is being executed. In this case, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed in the same symbol combination as the decorative symbol of the line (in this example, “decoration 7”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (o) is a state in which the turning effect of another line of the first decorative design (in this example, “decoration 8”) is being executed. In this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design may be displayed when a certain line is produced in the ripple line reach, and the second decorative design may be hidden in the case of double line reach.

  In addition, in the same figure (n), the timing (1st timing) at which a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed, and the start timing (2nd timing) of the roaring effect of a 1st decoration symbol are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In FIG. 5 (o), the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the first decorative symbol is turned on (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example of production M-4)

  27 (b) to 27 (e) are examples of effects when the second decorative symbol is displayed, for example, between FIGS. 14 (g) to 14 (h).

  The timing shown in FIG. 14B is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 14G, and the main liquid crystal 2081 is in a state where the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) is being executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in the main liquid crystal 2081, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the special symbol is stopped), and the second decorative symbol is also in the same state as the first decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o) state). At this timing, the main liquid crystal 2081 performs an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “display group integrated effect”) in which the display mode is integrally changed for a plurality of displays (display group G) in the display area. As an example of the display group integrated production, the display group G can be integrally enlarged, reduced, tilted, and rotated (production of one or a combination of these), or the display group can be shaken integrally. An effect to be displayed (shake vision effect) or an animation effect including these scenes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5C, a display group integrated effect is performed to incline the display group G integrally.

  Specifically, a plurality of displays in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081 (a plurality of display groups G including a background display) are integrally tilted with respect to an outer frame (physical frame) of the main liquid crystal 2081 ( Scene). In such a display group integrated production, a plurality of display groups G including a background display are slightly reduced and tilted integrally, so that a space is generated in the actual display area, and the space is filled with, for example, black. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 even while the display group integrated effect is being executed. In this example, the second decorative design is not inclined and is displayed in a predetermined area. The display content (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is the same as the display content (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol displayed in the display group integrated production. In this example, “decoration 6-special symbol ( It is a symbol combination of a decorative symbol of “Pseudo-continuous symbol) -decoration 7”.

  The second decorative design is displayed so as to overlap a space (black filled display) generated by the inclination of the display group G over at least a part of the inclined display group G. The second decorative symbol may be displayed so as to overlap only in the space (black fill display) generated by the inclination of the display group G, or overlap only in the inclined display group G. It may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may be displayed with an inclination at the same angle as the display group G.

  Even if the display group integrated effect may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative design, the combination of the decorative design (its state) may be recognized by the player using the second decorative design (second). It is possible to make a ballet with decorative designs).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the display group integrated production is finished. At this timing, the display group G displayed in an inclined manner returns to the normal display state, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed at the same position. In this example, a part of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6” on the left symbol) that has returned to the normal display is overlapped with the second decorative symbol. The state of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is the same.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 14H, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing which the display start of the 2nd decoration symbol (1st timing) and the start timing (2nd timing) of a display group integrated production may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example of production M-5)

  (G) to (i) in the figure are examples of effects when the design of the decorative symbols changes in, for example, the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game.

  For example, the maximum number of reserves is 8, and the specifications differ between the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game (for example, the special 1 variable game has a probability variation of 50% and the special 2 variable game has a probability variation of 100%, or 16R big hit In other cases, the design of at least a part of the decorative symbol may be different between the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special symbol 2. The present embodiment is a display example of the second decorative symbol in such a case.

  Specifically, in this example, the floating game of the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the floating game of the special figure 1, and for example, the special figure 2 has a symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. 16R is a big hit in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 3”, whereas FIG. 1 shows 16R only in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. It will be a big hit.

  Further, it is assumed that the design for the 16R jackpot is different in design from at least a part of other decorative designs. For example, the mark M indicating the 16R big hit symbol is given to the right symbol (“decoration 7”) in FIG. That is, in the variable game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the decoration symbol “decoration 7”, and in the special game of the special figure 2, the mark M is given to the decoration symbols “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. Is done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (g) is a combination of symbols shifted to the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 as a result of the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). The first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  Since it is the variable game of special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the right design ("decoration 7") of the first decorative design, and the mark M is not given to the left design ("decoration 3").

  At this timing, the special figure 1 hold is 2, the special figure 2 hold is 2 (the total of the hold is 4), and the icon display area 800 displays the change icon h0 at the right end thereof, and the change icon On the left of h0, hold icons h11 and h12 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 and hold icons h21 and h22 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 are alternately displayed.

  In the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display ("2 2" in this example) shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is performed.

  In the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 10G, the second decorative symbol in the same state as the first decorative symbol is (temporarily) stopped and displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the variable game of the special figure 1 is stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are out of combination (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). Are stopped and displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is a state in which one hold in FIG. 2 has been consumed and the variable game in FIG. 2 has started. In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) of the special figure 2 is started, and in the icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed at the left end. On the left, hold icons h11, h22, and h12 are displayed. In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display (in this example, “2 1”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is performed.

  Further, in the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of (i), the second decorative symbol of the symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”) is continuously stopped and displayed. However, since the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the mark M is given to the “decoration 3” of the left symbol and the “decoration 7” of the right symbol of the second decorative symbol. That is, the mark M is added to “decoration 3” of the left symbol of the second decorative symbol as compared with the state of FIG.

  When the floating game of the special figure 1 is changed to the floating game of the special figure 2, the mark M is also given to the “decoration 3” which is the 16R jackpot symbol and is notified to the player, but in the first symbol display area 208X, the high speed is displayed. It is very difficult to recognize the decorative design to which the mark M has been given since the fluctuation has started.

  Even in such a case, if the corresponding decorative design (in this example, “decoration 3”) is included in the second decorative design that is stopped and displayed, the mark M is added to the decorative design. Thus, it is possible to notify the player of the 16R jackpot symbol.

It should be noted that, in the first decorative design and the second decorative design, the manner in which the design is switched (the manner in which the mark M is applied and erased) and the timing in which the design is switched (the timing in which the mark M is applied and erased) are made different. It may be the same or the same.
(Example of production M-6)

  FIG. 5M is another example of the second decorative design, for example, a display during execution of the super reach effect.

  In general, for example, a player is often not interested in a combination of decorative symbols (which symbol is used as a template) during execution of a super reach effect. In such a case, since it is less necessary to report accurate information in the second decorative symbol, an effect using the second decorative symbol may be performed.

  In this example, for example, a special display EX (here) is used as a notice effect so that it overlaps with the second decorative symbol (the same state as the right diagram in FIG. 21 (g)) and the second decorative symbol is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Then, an effect of displaying “CHANCE” is displayed.

Further, in addition to the second decorative symbol, another decorative symbol (third decorative symbol whose display size is smaller than the first decorative symbol) may be displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize (notice effect is provided). Instead of the second decorative symbol (executed), the state of the decorative symbol may be displayed in the third decorative symbol. In this example, in the third symbol display area 208Z provided in the first image display device 2081, the third decorative symbol shown in the left diagram of FIG. Status) is displayed.
<Example N>

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, in the case where the ball removal display E2 and the second decorative design are displayed. It is a production example.

  In addition, in FIG. 28, the example of production | presentation in the case of performing the ball removal display E2 in the structure demonstrated so far is demonstrated, The description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure mentioned above.

Here, the ball removal display E2 is a display that is displayed on the image display device 208 ′ when the lower pan full error has occurred, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the error, and is one of the error displays. The lower plate full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 is full. When the lower plate full state is resolved by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the lower plate full tank error is cleared and the ball removal display E2 is displayed. Is also hidden.
(Example N-1)

  The timings shown in FIG. 14B and FIG. 14C correspond to the timings of FIG. 14I and FIG. 14J, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, at the timing when the width of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) gradually starts to be enlarged, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the left symbol The ball removal display E2 is displayed so as to overlap with (part).

  On the other hand, at this timing, the pseudo continuous symbol does not overlap with the ball removal display E2. Further, neither the icon display area 800 nor the explanation display area TT1 overlaps the ball removal display E2.

  Although the second symbol display area 208Y is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the display start timing (first timing) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, when the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols proceeds, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbols is overlapped by the ball removal display E2. At this timing, the second decorative design (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 15 (o) and the timing (second timing) at which a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 are as follows. The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example N-2)

  The timings shown in FIGS. 7E and 7F correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 17D and 17F, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 4E, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed (temporarily). A ball removal display E2 is displayed above the display area TT1. In this case, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

At the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (princess), which is a display related to the continuous performance, starts displaying and overlaps the ball removal display E2.
(Example N-3)

  The timings shown in (h) and (i) of FIG. 20 correspond to the timings of FIG. 20 (d) and FIG. 20 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 11H, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (or just before the operation) within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the ball removal display E2 is displayed below the special symbol. At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (here, the state shown in FIG. 15 (p)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the special symbol resumes the enlarged display by the operation of the chance button 136, and the ball removal display E2 overlaps the enlarged display. The second decorative symbol at this timing is the state shown in FIG. In this case, the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (FIG. 15 (o)) and the timing at which a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 (second timing) May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example N-4)

  The timings shown in FIGS. (K) to (m) correspond to the timings of FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (k), at the timing when the second decorative pattern (the state of FIG. 15 (o)) starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082. The ball removal display E2 is performed below the first decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol). At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6L, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 slide and move so that the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the ball removal display E2. In this case, at least a part of the ball removal display E2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6M is a state where the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) and stopped. Are overlapped, and at least a part of it is difficult for the player to see. Note that at least the different parts of the ball removal display E2 are overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 between the timing shown in FIG. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 11L, at least the left end of the ball removal display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the right end is not overlapped), and at the timing shown in FIG. At least the right end portion of the blank display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the left end portion is not overlapped). The second decorative design (FIG. 15 (o)) is exposed from the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is visible to the player.

Further, there may be a timing at which both ends of the ball removal display E2 are not overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and are visible to the player at the timing between FIG. .
(Example N-5)

  The timings shown in (o) and (p) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 25 (i) and 25 (j), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (o), the first image display device 2081 displays the first decorative design, and overlaps a part of the first design symbol at the timing when the notice effect is executed. The ball removal display E2 is performed below. At this timing, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) is also displayed below the second image display device 2082 (the ball-free display E2 is substantially symmetric with respect to the notice effect (display)). .

  Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6 (p) is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps with a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). It is. In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player. Further, the second image display device 2082 that has moved partially overlaps the ball removal display E2, but the overlapped portion is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the ball removal display E2 is It becomes visible to the player as a whole.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 15 (o)) displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part thereof is a player. Is invisible.

  As described above, in this production example (production example N), the display example of the ball removal display E2 has been described. However, the ball removal display E2 is hidden when the ball removal operation is performed and the lower dish full tank error is resolved. (Erased).

  In addition, when the ball removal display E2 is performed, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together.

  Further, instead of the ball removal display E2, another error display (for example, a door opening error) may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the production example N-1 to the production example N-5, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at a different position, but as an example of the ball removal display E2 being displayed, the production example N-1 to the production example N- The display positions of 5 are listed. Actually, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at one predetermined location. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the ball removal display E2 at the positions shown in FIGS. 5E and 5F, when the effects shown in FIGS. The ball removal display E2 is displayed above the explanation display area TT1 in FIGS.

  Thus, by displaying the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display about the continuous effect, a part of the continuous effect), etc. of the present embodiment, the player However, by focusing on the ball removal display E2, it may be possible to easily recognize the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect, and the like of the present embodiment.

  Alternatively, the player can display the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display related to the continuous effect, a partial display of the continuous effect), and the like. 2 In some cases, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the ball removal display E2 by paying attention to decorative symbols, special symbols, continuous effects, and the like.

  In addition, by displaying the ball removal display E2, the user is motivated to erase the ball removal display E2 at an early stage and enjoy the effect display performed on the image display device 208 ′, and eliminate the lower plate full tank error (ball removal) ) May be prompted.

In addition, by displaying the ball removal display E2, it is possible to focus attention on an effect display that is important when attention is paid to the ball removal display E2, and it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball after the effect display ends. is there.
<Example of image control>

  FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of image control related to the display of the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM 436, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the image display device 208 ′ (left sub liquid crystal 2082, main liquid crystal 2081, and right sub liquid crystal 2083). .

  FIGS. 7C and 7D are schematic diagrams for explaining general image control, and FIGS. 9E to 11H are adopted for partial display of the present embodiment. It is the schematic explaining the image control performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the VRAM 436 includes frame buffers A, B, and R corresponding to the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (B), the main liquid crystal 2081 (A), and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (C), respectively. C and a work area W (for example, an area in which image data compressed in the ROM 408 is expanded and stored). Actually, two sets of frame buffers A, B, and C are provided in order to switch the display alternately (for swapping).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (g) and 28 (h), when a second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, for example, The image control as shown in FIGS. 29C and 29D is performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), the VDP 434 reads out the image data of the decorative design (for example, the decorative design variation display shown in FIG. 28 (g)) stored in the ROM 406, and uses the work area W of the VRAM 436. Then, the image data is temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image. Then, the display image is developed in the first set of frame buffers A1 and B1 designated in the drawing area. At this time, for example, the frame buffer A1 is expanded at the same magnification, and the frame buffer B1 is expanded and contracted in accordance with the size of the second decorative symbol.

  By swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the images stored in the frame buffers A1 and B1 that are not designated as the drawing areas become the main liquid crystal 2081 and It is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

  On the other hand, for example, in the productions such as FIGS. 14H to 14J, the first decorative symbol (the decorative symbol including the middle symbol animation display (first animation display)) and the second decorative symbol (middle symbol). The display is different from the decorative design including the temporary stop display of the symbol.

  In this case, the VDP 434 reads the image data of the decorative design (for example, the first decorative design shown in FIG. 14H) stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The image data is used and temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image.

  Then, as shown in (f) of the figure, the generated display image is reduced (or kept as it is) to generate another set.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5G, a part of one display image (which becomes the first decorative design) is processed (in this case, the image of the middle design is enlarged), and the other ( The display image that becomes the second decorative design is processed as necessary (for example, reduction of the image).

  The first set of frame buffers A1 in which the display image of the first decorative design after processing and the display image of the second decorative design (after processing) are designated as the drawing area as shown in FIG. , B1 respectively (with the same size), and swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1, B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2, B2, so that the frame buffer A1, which is not designated as a drawing area, The image stored in B1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Thereafter, the same processing is continuously performed in accordance with the progress of the production (animation).

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 ′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, A gaming machine equipped with a third image display device 2083), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first decoration. This is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) of a symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display region 208X (the symbol display regions 208a to 208c)), One of the displays is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) of a second decoration symbol (for example, a decoration symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (the symbol display areas 208k to 208g)). .)so The second decorative symbol (for example, the second decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, at least one second decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, the middle symbol shown in FIG. 14 (m), FIG. 15 (o), etc.) The first decorative symbol (for example, the first decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, at least one first decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, FIG. 14 (m), etc., than the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 208k) The display size of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b shown in FIG. 5 is larger, and in the first variable display, the first animation display (for example, special symbols in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). There may be an animation that tells whether the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) (for example, special symbol stop animation, middle symbol animation) The gaming machine is characterized in that the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the state in which the first animation display is displayed.

  Note that “the first animation display may be displayed in the first variation display” means that “the first animation display is started in the first variation display. Yes. In addition, the first variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the state where the first animation display is displayed” means “the first animation display is displayed. In at least some of the states, a display in which the second variable display is started may be made. " Further, the second variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the contents of the first variation display (the type of decorative symbol) and the state (the presence or absence of the fixed display) are unconfirmed. Even if the content or state of the first variation display may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first variation display causes the first variation display to The player may be able to recognize (guess) the content and state of the display, or the subsequent effects (for example, effects related to the jackpot expectation level) May be). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, there are cases where the state of symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol.

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first animation display is one of the animation displays indicating whether or not the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the first animation display ends, the first symbol is displayed. The first design may be displayed in a stopped manner, and the first design is a first effect (for example, a continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a continuous notice effect, an effect shown in FIGS. 14 (p) to 14 (r)), FIG. (F) to a symbol related to the start of execution of the effects shown in FIG. 17 (h) (hereinafter referred to as “first effect symbol (for example, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol in FIG. 14 (h), FIG. d) a middle symbol, FIG. 18 (p) middle symbol, etc.) ”)).

  The first symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the first variable display.

  In addition, “the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display is finished” means that “the first symbol is stopped after the first animation display is finished”. Display may be made ".

  In addition, the first animation display and the first symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the first effect symbol related to the start of the execution of the first effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. Even if it is undecided or it may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first effect design is displayed by the second variation display. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize (guess) the first performance (for example, performance related to the big hit expectation) whether or not the display is stopped (the second variation display may cause the first May be possible). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first symbol may not be stopped after the first animation display, and the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display. Before the end of the animation display, the second symbol (eg, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 14 (j), ), The second symbol display area 208Y in FIG. 18D, etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is the first symbol of the first effect symbol. It may be a separate design.

  The second symbol may be one symbol among symbols displayed in the second variable display.

  In addition, “After the first animation display ends, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed” means that “the first symbol does not stop and display after the first animation display ends. , May be made. "

  Further, “before the end of the first animation display, the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the second variation display before the end of the first animation display”. The display in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed may be made. Further, the first animation display and the second symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished, the first animation display is started, whereby the first animation display is started. After the end, even if it is uncertain whether or not the first effect symbol is displayed in a stopped state, or it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the first animation or the second variation display, Whether or not the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second variation display, the player recognizes the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation). In some cases, it may be possible to make a (guess) (the second symbol of the second variation display may enable a first ballet). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  Further, in the first variation display, a display in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, a display as shown in FIG. 14 (i) to FIG. 14 (l)) may be displayed. In the variable display, the display in which the second symbol is enlarged may not be displayed, and the first animation display may be a display including a display in which the first symbol is enlarged.

  In addition, after the first animation display is finished, a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, as shown in FIG. 15 (l)). In the second variation display, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed after completion of the first animation display, the middle symbol “decoration 8” or the like of the middle symbol shown in FIG. A fourth symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208k of the second symbol display region 208Y, a symbol such as “decoration 8” of the middle symbol shown in FIG. 15 (q)) Is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol, and the fourth symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol. A separate body from the third design It may be a pattern.

  Note that “the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display” means that “the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display”. , May be made ". In addition, the first animation display and the third symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the fourth symbol may be stopped and displayed in the second variation display”. It is.

  In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a display prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display (for example, error display E1 shown in FIG. 26D)”). Yes, at least a part of the first animation display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed may be overlapped with the ball discharge display.

  In addition, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the second variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display may be overlapped by the second variation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  In addition, in the first variation display, a second animation display (for example, an animation display before the start of continuous production, an animation display shown in FIGS. 14 (n) and (o), an animation display shown in FIG. 17 (e), etc.) ) May be displayed.

In addition, a first display unit (for example, the first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, the second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. Yes, the first variation display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine.
[Second Embodiment]

Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2nd Embodiment is an example of the production | presentation performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and the whole structure of the pachinko machine 100 is the structure of 1st Embodiment demonstrated using FIGS. Since it is the same as that, its description is omitted. Regarding the other configurations, the same configurations as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 29 will be described with the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions will be omitted.
<Expectation reporting effect>

  With reference to FIGS. 30 to 45, an example of the effect of expectation notification effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described as one embodiment of the present invention. 30 to 45 will be described with reference to enlarged views in which a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted.

Here, the expectation notification effect is an effect that informs the player of the effect that has occurred, or the jackpot expectation level of the effect that is scheduled to occur, or the effect that notifies the player that the player should wait (the expectation level of the jackpot is high). In the following, an example of the expectation rank notification effect and the prior expectation rank notification effect among the expectation notification effect will be described. The expected rank notification effect is an effect in which the generated effect is classified according to the jackpot expectation level, and the classification (rank of expectation level) is notified (therefore, the effect that the player should wait for is notified). The prior expectation rank notification effect refers to an effect in which the rank of expectation is notified in advance (therefore, the effect that the player should wait for is notified in advance).
<Example of production a>

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of an expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example of production a-1)

  An example of effects will be described with reference to FIGS. The same figure (a)-the figure (l) are figures which show an example of an effect in steps.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 30 (a) indicates a state in which the fluctuation of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is stopped. In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081, the first symbol display is performed. In the region 208X (symbol display regions 208a to 208c), the symbol combination of the decoration symbol (first decoration symbol) of “decoration 3—decoration 1—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a white (default) variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) are displayed on the left side. (Default) hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed to notify that the hold in FIG. In addition, a mini character (donor) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display “Panda is a master of the lord” is executed.

  In the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, the second decorative symbol is always in the same state as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 (same symbol combination, variable display or stop display is the same). In this example, the number “3-1-4” (a combination of numbers indicating out-of-order symbol combinations) is stopped and displayed. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, an example in which such a simple (non-decorated) combination of numbers is displayed as the second decorative pattern will be described. In the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, the first decoration is displayed. The display for notifying the same content as the decorative pattern state of the symbol is referred to as “second decorative symbol”, and the area where the second decorative symbol is displayed is described as “second symbol display region 208Y”.

  Further, a meter (button image) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white to notify that the meter is zero. In the stage name display area, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  Third image display device (right sub-liquid crystal 2083 shows a state in which the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the hold in FIG. , And the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 indicating that the hold in FIG. 2 is “0”.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (rectangle) and the special figure 2 (round shape) in gray, indicating that the off state is stopped. In addition, the chance buttons 136 and 137 have the built-in LEDs lit white. The family crest character 224 has a built-in LED that emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at an initial position (below the first image display device 2081 in this example). In the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C, the built-in LED emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  In the following description, the description will mainly focus on effects that have changed from previous effects with the passage of time.

  The timing shown in FIG. 30 (b) is a state in which one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 30 (a)) has been consumed and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is performed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (first variation display and second variation display) is represented by a downward white arrow (hereinafter, the same applies to other examples).

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by moving animations, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. And displayed as a white variation icon h0. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, and the left of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively displayed on the two pedestals to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "2" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed. Further, for example, level display is performed in the lower part of the display area.

  At this timing, the character effect display by the mini character (navigator character) MC is started. The mini character MC in this example is a mini character (dono). In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, the mini character (donor), as a general rule, executes a specific effect display (such as using a full screen) such as a jackpot effect or a super reach effect, for example. It is displayed almost always at a timing other than the timing (for example, at least when the first decorative symbol is being displayed), and has various roles. In the following description, the mini character (donor) displayed in FIG. 30A is referred to as a “normal display (default display) mini character (donor)”. In this example, the normally displayed mini-character (dono) is a mini-character (dono) in a standing state with its back turned, as shown in enlarged view in FIG.

  If the mini character (dono) is not configured to be displayed almost constantly, or if character effect display is performed by a mini character MC (navigator character) other than the normal display mini character (dono), the character effect display is performed. Mini character MC appears at the timing of execution.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 30 to FIG. 45, as the character effect display by the mini character (dono), an animation display in which the mini character (dono) plays the sub game (mini game) is executed.

  The character effect display at the timing shown in FIG. 5B is an animation display in which the mini character (donor) shoots an arrow toward the target and performs a “target” subgame. As shown in an enlarged view in the upper part of FIG. 45B, a mini character (donor) with an arrow is displayed on the left side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (above the icon display area 800), and on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (description). The target is displayed above the display unit TT1. In this example, the target is divided into four, one of which is displayed in red, for example.

  Further, the explanation display unit TT1 displays “If it hits red ...”, and notifies that an effect is to be started according to the result of the sub game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is an effect of continuing the target subgame (hereinafter referred to as “subgame effect”). Is displayed, and the state where the arrow released by the mini character (donor) flies toward the target is displayed as shown in the enlarged middle part of FIG. 45 (b). The arrow (partial display of the sub game effect) emitted by the mini character (dono) overlaps, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol during the flight. Note that the arrow (partial display of the sub game effect) emitted by the mini character (dono) may be overlapped with, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol during the flight.

  When the arrow reaches the target as shown in the lower part of FIG. 45 (d) and FIG. 45 (b), the result of the sub game effect expands like a wipe (or a balloon) as shown in FIG. Display (execution result display is executed). In this example, as the effect result display SR, a state in which an arrow hits the target red display portion is displayed in an enlarged manner. The effect result display SR (partial display of the sub game effect) is displayed (in front of the decorative symbol) in preference to the changing decorative symbol (first decorative symbol), and the changing decorative symbol (in this example) (The right design) overlaps a part of (the display of a part of the sub-game effect is not overlapped by the fluctuating decorative design (first decorative design)).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (donor) has returned to the normal display (default display) shown in FIG. 5A, and the sub-game effect has been completed. The state where the expectation rank notification effect is executed is shown.

  In the prior expectation rank notification effect, as shown in FIG. 5F, for example, the prior expectation rank display RP is performed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083. The prior expectation rank display RP is a rank of the jackpot expectation degree when the effect is executed (after the effect) with respect to an effect that may be performed after the timing when this is displayed (for example, during the next variable game). Is a display for informing in advance. That is, the prior expectation rank notification effect is an effect of performing the prior expectation rank display RP as the notice effect.

  In this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 45 (c), the letters “A?” And a red rectangle are displayed as the prior expectation rank display RP, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “A”. It is informing that there is a possibility that the production will be executed. As an example, in a part of the sub game effect, a display related to the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “red” is displayed for the purpose) may be performed, or may not be related at all. Good.

  Here, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree will be described. At least a part of the effects related to the jackpot (decision of success / failure) has a plurality of effects according to the probability of winning the jackpot after executing the effect (the expectation degree of jackpot). It is classified into rank (attribute). In this embodiment, the rank of the jackpot expectation is classified into, for example, “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”,. In addition, a plurality of effects may be classified into the same rank. The relationship between the rank of the jackpot expectation degree and the production will be described in detail later. For convenience of the following description, an example will be described. The hold icon changes to the hold icon of the character (dono) ("dono icon ”Is displayed), the effect of performing the pre-reading notice (“ H ”change change effect) is“ S ”, the swordsman reach effect is“ S ”, and the hold icon is changed to a red hold icon (“ red icon ”is displayed). ) The effect of performing the prefetching notice (red hold change effect) is “A”, the hold icon is changed to a blue hold icon (“blue icon” is displayed), and the effect of performing the prefetching notice (blue hold change effect) is “B”...

  Further, in the following description, “preliminary expectation rank display RP notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation rank of“ O ”may be performed” is referred to as “preliminary expectation o display”. is there. For example, “preliminary expectation rank display RP informing that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation rank of“ S ”may be executed” is referred to as “preliminary expectation degree S display”. The “preliminary expectation rank display RP” informing that there is a possibility that an effect with the rank “A” is executed is referred to as “preliminary expectation degree A display”.

  That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the “prior expectation level A display” for notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation rank of “A” may be executed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083b. (FIG. 45 (c)).

  In this example, one preliminary expectation rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is performed as a result of the target subgame effect, but the subgame effect is the same or different. A plurality of sub games may be executed, and in that case, a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP may be performed according to the result of the sub game effect.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the decorative symbols of the out of symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8”) are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 continues to display “preliminary expectation A display (preliminary expectation rank display RP)”.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, one hold is consumed, and the 4th symbol display device 284 displays the special figure 1 (square) in white and the special figure 2 (round) in gray. FIG. 1 shows a state in which the variable game in FIG. 1 is being executed.

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a fluctuation icon h0 and changes to blue to give a pre-reading notice. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left of the change icon h0, which notifies that the hold in FIG.

  In the movable body (for example, the family crest member 224A), the built-in LED is changed to emit blue light in conjunction with the blue fluctuation icon h0.

  In the upper part of the display area of the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating that the special figure 1 hold is "1" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Has been done. In addition, the display of “preliminary expectation A display” is continued.

  As described above, the “preliminary expectation level A display” is a display for notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a jackpot expectation level of “A” rank is executed. For example, there is an effect in which the hold icon changes to red ("red icon" is displayed) and a pre-reading notice is given.

  However, at this timing, the hold icon (fluctuation icon h0) corresponding to the digested hold changes to blue and performs a prefetch notice (blue hold change effect). Then, the effect that the hold icon changes to blue ("blue icon" is displayed) and the pre-reading notice (blue hold change effect) is, for example, an effect with a big hit expectation of "B" rank.

  In other words, in this example, in spite of the “preliminary expectation A display” being performed, the actual jackpot expectation is other than “A” rank (for example, the big hit expectation is “B” rank). Is running.

  Thus, even when the prior expectation rank display RP is performed, the effect corresponding to the rank is not always executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11H, when an effect of a big hit expectation that is different from the prior expectation rank display RP is being executed (here, “blue icon” is displayed), the prior expectation rank display The display of RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is continued.

  As described above, the prior expectation rank display RP of the present embodiment is displayed across a plurality of change displays (in this respect, it can also be referred to as a prefetch display), but the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed only by the change. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays (pre-read display).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which another character effect display by the mini character MC is being performed. This character effect display is an animation that performs the effect of acquiring the mini item MI. For example, as shown in FIG. 45E, the mini character (donor) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as “S”. It is an effect display. Advance expectation rank is promoted to “S” rank by acquisition of mini item “S”, and the performance that is scheduled to be performed (the effect of rank corresponding to prior expectation rank display RP) There is a possibility of being promoted to the production of “S”. That is, the acquisition effect of the mini item MI is one of the sub game effects.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the right sub-liquid crystal 2083b does not display the “preliminary expectation A display” that has been displayed so far, and instead produces an effect in which the rank of the big hit expectation is “S”. The “preliminary expectation S display” is notified to notify that there is a possibility of the occurrence. “Preliminary expectation S display” in this example is a character display “S?” And a gold rectangle display as shown in FIG.

  That is, in FIG. 5 (f) to (i), the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed, and there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation “A” may be executed (that is, the prior expectation rank is “ However, when the mini character (dono) acquires the mini item “S” at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), the effect of the big hit expectation is “S” is executed. (Ie, the advance expectation rank is promoted to “S”), the advance expectation rank display RP is changed from “previous expectation A display” to “advanced advance” at the timing of FIG. It is reported that there is a possibility that an effect of “S” in the jackpot expectation level is executed (promotion) changed to “expected degree S display”.

  In the present embodiment, the advance expectation rank is promoted by the mini item acquired by the mini character (donor), but a special zone (high accuracy zone) in which the advance expectation rank is easily promoted may be provided. Thereby, compared with the case where the special zone where a change on hold is easy to occur is provided, it is possible to indirectly perform the effect related to the promotion of the big hit expectation.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) is a state in which the effect of the big hit expectation degree “S” rank is being executed as informed of the “preliminary expectation degree S display”. That is, the icon hold area 800 change icon h0 is changed from a blue (round) icon to a character (dono) icon shown in FIG. A prefetching notice effect with a high (S rank) is executed.

  In conjunction with the change of the variation icon h0, the light emission color of the built-in LED of the movable body (here, the family crest member 224) also changes from blue to gold.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 6 is based on the fact that the effect of ranking “S” rank in the jackpot expectation is executed as informed of “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In the expected rank notification effect, for example, the expected rank display RN is performed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 as in FIG. The expectation rank display RN is a display for informing the rank of the jackpot expectation degree after the end of the effect for the effect being executed. That is, the expectation rank notification effect is an effect of performing the expectation rank display RN as a notice effect.

  Further, in the following description, the “expected degree rank display RN notifying that an effect having a big hit expectation rank of“ ◯ ”has been executed (running)” is sometimes referred to as “expected degree ○ display”. is there. For example, “expected degree rank display RN notifying that an effect having a big hit expectation rank of“ S ”has been executed (running)” is referred to as “expected degree S display”.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the expectation rank display RN displays the letters “S”, the golden rectangle, and the letters “Honto Suspension”. ”Is being executed (“ expected degree S display ”is performed).

  Note that the expected rank display RN (“expected degree S display”) is displayed in the same area as the prior expected rank display RP (“preliminary expected degree S display” such as (k) in the figure). That is, instead of “preliminary expectation S display” (overwritten), “expected expectation S display” is displayed.

  In addition, FIG. 1 (l) shows a state in which the level has been raised based on the player's function related to membership system service (here, the level has been raised from 1.2 to 1.3) and the privilege has been granted. Yes. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song.

  The level increases by adding points associated with the game (for example, adding 1 point for each symbol variation, adding 2 points by executing certain effects, etc.). The effect subject to point addition may or may not include the expectation notification effect of the present embodiment.

  Further, “opening a song” means, for example, that the number of songs that can be viewed during a big hit has increased. At this timing, a song release notification MM (enlarged in FIG. 45 (h)) for notifying that the song C has been released is displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, for example, above the “expected degree S display”. ing.

  Note that this membership service may be able to be temporarily started even if the player is not logged in with his / her unique authentication information. Good.

  Thus, in this production example, a sub-game (for example, a target sub-game production) by a mini character (dono) is performed, and a prior expectation rank notification production is executed according to the result (for example, “pre-expectation” Degree A display "), and the advance expectation rank is promoted by a sub-game (for example, mini item acquisition effect) by the mini character (donor) (" preliminary expectation degree S display "), and a higher expectation effect (for example, , A pre-reading notice effect by “Tono Icon”, level-up by increasing points, song release).

  In addition, in the same figure (k)-the same figure (l), prior expectation rank display RP ("preliminary expectation degree S display") instantaneously changes to expectation degree rank display RN ("expected degree S display"). However, the switching display from the prior expectation rank display RP to the expectation rank display RN is based on an animation display (for example, an animation in which the front and back of a plate-like body are switched and displayed). May be. In addition, there may be a period in which both the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN are displayed when switching from the prior expectation rank display RP to the expectation rank display RN.

In FIG. 11L, the display start timing (first timing) of the “expected degree S display” and the display start timing (second timing) of the music release notification MM are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing (the same applies to the following embodiments).
(Example of production a-2)
FIG. 30 (m) to FIG. 30 (o) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  Since the timing shown in FIG. 5M is the same as that shown in FIG. In the timing shown in FIG. 9 (n), one hold is consumed, and the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 displays a variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). In the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800 and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. The pre-reading notice is changed to red. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left of the change icon h0, which notifies that the hold in FIG.

  Other configurations (for example, the state of the 4th symbol display device 284, the display of the second holding number in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, etc.) accompanying the digestion of the holding are shown in FIG. ), Or only the number changes depending on the number of reservations), and the description is omitted (the same applies to the following description).

  Further, in the movable body (for example, the family crest member 224A), the built-in LED changes to red light emission in conjunction with the red fluctuation icon h0.

  In addition, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (for example, the character display “A?” Shown in FIG. 45C and the display of a red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

  In other words, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 5 (m), and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank is expected as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a letter “A”, a red rectangle and a letter “red hold” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is “A ”Is being executed (“ expected degree A display ”is performed).

  In this example, the case where the red-holding change effect is executed as an effect having an “A” rank corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” has been described as an example. Other productions may correspond as the “ranking production”.

For example, when “Princess Rescue Reach Production” is classified as a performance with a jackpot expectation “A” rank, “Principal Expectation A Display” was performed and “Princess Rescue Reach Production” was executed. ” The state is that “the effect of rank“ A ”rank has been executed according to the notification of“ preliminary expectation A display ””, and in that case also, the expectation rank notification effect (“expectation A display”) Is done.
(Example of production a-3)
FIG. 30 (p) to FIG. 30 (r) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in (p) in the figure is the same as that in (j) in the figure, and the description is omitted. The timing shown in FIG. 6 (q) is a state in which the “preliminary expectation S display” is being performed, and the main liquid crystal 2081 performs a super reach production (swordsman reach production) with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank, for example. Is in a state where has been started.

  The timing shown in (r) of FIG. 6 is based on the fact that the effect of “S” rank of the jackpot expectation is executed as shown in the notification of “preliminary expectation S display” in (q) of FIG. It is in a running state.

  That is, in this example, as the expectation rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45 (k), the letters “S”, the golden rectangle and the letters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is It is informing that the effect of “S” is being executed (“expected degree S display” is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C).

  In this example, the case where the swordsman reach production is executed as the production of the “S” rank corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” has been described as an example, but the big hit expectation is “S”. Other effects may correspond to the effect of the rank.

  For example, in the case where the “actual effect effect” is classified as an effect having a jackpot expectation “S” rank, the “actual effect effect has been executed after the“ preliminary expectation S display ”is performed” “As shown in the notification of“ preliminary expectation S display ”, the effect of“ S ”rank has been executed for the jackpot expectation is performed.” In this case, the expectation rank notification effect (“expectation S display”) is performed. .

Conventionally, the notice effect that occurs is reported in a direct expression (for example, expression such as “Yoshimune hold is likely to appear”), but according to this embodiment, the notice effect is classified and its rank is reported. By doing so, the player may be able to guess the notice effect that occurs, and the interest of the game may be enhanced.
<Common items in each embodiment>
Hereinafter, items common to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 30 to 45 will be described.

  The prior expectation rank and the expectation rank (produce jackpot expectation degree) described in each example and the production corresponding to these (production that does not correspond) are combinations for convenience of explanation, and are limited to the descriptions in this specification. Is not to be done.

  For example, a certain effect (effect A) corresponds to only the expectation rank notification effect, but another effect (effect B) may correspond to the prior expectation rank notification effect and the expectation rank notification effect. . In addition, the advance expectation rank notification effect may be performed every time, or the advance expectation rank notification effect may be performed as a specific effect. In addition, the expectation rank notification effect may be performed every time, or the expectation rank notification effect may be performed as a specific effect.

In addition, the time from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (first time) and the time from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (second time) are the same. The first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time may be longer than the first time.
<Example of production b>

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example b-1)
FIG. 31 (b) to FIG. 31 (f) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 6C, and the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect of the big hit expectation degree “A”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, a character display “A?” And a red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 6B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 8E is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank is expected as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a letter “A”, a red rectangle and a letter “red hold” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is “A ”Is being executed (“ expected degree A display ”is performed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which “expected degree A display” is not displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of displaying “expected degree A display”.

  In the production example shown in FIGS. 30 (i) to (j), the prior expectation rank display RP is promoted by the production effect of the mini item MI by the mini character (donor). The rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the effect to be executed is promoted by the effect of acquiring the mini item MI by the mini character (dono).

  In FIG. 8F, the expectation rank display RN (“expectation A display”) is not displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of display, but (a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are overlapped). If displayed, the latest expected rank display RN may continue to be displayed.

Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the time when it is not displayed (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN), and until the end of execution of the expectation rank notification effect. The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.
(Example b-2)
FIG. 31 (h) to FIG. 31 (l) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and “preliminary expectation S display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the mini-character (donor) turns around and acquires the mini-item MI displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 6 (i), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 45 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest character 224A is changed to gold light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display (for example, “S?” Character display and gold rectangle display) is continued from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation S display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, an on-hold change effect with an expected degree of jackpot of “S” rank) is being executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is based on the fact that the effect of the big hit expectation degree “S” rank is executed as shown in the notice “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

  In this example, the expectation rank display RN displays the letter “S”, the golden rectangle, and the letter “Honto” (FIG. 45 (j)), and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of “expected degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the “expected degree S display” (FIG. 45 (j)) is not hidden and the display is continued.

  The “expected degree A display” shown in FIG. 5F is not displayed after a lapse of a certain time (t1) from the start of display, but the “expected degree S display” is at least a display period (t1) of “expected degree A display”. ) The display continues for a longer period t2 (t2> t1).

  The “expectation S display” is, for example, when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts, or when an effect different from the effect corresponding to the “expectation S display” is executed, When the effect corresponding to “degree S display” is finished, the display is not displayed.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the time when it is not displayed (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN), and until the end of execution of the expectation rank notification effect. The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Also, the time (first display) from the display start to the display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation A display”) having a low jackpot expectation rank Time) and the time (first display) from the display start to display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) having a high jackpot expectation rank 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time may be longer than the first time. .
(Example b-3)
FIG. 31 (n) to FIG. 31 (r) are diagrams showing other examples of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in (n) in the figure is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed as in the timing shown in FIG. 30 (j), but the prior expectation rank notification effect is not executed. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (o) shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” (FIG. 45F). By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14 (p) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 10 (o), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big change expectation change effect of “S”. It is in a state of being promoted to. In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 45 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest character 224A is changed to gold light emission.

  The timing shown in FIG. 14 (q) is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the effect with the big hit expectation level “S” rank is executed in FIG.

  In this example, the expectation rank display RN is a display diagram (45 (j)) of a letter “S”, a gold rectangle, and a letter “Honto Suspension”, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (r) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 5 (l), and shows a state after a certain time has elapsed since the start of the “expected degree S display” display. At this timing, the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the “expected degree S display” is not hidden and the display is continued.

  The “expected degree A display” shown in FIG. 5E is not displayed after a lapse of a certain time (t1) from the start of display, but the “expected degree S display” in FIG. The display continues for at least a period t2 (t2> t1) longer than the display period (t1) of “expected degree A display”.

  The “expectation S display” is, for example, when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts, or when an effect different from the effect corresponding to the “expectation S display” is executed, When the effect corresponding to “degree S display” is finished, the display is not displayed.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the advance expectation rank notification effect to the time when it is not displayed (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN), and until the end of execution of the expectation rank notification effect. The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

  Also, the time (first display) from the display start to the display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation A display”) having a low jackpot expectation rank Time) and the time (first display) from the display start to display end (display switching by the expectation rank display RN) of the prior expectation rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) having a high jackpot expectation rank 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time may be longer than the first time. .

  In this example, the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed, but in that case also, the expectation rank notification effect ((q) and (r) in the figure) is the expectation when the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed. This is the same as the degree rank notification effect (((k) in the figure, (l) in the figure)) (when the expectation rank is the same).

  It should be noted that, in the case where the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed and the case where the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed, the subsequent expectation rank notification effect (for example, (k) to (l) in FIG. (R)) may be in different states (when the expectation rank is the same). As an example, the time (first time) from the start of display of “expectation S display” when the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed and the “expectation” when the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed. The time (second time) from the start of display of S display to the end of display (second time) is long for the first time and short for the second time (or short for the first time and long for the second time). It is.

  When the prior expectation rank notification effect is performed (for example, (b) to (d) in the figure, (h) to (j) in the same figure), the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed (for example, , (N) to (p)), the player may be able to guess the notice effect to be generated earlier, and the interest of the game may be enhanced. For example, when the prior expectation rank notification effect is not performed, the displayed effect is not changed and it is difficult to predict the jackpot expectation level ((n) in the figure). This may end the game.

However, if the jackpot expectation can be predicted at an early stage by the prior expectation rank notification effect (if the possibility of a performance with a high expectation of big hit can be predicted), the willingness to continue the game will not be lost, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. May be possible.
<Example of production c>

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example c-1)
FIG. 32B to FIG. 32F are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” (FIG. 45F). By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 2C, and the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big change expectation change effect of “S”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 45 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest character 224A is changed to gold light emission.

  At this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (for example, “A?” And red rectangle display) shown in FIG. 45C is continued from the timing of FIG. ing.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 6B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. As the effects, effects of different jackpot expectations (ranks) (for example, an on-hold change effect with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank) are executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E is based on the expectation rank notification based on the fact that the performance with the jackpot expectation “S” rank is executed as the effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. This is a state in which the production is being executed.

  In this example, the expectation rank display RN displays the letter “S”, the golden rectangle, and the letter “Honto” (FIG. 45 (j)), and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  Further, as in this example, when the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation A display”) and the corresponding jackpot expectation rank (for example, the big hit expectation is “S” rank) do not match. Can be said to be an effect (contradiction effect) in which the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the notification content and the rank of the corresponding jackpot expectation degree contradict each other. Moreover, such contradiction effect is one of the premium effects (rare effects), and the premium effect is, for example, an effect whose rank of the big hit expectation degree is “SSS” (superlative).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Here, as shown in FIG. 45 (l), the special expectation rank display RNS is a character display of “SSS”, a rainbow-colored rectangle display, and a character display of “contradiction effect”, and is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The

  The special expectation rank display RNS (sometimes referred to as “expectation SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with “expectation S display”.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed. In this case, the song release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap at least one of “expected degree SSS display” and “expected degree S display” (in this example, the song release notification MM is “expected release notification MM”. May be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying “expected degree S display” and “expected degree SSS display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while “expectation S display (FIG. 45 (j))” and “expectation SSS display (FIG. 45 (l))” are displayed. None of them are hidden, and the display continues.

  The “expected degree S display” and the “expected degree SSS display” are, for example, “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts. When an effect different from the effect corresponding to is performed, when the effect corresponding to “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) is finished, the effect is hidden.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start to the end of display of the expectation rank display RN The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the start of display of the special expectation rank display RNS are ended. Until the special expectation rank display RNS is not displayed (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, The time 2 may be longer than the first time.

  In FIG. 9E, the display start timing (first timing) of “expected degree SSS display” and the display start timing (second timing) of “expected degree S display” are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Also, the display end timing (first timing) of the “expected degree SSS display” and the display end timing (second timing) of the “expected degree S display” may be the same, or the first The timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example c-2)

  With reference to FIG. 32 (h) to FIG. 32 (i), another example of the effect will be described. FIGS. 11H to 11I are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 30 (h) is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed, and “preliminary expectation S display” is displayed as shown in FIG. 45 (d). Since the timing is the same as that shown in j), the description is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I shows a state in which a character effect display (animation that performs a mini item acquisition effect) by a mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” (FIG. 45F). By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in (j) of FIG. 6 indicates that the blue hold change effect by the fluctuation icon h0 is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display (for example, “S?” Character display and gold rectangle display) is continued from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” shown in FIG. 45 (d) is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 45 (i). In fact, at the timing shown in FIG. As an effect corresponding to “degree S display”, an effect of a different jackpot expectation level (rank) (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation level of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is based on the expectation rank notification based on the fact that the performance with the jackpot expectation “A” rank is executed as the effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. This is a state in which the production is being executed.

  In this example, as expected rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a letter “A”, a red rectangle and a letter “red hold” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation is “A ”Is being executed (“ expected degree A display ”is performed).

  In other words, this example also shows a contradictory effect in which the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation S display”) and the corresponding jackpot expectation rank (for example, the big hit expectation is “A” rank) are inconsistent. Running.

  Therefore, a special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Here, the special expectation rank display RNS is a character display of “SSS”, a rainbow-colored rectangle display, and a character display of “contradiction effect”, and is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (FIG. 45 (l)).

  The special expectation rank display RNS (“expectation SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with the “expectation A display”.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed. In this case, the song release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap at least one of “expected degree SSS display” and “expected degree A display” (in this example, the song release notification MM is “expected May be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying “expected degree A display” and “expected degree SSS display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the song release notification MM and the “expected degree A display” are not displayed, while the “expected degree SSS display (FIG. 45 (l))” is not hidden. The display continues.

  Note that the “expected degree SSS display” is, for example, when the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) is started, or when an effect different from the effect corresponding to the “expected degree SSS display” is executed. When the effect corresponding to “degree SSS display” is finished, the display is not displayed.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start to the end of display of the expectation rank display RN The time (second time) until the expectation rank display RN is not displayed may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

  Also, the time (first time) from the start of display of the prior expectation rank display RP to non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the start of display of the special expectation rank display RNS are ended. Until the special expectation rank display RNS is not displayed (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, The time 2 may be longer than the first time.

  In FIG. 11L, the display start timing (first timing) of “expected degree SSS display” is the same as the display start timing (second timing) of “expected degree A display”. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In FIG. 10L, the display end timing (first timing) of the song release notification MM and the display end timing (second timing) of “expected degree A display” may be the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 32, for example, a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this way, when a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed and the contents are the same, one expectation rank display RN and the number thereof (for example, “× 2”, “× 3”). ”Or the like, or may be displayed so as to overlap part or all of the expected rank display RN (the same applies to the music release notification MM).

  Further, in the case where a plurality of expected rank displays RN are displayed in an overlapping manner, the expectation is not displayed (or difficult to view) (overlapping) due to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The degree rank display RN may be displayed (redisplayed) on the forefront. Alternatively, a plurality of expectation rank display RNs are displayed, but in a configuration in which only one latest expectation rank display RN can be displayed, the previous expectation rank display RN is displayed again by a button operation. Also good.

  Moreover, it cannot be redisplayed by button operation, and only the latest expectation rank display RN may be visible to the player.

  The configuration in which the plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed (the display example and the redisplay example) is the same in the other embodiments.

  In the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 45, the respective examples can be applied in combination with each other, and the present production example C shown in FIG. 32 is also the same. However, in this embodiment, only the configuration of the present production example C is used. It is good also as a structure which does not contain.

Moreover, in this embodiment shown in FIGS. 30-45, it is good also as a structure which does not include the structure only of another one production example.
<Example of production d>

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of an expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example d-1)

  Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 5B to 5F are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” shown in FIG. 45C is displayed, and FIG. Since the timing is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the mini-character (dono) turns around and acquires a mini-item displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 2C, and the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big change expectation change effect of “S”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 45 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest character 224A is changed to gold light emission.

  At this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (for example, “A?” And red rectangle display) shown in FIG. 45C is continued from the timing of FIG. ing.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 6B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation degree (rank) effect different from the effect (for example, a big change expectation effect with a jackpot expectation degree of “S” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is being executed based on the fact that the expectation degree of jackpot is “S” rank.

  In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), a letter “S”, a golden rectangle, and a letter “Tono Suspension” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “S”. Is being executed ("expected degree S display" is performed).

  In addition, at this timing, since the effect of rank “A” rank corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation A display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (FIG. 45 (c)) continues.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a music release notification MM (FIG. 45 (h)) is displayed.

  That is, on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, “preliminary expectation A display”, “expectation S display”, and song release notification MM are displayed. The song release notification MM includes “preliminary expectation A display” and “expectation S display”. ”Is displayed so as to overlap with at least one of them (in this example, the song release notification MM overlaps with“ expected degree S display ”), but is displayed so as not to overlap any of them. May be.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 45C)” and “expectation S display (FIG. 45J)”. ing. At this timing, while the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, neither the “preliminary expectation A display” nor the “expectation S display” is displayed, and the display continues. Yes.

  The “expected degree S display” is different from the effect corresponding to the “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) when, for example, the next variable game (decorative display of decorative symbols) starts. When the effect is executed, it is not displayed when the effect corresponding to the “expected degree S display” (or “expected degree SSS display”) ends.

  In addition, the “preliminary expectation A display” is a display that continues to be displayed because the corresponding effect (the effect of the big hit expectation is “A” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is hidden by execution of the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank production).

Also, the display end timing (first timing) of “expected degree S display” and the display end timing (second timing) of “preliminary expectation A display” may be the same, or the first The timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example d-2)
Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (h) to (l).
(H) to (l) in the drawing are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed, and the “preliminary expectation S display (FIG. 45D)” is displayed. FIG. The timing is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up”. By acquiring the mini-item “Up”, the currently executed effect (in this example, the blue holding change effect) is promoted to an effect with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in (j) of FIG. 6 indicates that the blue hold change effect by the fluctuation icon h0 is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display (for example, the character display “S?” Shown in FIG. 45D and the display of a gold rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation S display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation (rank) effect different from the effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” is executed.

  In this example, the expectation rank display RN displays the letters “A”, the red rectangle and the “red hold” shown in FIG. 45 (i), and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “A”. It is informing that the effect is being executed ("expected degree A display" is performed).

  In addition, at this timing, the effect of “S” rank corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation S display”) is not executed, so the display of “preliminary expectation S display” (see FIG. 45 (d)) continues.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the “preliminary expectation S display” and “expectation A display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, “expected degree A display” is not displayed, while “preliminary expected degree S display” is continuously displayed.

  Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues to be displayed because the corresponding effect (effect with a big hit expectation of “S” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is not displayed when the big hit expectation is “S” rank).

  In FIG. 10L, the display end timing (first timing) of “expected degree A display” and the display end timing (second timing) of “preliminary expectation S display” are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In the present embodiment (production example d), a configuration has been described in which a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or expectation rank displays RN are displayed without overlapping, but a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or expectations are displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which part of the degree rank display RN is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment (production example d), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or the expectation rank display RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The RP or the expected rank display RN may be displayed on the left and right (side by side).

Further, in the present example (production example d), the case where the ranks of the expectation rank display RN and the prior expectation rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even if both ranks are the same.
<Example of production e>

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example e-1)
FIG. 34 (b) to FIG. 34 (h) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 30B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the variation icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 45C)” is displayed, and FIG. The timing is the same as that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 4D shows a sub game effect (for example, the target “shown in FIG. 45B”) by a mini character (donor) at a certain timing, as shown in FIGS. 30B to 30E. As a result, “preliminary expectation S display (FIG. 45 (d))” is added to the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 45 (c))” on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. Is displayed. In this case, the “preliminary expectation A display” displayed earlier is displayed in the lower row, and the “preliminary expectation S display” displayed later is displayed in a vertical row in the upper row.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining the mini item MI) by the mini character (dono) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (dono) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” ((f) in FIG. 45) The effect currently being executed by acquiring the mini item “Up” (in this example, , Blue hold change production) will be promoted to a production with a high expectation level of jackpot.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 4 (e), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect of the big hit expectation degree “A”. It is in a state of being promoted to.

  That is, the change icon h0 changes to red to perform pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest member 224A changes to red light emission.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” and the “preliminary expectation A display” are continuously displayed from the timing shown in FIG. 4D (FIGS. 45D and 45C).

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 5B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation (rank) effect (for example, a red-holding change effect with a jackpot expectation “A” rank) is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6G, the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the expectation degree of jackpot is “A” rank is executed (“expected degree A display” is performed). State. In this case, “expected degree A display” is switched to “preliminary expected degree A display” and is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the “preliminary expectation S display” is continued because the performance of the big hit expectation corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation S display”) is not executed. doing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of “expected degree A display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, “expected degree A display” is not displayed, while “preliminary expected degree S display” is continuously displayed.

  Note that the display of the “preliminary expectation S display” at this timing is moved to the area where the “expectation A display” is displayed because the “expectation A display” displayed in the lower row is not displayed. (Slide) is displayed.

  Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues to be displayed because the corresponding effect (effect with a big hit expectation of “S” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is not displayed when the big hit expectation is “S” rank).

  In this way, display is started at different timings of the prior expectation rank display RP, and a plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP (here, “preliminary expectation S display”, “preliminary expectation S display”) are displayed at the same time. In this case, one prior expectation rank display RP displayed earlier is displayed in the lower stage, and the other prior expectation rank display RPs are displayed so as to be stacked on the upper stage in the order added thereafter.

Then, corresponding to any one of the plurality of prior expectation rank indications RP (the effect of jackpot expectation (rank) is executed to become the expectation rank indication RN, and the expectation rank indication RN (after a certain period of time, etc.) If the expected rank display RN displayed in the lower row is not displayed, the prior expected rank display RP or the expected rank display RN displayed in the upper row is displayed in the lower row. In other words, when the lower-level prior expectation rank display RP or the expectation rank display RN is not displayed, the upper section The prior expectation rank display RP or the expectation rank display RN sequentially moves to the lower display area and is displayed again.
(Production example e-2)
FIG. 34 (j) to FIG. 34 (p) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (J) to (m) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. (B) to (e) and will not be described.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (n) is obtained by acquiring the mini item “Up” in FIG. 11 (m), so that the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” It is in a state of being promoted to.

  In other words, the change icon h0 changes to the icon (FIG. 45 (g)) to make a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest character 224A is changed to gold light emission.

  At this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” and the “preliminary expectation A display” (FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (c)) are continued from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing shown in FIG. 11L, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation S display” at the timing shown in FIG. A jackpot expectation degree (rank) effect (for example, an on-hold change effect with a jackpot expectation degree of “S” rank) is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (o), the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the fact that the expectation of jackpot expectation is “S” rank (“expected degree S display” is performed). State. Note that the “expected degree S display” in this case is displayed after being switched (replaced) to “preliminary expected degree S display”.

  Also, at this timing, points are added based on the player's membership service functions and the level increases (here, the level increases from 1.2 to 1.3). Show. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C). In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, a song release notification MM is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the “preliminary expectation A display” is continued because the effect of rank “A” rank corresponding to the prior expectation rank display (“preliminary expectation A display”) is not executed. doing.

  That is, in the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, “prior expectation A display (FIG. 45 (c))”, “expectation S display (FIG. 45 (j))”, song release notification MM (FIG. 45 (h)) Are displayed in this order, and the song release notification MM overlaps at least the “expected degree S display” (the release notification MM is displayed so as not to overlap the “expected degree S display”. Good).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (p) shows a state after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the “expected degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is not displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the display of “expected degree S display” and “preliminary expected degree A display” is continued.

The “preliminary expectation level A display” is a display that has been continuously displayed because a corresponding effect (effect with a big hit expectation level of “A” rank) is not executed at this timing. It is hidden by execution of the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank production).
(Production example e-3)
FIG. 34 (q) to FIG. 34 (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (q) is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 17 (r) shows a sub-game effect (for example, the target “shown in FIG. 45 (b)” shown in FIG. 45 (b) at a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 30 (b) to FIG. 30 (e). As a result, “Preliminary Expectation A Display” and “Preliminary Expectation S Display” are displayed simultaneously on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this case, for example, “preliminary expectation A display” having a low jackpot expectation rank is displayed in a lower row, and “preliminary expectation S display” having a high jackpot expectation rank in a top row. The display order may be reversed.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example e), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or the expectation rank display RN are displayed without overlapping is described. A configuration may be adopted in which part of the degree rank display RN is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment (production example e), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP or the expectation rank display RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The RP or the expected rank display RN may be displayed on the left and right (side by side).

Further, in this embodiment (production example e), the case where the rank of the expectation rank display RN and the rank of the prior expectation rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even if both ranks are the same.
<Example of production f>

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, and is the same as the timing shown in FIG. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a timing at which, for example, the transition from the first to the second of the pseudo-continuous performance is performed, and the movable body (in this example, the eight-generation role 224B and the general role 224C) is executed. State. For example, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C in which the built-in LED is lit white at the initial position indicated by the broken line change to blue light and descend from the initial position, and a part of the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed. It is an effect that overlaps (for example, a part of the variation display of the first decorative design), and as an example, it is an effect effect with a jackpot expectation of “A” rank.

  Further, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, “A?” Display and a red rectangle display) is continued from the timing of FIG.

  That is, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 5B, and actually corresponds to “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing shown in FIG. An effect (for example, an effect effect with a big hit expectation degree of “A” rank) is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank is expected as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state. The Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C have returned to the initial positions.

  In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 45 (m), a letter “A”, a red rectangle, and a letter “logo drop” are displayed, and the rank of the big hit expectation degree is “A”. Is being executed ("expected degree A display" is performed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 45C)” is displayed again on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, a plurality of effects are repeatedly executed. For example, in this production example, as the pseudo-continuous production (part of), the eight generations 224B and the generals 224C execute the production that repeatedly descends and rises as shown in FIGS. To do. That is, the accessory effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” displayed in FIG. 5B is an effect that continues until the pseudo-continuous effect ends.

  Accordingly, even if the display changes from “preliminary expectation level A display” to “expectation level A display” due to the descent of the Yatsushiro role 224B and the general role 224C (Fig. (D), again Fig. (E) "Preliminary expectation A display" is displayed at the timing indicated by

  In this case, the “preliminary expectation A display” is redisplayed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing when the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C return to the initial position from the position shown in FIG. 8C). (It is displayed over the “Expectation A display”). Alternatively, it may be switched from “preliminary expectation level A display” (switched by an animation display or the like in which the “expectation level A display” is turned over).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G is the timing when the pseudo-rendition production is shifted from the second to the third, for example, and the production of the eight-seventh feature 224B and the general feature 224C (the jackpot expectation is “A” rank) Is a state in which the effect production) is executed.

  In addition, at this timing, the “preliminary expectation A display” display (for example, a character display “A?” And a red rectangle display) is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is based on the fact that the effect of rank “A” rank in the jackpot expectation is executed according to the notification “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. Is running. The Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C have returned to the initial positions. The “expected degree A display” in this case is a display of a letter “A”, a red rectangle, and a letter “logo drop” as shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is a state in which the effect production which is a part of the pseudo-continuous production is finished, and the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “expectation A display” is the production (work) As shown in FIG. 45 (n), a display indicating the end of the effect (in this example, the word “Done”) is superimposed (overlapped) on the “expectation A display” as shown in FIG. 45 (n). Is displayed).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (j), after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of “expected degree A display”, the “expected degree A display” and display indicating the end of the effect that overlapped therewith are not displayed. Is (erased).

  In (j) in the figure, the timing at which “expected degree A display” is not displayed (first timing) and the display indicating the end of the production (marks with “completed” characters) are not displayed. The same timing (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, in this example, “preliminary expectation A display” is switched to “expected expectation A display” in FIG. 4D, but in one effect (for example, one pseudo-continuous effect) When an operation of an object (up and down movement in this example) is performed, “preliminary expectation A display” may be continued without switching to “expectation A display” during the period of the effect.

Further, in this example, the case where “preliminary expectation A display” and “expectation A display” are displayed has been described, but “expectation S display” (“preliminary expectation S display” that does not disappear even after the corresponding production ends. In the case of “degree S display”), the display is continued together with the display indicating the end of the production (mark including the characters “completed”) in FIG.
<Example g>

  FIG. 36 to FIG. 37 are diagrams showing another example of the expectation notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 36B to 36F are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 34D to 34H, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, in the state in which “preliminary expectation S display” is performed, a super reach production (swordsman reach production) with a big hit expectation degree of “S” rank is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081, for example. Is in a state where has been started. In the icon display area 800 of the main liquid crystal 2081, only the variation icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family crest character 224A is also lit in red in conjunction with the variation icon h0.

  FIG. 45 (k) shows the timing shown in FIG. 45 (k) based on the fact that the performance of the big hit expectation degree “S” rank is executed as informed by the “preliminary expectation degree S display” in FIG. As shown, a letter “S”, a golden rectangle, and a letter “Swordsman Reach” are displayed to notify that the performance of the jackpot expectation rank “S” is being executed (“expectation degree” S display "is performed).

  Further, points are added based on the player's function related to membership system and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and a privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, release of a song (Song C), and a song release notification MM (FIG. 45 (h)) for notifying that the song C has been released is displayed at the top of the “expectation S display”. Has been.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) displays the confrontation scene in the super reach production (swordsman reach production). In the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the “expected S display” continues to be displayed, but the song is released. The notification MM is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (k) is a state in which the animation display before the start of the button production is executed so as to overlap the front of the confrontation scene in the super reach production (swordsman reach production). “Display” continues to display. Instead of the button effect start animation display, a simple effect image (not related to the button effect) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 4 shows a state where the button effect is executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The animation relating to the button effect is, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 (button image BG) and a display (elapsed time notification image TG) indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The button image BG is displayed in red, which is the same as the display color of the variation icon h0 and the lighting color of the family crest member 224A, and the chance button 136 can be operated with the built-in LED lighting in red accordingly. Is informed.

  Note that the display start timing of the button image BG (first timing) and the red lighting timing of the chance button 136 (second timing) may be the same timing, or the first timing is the second timing. The second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (m) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has been operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (n) to (q) of FIG. 11 is a state where a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is being performed. A series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is, for example, from the initial position (for example, below the main liquid crystal 2081) indicated by a broken line, as shown in FIG. Ascending to the front of the main liquid crystal 2081, the eight generations 224 </ b> B and the general 224 </ b> B are also lit in rainbow colors and repeatedly move up and down above the main liquid crystal 2081. In addition, the image display device 208 ′ performs illumination display, special image (animation) display, and the like, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 also perform an effect in which the built-in LED is lit in rainbow colors ((n) to FIG. 10). (P)). Then, the family crest character 224A returns to the initial position ((q) in the figure), and a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is completed. In the same figure (n) to (q), a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is also performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, and the prior expectation rank display RP (expected degree rank display RN). Is hidden.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (r) shows a state where the character (dono) has won in the super reach production (swordsman reach production). That is, on the main liquid crystal 2081, an image in which the character (donor) has won the character (swordsman) and a character “Victory” are displayed. Further, each of the objects (family crest character 224A, Yatsushiro character 224B, and general character 224C) continues to be rainbow-colored at the initial position, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 also continue to be rainbow-colored.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a state following FIG. 36 (r), and in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081, a decorative symbol of a jackpot symbol combination (here, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is displayed. (Swing fluctuation display, temporary stop display).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5B, the symbol combination of the jackpot symbol combination (here, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is stopped and displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081, and the four symbol display device 284 is displayed. The special figure 1 (rectangle) is displayed in black, and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the special figure 1 is in a hit stop state.

  The timing shown in FIG. 3C is a state in which a mission achievement display (notification) MA is displayed. In this example, the mission achievement display MA corresponds to the display of the button effect in FIGS. 36 (m) and 36 (n), “NO11: I saw a big button”, and the character (donor) in FIG. 36 (r). Corresponding to the display of the victory scene and the stop display of the jackpot decoration symbol in FIG. 27B, the display is “NO52: Swordsman reach and jackpot”.

  In this embodiment, a mission achievement display MA is displayed separately from the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN. A plurality of mission achievement indications MA are prepared, and the player can obtain an advantageous privilege according to the type (contents) and number by collecting the mission achievement indications MA.

  Unlike the advance expectation rank display RP (expectation rank display RN) that informs the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the performance to be executed, the mission achievement display MA is a display corresponding to the membership system service, and the progress of the game This is a display (notification) that has a low direct relationship with. For this reason, the mission achievement display MA does not interfere with the performance, and is notified when sufficient time has elapsed since the execution of a certain performance, such as notification when the change is stopped so as not to be confused with notification corresponding to a certain change. It is.

  After the mission achievement display MA is displayed, the jackpot game is started as shown in FIG. 4D, the probability change promotion effect is executed (FIG. 5F), and the jackpot game is ended (FIG. )).

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5I, after the jackpot game is over, the mission achievement display MA is informed that the probability is changed (in this example, “NO21: probability change promotion”). For example, the display is performed at any one of the jackpot end intervals (from the end of the last round of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game) in order to prevent the first hit.

On the other hand, the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN) of the present embodiment may be notified before the final stage of the production corresponding to these branches. For example, if a red-holding change effect (for example, a jackpot expectation “A”) is executed, a prior expectation is expected even if there is a possibility that the red-holding change effect (for example, a jackpot expectation “S”) is subsequently promoted. There may be a case where “preliminary expectation A display” is performed as the degree rank display RP (determined by the red hold change effect).
<Example h>

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example h-1)
FIGS. 38B to 38E are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is a state in which the decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8”) are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. In the icon display area 800, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are each displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6C, one hold is consumed, and the change icon h0 changes to blue in the icon display area 800 to perform pre-reading notice. Further, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the blue holding change effect shown in (c) of the same figure) has been executed by the mini character (dono) dialogue. . Specifically, as shown in the enlarged view in the lower part of FIG. 4D, the balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (dono), and the letters “hold is blue change” are displayed, and the blue hold change effect is executed. It is informed (after the fact) that it was done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the post-announcement of the performance by the mini character (dono) is not displayed.

The post-notification of the performance by the mini character (dono) in this embodiment (notification by the line of the mini character (dono)) does not notify the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of the effect, and is executed after this timing. This is a notification that is different from the prior expectation rank display RP of the present embodiment because it is not intended to notify in advance about the production that may be performed.
(Example h-2)
FIG. 38 (h) to FIG. 38 (l) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), one hold is consumed, and in the icon display area 800, the change icon h0 changes to red and a pre-reading notice is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state in which a mini-character (dono) notifies that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in (i) of the same figure) has been executed. Specifically, a balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (dono), and a character “hold is red change” is displayed to notify that the red hold change effect has been executed (subsequently).

  At the timing shown in (k) in the figure, for example, as shown in the enlarged view in the lower part of (k) in the same figure, an image overlapping the display area of the expectation rank display RN of the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (for example, A visual effect image AE that is easy to focus on) is displayed. In this case, for example, the player guides the player's line of sight to the display area of the expectation rank display RN by displaying an arrow from the vicinity of the mini character (dono) toward the display area of the expectation rank display RN. The display is also done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 10L, the visual effect image AE is not displayed, and the expectation rank display RN (in this example, “expected degree A display”) is visible to the player.

In the present embodiment, the post-notification of the performance by the mini character (dono) (the post-notification similar to FIG. 11D) and the expectation rank display RN by the mini character (dono) are performed. The prior expectation rank display RP of the embodiment is not performed.
(Example h-3)
FIG. 38 (n) to FIG. 38 (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (n) is the same as that shown in FIG. 30 (g), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation rank display RP shown in FIG. Is a state in which “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (o), one hold is consumed, and in the icon display area 800, the change icon h0 changes to red and a pre-reading notice is performed. Further, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) is a state in which a normal display mini-character (dono) is informing that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in FIG. 5 (o)) has been executed. is there. Specifically, a balloon SS as shown in the enlarged diagram (d) below is displayed on the mini character (dono), and the text “Hold is red change” is displayed, and the red hold change effect is executed. It is informed (after the fact) that it was done.

  At the timing shown in (q) in the figure, similarly to (k) in the figure, an image (for example, an overlapped display area of the prior expectation rank display RP (“preliminary expectation A display”) of the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (for example, A visual effect image or the like that is easily noticed by the player is displayed. In this case, however, the visual effect image is displayed behind the “preliminary expectation level A display” and the “preliminary expectation level A display” is visible to the player, as shown in the enlarged diagram (q) below. It has become.

  The visual effect image is not displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Also, in the same figure (o), “Preliminary Expectation A Display” is switched to “Replacement Expectation A Display” based on the performance of the “A” rank of jackpot expectation. Thus, the “expected degree A display” is visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, post-notification of the effect by the mini character (dono) (post-notification similar to (d) in the figure), the prior expectation rank display RP, and the expectation rank display RN are performed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1L and 1R, the expectation rank display RN is performed with the same effect (display mode) regardless of the presence / absence of the prior expectation rank display RP. However, the effect (display mode) in which the expected rank display RN is performed may be different depending on the presence or absence of the prior expected rank display RP.
<Example i>

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example h-1)

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state in which the mission notification effect is being executed by the mini character (donor) during the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal 2081. Specifically, a balloon SS indicating “Tempered with 7 symbols” is displayed on the mini character (dono) to notify the mission.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows a state in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the left symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, respectively, and the mission (7 symbol template) is achieved.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 9E, an effect based on the achievement of the mission shown in FIG. In this example, the effect based on the achievement of the mission is a display of characters indicating that it is a big hit (here, “iron plate!”).

  In this embodiment, as a result of the mission notification effect by the mini character (donor) in FIG. 5B, a display that suggests that if the mission is achieved, it will be a big hit is executed. However, in the mission notification effect of FIG. 7B, the mission may not be achieved (for example, 7 symbols are not stopped and displayed), and the rank of the big hit expectation is not notified. This is an effect different from the prior expectation rank notification effect (advance expectation rank display RP).

In addition, although illustration is omitted, in FIG. 9E, in addition to the characters indicating that a big hit is made (here, “iron plate!”), An expectation rank display RN may be displayed.
<Example j>

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and showing an example of an appearance mode of the prior expectation rank display RP. FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 40B is a state in which the main liquid crystal 2081 is performing the variable display of the first decorative symbol. In the icon display area 800, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end, and white hold icons h11 and 12 are displayed on the left. In addition, a timer notice effect is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. In this example, the timer notice effect overlaps a part of the display of the first decorative symbol and displays a blue timer TM as shown in an enlarged view in the lower part of FIG. It is a blue timer effect that displays.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the timer TM is 0, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is performed. At this timing, a mini-character MC2 different from the normal-display mini-character MC (mini-character) is displayed on the front of the first decorative symbol variation display so as to overlap a part of the decorative symbol. Is done. In this example, the mini character MC2 is a mini character (donor) shown enlarged in the lower diagram of FIG. Then, after the timer TM and the mini character MC2 are not displayed, the prior expectation rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, as shown in FIG. Is done.

  In this way, the prior expectation rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) is a character effect display (for example, a mini character) by a mini character that appeared later at the timing shown in FIG. May be displayed in connection with (Appearance effect display) ((e) in the figure).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which one hold is consumed and the next liquid crystal 2081 starts displaying a variation of the decorative pattern. At this timing, since an effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation A display” is not executed, “preliminary expectation A display” is continuously displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11H, another timer notice effect is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081. In this timer notice effect, a red timer TM is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. Red timer production. The red timer effect is an effect corresponding to “preliminary expectation A display”.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (i), the timer TM starts counting down as shown in the enlarged right figure of FIG. 5 (i), and the red timer effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” is executed. Thus, “preliminary expectation A display” is switched to “expectation A display” (replaced) and displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the countdown of the timer TM advances as shown in the right figure in FIG. 6J, and “expectation A display” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of “expectation A display”. "Is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L is a state in which the timer TM has become 0 as shown in the enlarged right figure in FIG. 11L, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is performed. . At this timing, the mini character MC2 (mini character (donor)), which is different from the normal display mini character (donor), overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol on the front of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 11M, when a red change effect is executed in which the white change icon h0 changes to a red icon by the red timer effect, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 is displayed as shown in FIG. Expected rank display RN (here, “expected degree S display”) is displayed in the section.

  When displaying a timer with a short timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP is more easily displayed than when displaying a long timer. In addition, when displaying a timer with a long timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP may be displayed more easily than when displaying a short timer.

  Further, when a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN is more easily displayed than when a long timer is displayed. Note that when a timer with a long timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN may be displayed more easily than when a short timer is displayed.

  In addition, when displaying a timer with a short timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation is easier to display than when displaying a long timer. In addition, when displaying a timer with a long timer notice effect, the prior expectation rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when displaying a short timer.

Further, when a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, an expectation rank display RN with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than when a long timer is displayed. When a timer with a long timer notice effect is displayed, an expectation rank display RN with a high jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when a short timer is displayed.
<Example of production k>

FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating another example of the expected degree notification effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating another example of an appearance mode of the prior expectation rank display RP. It is.
(Example of production k-1)
FIG. 41B to FIG. 41E are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 41B is a state in which the main liquid crystal 2081 is performing the stop display (swing fluctuation display, temporary stop display) of the first decorative symbol. The symbol combination of the first decoration symbol is, for example, “decoration 4—special symbol—decoration 8”. The special symbol is, for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol.

  This special symbol is an image related to the prior expectation rank display RP (in this example, a character display “A?” And a red rectangle display as shown in an enlarged view in the lower part of FIG. The image RPG imitating the expectation rank display RP) is included (applied), and the special symbol stop display displays the prior expectation rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation A” in the right sub-liquid crystal 2083). Display ") is displayed ((c) in the figure).

Then, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display). In this case, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is a special symbol, but as shown in the enlarged diagram in the lower diagram (d), “4-5-8” is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y, It is notified that the decorative symbol of the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8” has been stopped and displayed. And the change display of the following 1st decoration symbol is performed by digestion of holding | maintenance (the figure (e)).
(Example of production k-2)
FIG. 41 (h) to FIG. 41 (k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 41 (h) is a state in which the first liquid crystal 2081 is performing the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and FIG. 41 (i) is a state in which the button effect is executed. This button effect is an effect related to whether or not to execute the advance expectation rank notification effect (whether to display the advance expectation rank display RP). In this example, a button image BG and an elapsed time notification image TG that overlap each other are displayed on the front face of the first decorative symbol variation display. In addition, as shown in the enlarged view (i) in the figure below, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are displayed on the back side (and the front side of the first decorative symbol) on the image ( For example, an image RPG imitating the prior expectation rank display RP) is included. In this case, at least one of the button image BG, the elapsed time notification image TG, and the image RPG simulating the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed as a rank (for example, jackpot) of the display (possible) prior expectation rank display RP. The display is related to the degree of expectation “A”) (for example, red display). In this case, the chance button 136 also emits light of the same color (red).

  If the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. 10J, the prior expectation rank is based on the button effect as shown in FIG. A display RP (in this case, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed.

  As an appearance mode other than this, as shown in the same figure (m), in advance based on the display of a mini-item MI (expanded in the lower part of the figure (m)) imitating the prior expectation rank display RP. An expectation rank display RP may be displayed. For example, when the mini item MI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP is used by a mini character (donor), the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (n), the prior expectation rank display RP may be displayed based on the display of the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP. In this case, the prior expectation rank display RP is displayed on, for example, the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 in the variation in which the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP (expanded in FIG. The prior expectation rank display RP may be displayed on, for example, the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 in a change before the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation rank display RP is digested.
<Example of production l>

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing another example of the expected degree notification effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example of production 1-1)
42 (b) to 42 (d) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b), in the main liquid crystal 2081, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the prior expectation rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. ) Is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, one hold is consumed, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and a red hold change effect is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is based on the fact that the red-holding change effect with the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank is executed, as shown in FIG. Degree A display ". At the same time, “preliminary expectation S display” is performed.

In this case, the effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” is, for example, an effect related to the hold (for example, a hold change change effect). That is, the change icon h0 displayed in red at this timing may be notified that there is a possibility of being promoted to the icon (promoted in two stages). In addition, you may make it change not to 2 steps | paragraphs but to 3 steps | paragraphs or more (promotion), In this case, 3 or more prior expectation rank display RP is performed simultaneously.
(Production example 1-2)
FIG. 42 (h) to FIG. 42 (k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

  The timing shown in FIG. 42 (h) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 30 (e), and is a state where the sub game effect has been successful.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is based on the success of the subgame effect, for example, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation A display”) is performed. At the same time, the display related to the advance expectation rank display PR (for example, band display) is performed over the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The display related to the prior expectation rank display PR is the same color as the color corresponding to the rank of the prior expectation rank display PR (in this example, a red band display), and the big hit expectation (in this example) “A”) is displayed in a telop, for example, so that the player can easily see it. In this case, the prior expectation rank display PR is a still image, and the display related to the prior expectation rank display PR is a moving image, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the prior expectation rank.

  FIG. 10K is a display example when another prior expectation rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) is added. Also in this case, for example, the prior expectation rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) is performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, and the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are preliminarily displayed. Display related to the expected rank display PR (for example, band display and telop display) is performed.

  Further, in this case, for example, the display related to the prior expectation rank display PR (“preliminary expectation S display”) added later is the prior expectation rank display PR (“preliminary expectation A display” previously displayed). ”) In front of (so as to overlap the previous display).

  The prior expectation rank display PR includes a display of a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display related to the prior expectation rank display PR by a band display and a telop display. Only a still image displayed on the liquid crystal 2083 is displayed.

Alternatively, the expectation rank display PN may include a display of a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display regarding the expectation rank display PN by band display and telop display.
<Example of production m>

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the effect notification effect step by step with the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment as the center.

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 43A to 43E are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 30A to 30E, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (donor) has returned to the normal display (default display) shown in FIG. 5A, and the sub-game effect has been completed. A state in which the notice effect is executed is shown.

  In this timer notice effect, a red timer TM (shown enlarged in the right figure (f)) is displayed overlapping with a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, for example, a countdown display of 30 seconds. It is a red timer production to be performed. The timer notice effect is a notice effect that informs that a certain effect will be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period (in this case, 30 seconds counted down).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the timer TM is 0 as shown in the enlarged right diagram of FIG. 11H, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is performed. . At this timing, the mini character MC2 (mini character), which is different from the normal display mini character MC (mini character), is overlapped with the part of the decorative symbol in front of the variation display of the first decorative symbol. Character (dono)) is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and the red hold change effect is executed. In conjunction with this, the crest character 244A also changes from white lighting to red lighting.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (j) is based on the fact that the red-holding change effect having the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank is executed in FIG. Display ".

  As described above, in this embodiment, the “red timer effect” is performed in the timer notice effect, and the red-holding change effect with the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank is executed after the timer ends.

  That is, for example, timer notice effects with different display modes (for example, timer notice effects such as “red timer effect” and “blue timer effect” with different colors, shapes, patterns, etc.) In advance, the rank of the jackpot expectation level of the effect to be executed later is notified in advance by performing the timer notice effect, and after the timer notice effect, the effect belonging to the corresponding rank of the jackpot expectation level is executed. Thus, the timer notice effect can be made to function in the same manner as the prior expectation rank notification effect of the present embodiment. That is, by applying the present embodiment (embodiment M), all of the above-described prior expectation rank notification effects of the present embodiment can be performed by replacing them with timer notice effects.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with both the timer notice effect of a present Example, and the above-mentioned prior expectation rank alerting effects other than a present Example.
<Various tables of prior expectation rank notification production>

  FIG. 44 is an example of various tables applied to the present embodiment (effect example a to effect example m).

  FIG. 44 (a) is an example of an effect rank table showing the correspondence between each effect and the rank (attribute) of the jackpot expectation degree.

  As shown in the figure, the rank (attribute) of the jackpot expectation is, for example, “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”... In addition, in some of the effects performed on the game machine of the present embodiment, an expectation level that is a big hit after execution of the effect is set in advance, and “SSS”, “ S ”,“ A ”,“ B ”...

  For example, the contradictory production has a jackpot expectation rank of “SSS”, the Tongue change change production has a jackpot expectation rank of “S”, the swordsman reach production has a jackpot expectation rank of “S”, The jackpot expectation rank is “A”, the princess rescue reach production is “A”, the red timer production is the jackpot expectation rank is “A”, and the blue holding change production is the rank of the jackpot expectation Is “B”, and the blue timer production is such that the rank of the big hit expectation is “B”.

  In addition, this table is provided with a table for prior expectation rank notification effect and a table for expectation rank notification effect, and an effect corresponding to each is set. Therefore, there is an effect that is not set in the table for the advance expectation rank notification effect, and there is an effect that is set in the table for the expectation rank notification effect. For example, if the swordsman reach production is set in the table for the expectation rank notification effect, but not set in the table for the advance expectation rank notification effect, the advance expectation rank notification effect is executed for the swordsman reach production. Only the expectation rank notification effect is executed.

  In addition, except for special cases such as contradiction effects, for example, the effect that is the target of the prior expectation rank notification effect is the target of the expectation rank notification effect, so the effect set in the table for the prior expectation rank notification effect is In principle, it is set in the table for expectation rank notification effect.

  In addition, the rank is a relative classification (for example, a classification in a reach production, a classification in a pending change production) among a plurality of productions of the same type, and the rank of the jackpot expectation is the same. Even if there is, the jackpot expectation (numerical value) varies depending on the type of production (for example, reach production or holding change production). For example, in the example of FIG. 5A, the princess rescue reach production has a jackpot expectation rank set to A, but this is relatively classified into rank A among a plurality of reach productions. Not too much. For example, when comparing the expectation of jackpot between the swordsman reach and the princess rescue reach, the swordsman reach has a higher expectation of the jackpot. As a result, the swordsman reach is ranked “S” and the princess rescue reach is ranked “A”. Classification is made.

  In addition, even if the rank of the big hit expectation is the same, there may be a large difference in the big hit expectation depending on the type of performance. (For example, when compared with the type of production, the reach production generally has a higher jackpot expectation than the hold change production, etc.).

  Therefore, for example, the princess rescue reach production with a big hit expectation rank of “A” is higher in the big hit expectation degree (numerical value) than the hold change production with a big hit expectation degree of “S”. is there.

  That is, when the types of effects are different, the big hit expectation is not necessarily set in the order of the rank in FIG.

  Further, the correspondence relationship between the rank of jackpot expectation degree and effects and the effects that are set in FIG. 5A are merely examples for convenience of explanation, and are not limited to the relationships shown here.

  The ranking is set in consideration of not only the big hit expectation but also the rare degree (in the case of special effects such as contradiction effects), the number of points of the membership system service, and the like.

  FIG. 44B is a mini item table showing a list of mini items applicable to the present embodiment and their functions.

  When the mini character (donor) acquires the mini item shown in FIG. 5B, the production corresponding to each item is executed. In addition, the kind of mini item is not restricted to what was shown to the same figure.

  44 (c) to (f) are examples of a temporary storage area for effect management provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400, and a reserved color information table used when changing a reserved icon. And a setting example thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, the reserved color information table includes, for example, information on the variation (table item “related”) of FIG. 1 and reserved 1 to 4 (table item “hold 1” in FIG. 1). "To" hold 4 ") are stored. Each of “related” and “hold 1” to “hold 4” is further divided into items of “previous (related)”, “this time”, “next time”, “next time”, and “next time”. The color information of the hold icon is stored every time.

  Each time the hold is digested, as shown in FIG. 5C, the color information of the hold icon is reset to the previous one (previous and previous hold), and the hold icon changes.

  Hereinafter, an example of setting color information will be described in detail. FIG. 4D corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 30 (a), a white change icon h0 and hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the icon display area 800 (default, displayed as “default” in the figure). In this case, as shown in the item “(previous) relevant” in FIG. 44D, “define” (white, the same applies hereinafter) corresponding to the fluctuation icon h0 and “hold” corresponding to the hold icon h11. “Default” is set to “1”, “Default” is set to “hold 2” corresponding to the hold icon h12, and “Default” is set to “hold 3” corresponding to the hold icon h13.

  As the color information of “current”, “default” is set in “hold 1”, “default / preliminary A” is set in “hold 2”, and “default” is set in “hold 3”. Here, “default / preliminary A” of “hold 2” indicates that the hold icon is displayed by default and “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed as the prior expectation rank display RP.

  In addition, “blue → red” is set in “hold 2” as “next” color information, “default” is set in “hold 3”, and “default” is set in “hold 3” as color information “next time”. Has been. Here, “blue → red” of “hold 2” indicates that the display color of the hold icon is changed to blue and then changed to red.

  Further, (e) in the figure corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in (f) in FIG. 30, for example.

  With the hold, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. At the timings of FIGS. 30B to 30F, a white variation icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as the “(previous) relevant” color information, “default” is set for “related”, “default / preliminary A” is set for “hold 1”, and “default” is set for “hold 2”.

  That is, “hold 1” (hold icon h11 in FIGS. 30B to 30F) is displayed by default, and when hold 2 in the previous change becomes hold 1, the change is being displayed in that state (FIG. 30 (b) to (f)), “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed as the prior expectation rank display RP.

  In addition, “blue → red” is set in “hold 1”, “default” is set in “hold 2”, and “default” is set in “hold 2” as “next” color information. Has been.

Further, (f) in the figure corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIGS. 31 (b) to (f), for example. With the hold, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. 31B and 31C, a blue variation icon h0 and a white hold icon h11 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, “blue → red” is set in “related” and “default” is set in “hold 1” as color information of “(previous) related”. This is because, when the hold 1 in the previous change becomes such, the hold icon is changed to blue during the change display in that state (FIGS. 31B and 31C), and then further changed to red ( 31 (d) to (f)).
In addition, “default” is set to “hold 1” as the color information of “current”.
[Third Embodiment]

  Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine, a spinning game machine such as a slot machine, or an enclosed game machine) according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. To do.

  46 to 148 are used only in the description of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment in principle, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, In the description of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 46 to 148. In addition, the numbers of the respective examples of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment are used only for the explanation of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment in principle, but the numbers of the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment are also used. Each example and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. In addition, when there are drawings showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, overlapping description may be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden or metal frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a channel that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 46) by the player's operation. A button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 48) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 47 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 46 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 49). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 48 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a ball in the ordinary figure starting port 228, special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later, is as follows. The game ball that falls on the right path is different from the game ball that falls on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure start port 228, the special figure 2 start port 232, and the variable prize opening 235, the general figure start port 228, the special figure 2 start opening 232, and the variable prize opening 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like, the entrance of the game ball falling on the left path is relative. It is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, an effect display area 208d, and a fourth symbol display area 208e. 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect, and the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol. . Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 48, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 48, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is provided (two in total), but both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and 235 are disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the right path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable prize winning openings 234 and 235 are respectively provided with door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234 or the variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball for the upper plate 126. To discharge. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Winning out the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting port 228 To reach.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and predetermined movable members, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the door of the variable winning port 235 A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 and the like for driving the members 235a and the like to open and close is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and a drive for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224. A circuit 422, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an operation unit that detects pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 A sensor (not shown), a sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from a predetermined detection sensor, for example, the effect movable body sensor 424 and the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a control program and various effect data are stored. A ROM 406 for connecting to the PC. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. . A driving circuit for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the basic circuit.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. In addition, when the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is performed by bidirectional communication, the various sensors 320 detect the front frame door opening sensor that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. May be transmitted to the payout control unit 600 without being transmitted to the sensor circuit 322, and the payout control unit 600 may output the received detection result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIG. 50 (a) to (d). The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 50 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 50 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 50 (a) shows six types of special illustrations of “special drawing A” to “special drawing F” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display of special drawing 1. FIG. In FIG. 50 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and “Special Figure B” which is a 15R jackpot symbol is a special chart after the jackpot game ends. It is a symbol that becomes a low probability normal state high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game is completed, the game state before the small hit game is executed is maintained. In addition, “special drawing F” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  In FIG. 50 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. In FIG. 50 (b), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol. “Special figure a”, which is a special 15R jackpot symbol, is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and “Special figure b”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure after the jackpot game ends. It is a symbol that becomes a low probability normal state high probability state. These “special drawing a” and “special drawing b” are symbols with which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure c" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. The “special drawing d” is a off-line symbol, which is a symbol that has a relatively small advantage over the player.

  FIG. 50 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of "Special figure A", 15R big jackpot of "Special figure B", 15R special jackpot of "Special figure a", and 15R big jackpot of "Special figure b", the symbol display area 208a ˜208c, the combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  Further, when a 2R big hit called “special drawing D” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or a special hit of “special drawing E” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “special drawing C” or “special drawing c” is called a sudden probability change, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing F” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 50C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 50 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 50 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 51 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 subsequent to step S201, WDT is set so that the count value of WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 49, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the general figure starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, if the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is configured to be performed by bidirectional communication, the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106. The presence / absence of a door opening detection signal output from the payout control unit 600 that has received the detection result from is monitored and stored in a door detection signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then a special figure determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated. The special figure determining random value counter and the common figure winning random value counter for generating the common winning random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure timer number determining random value counter for generating the special figure timer number determining random value for determining the symbol changing time in the special figure changing game or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number value counter for determining the general-purpose timer number for generating the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the general-purpose variable game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226, 234, 235 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A jackpot determination random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A set of random numbers for jackpot determination and a special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is a special figure. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit A special jackpot determination random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the special figure 2 of 318 is acquired, and the special jackpot special feature provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. The big hit special figure determining random value is acquired from the figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 random value for determining big hit and random figure for determining special figure for big hit (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 starting information") Are stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired from the general figure winning random number counter as the normal winning random number Store in the usual random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (common symbol A shown in FIG. 50 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 50 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off as will be described later. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal timer number for generating the normal timer number determining random value is obtained as the random number value for determining the normal timer number. Based on the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number, one time for displaying the general-purpose figure on the general-purpose display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal-type variable display time. , It is stored in the usual variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. It should be noted that the special figure prefetching process may be executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 48 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure a and 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 50B are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Is the special figure b, the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure c is on. In this manner, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a), the 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure b), the sudden probability variation symbol (special figure c), and the outlier symbol (special figure d). ) Confirm display of any one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is held in an open state by a solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (until a winning of a game ball having a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable prize opening 234). In addition to outputting a signal, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and information indicating the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area. The control for opening the variable winning opening 235 during the big hit game is the same as the control method for the variable winning opening 234. In addition, a variable winning opening that is opened for each jackpot symbol may be set.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short-time state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 80 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, so the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, when the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, and the figure probability fluctuation flag is off 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 so that the special figure D, the special figure E when the small hit flag is on, and the special figure F when the off flag is on, respectively. ON / OFF drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to F. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. It is executed by using the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. It is executed by using the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is one or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 2 variable game) with a high advantage is played with priority over a special figure variable game (for example, special figure 1 variable game) with a low advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the flag, the variation time of the special symbol variable game selected in the special symbol related lottery process, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the small hit flag, This includes the value of the off flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc., including the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. The figure probability variation flag value, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, the small hit flag, the off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the special figure 1 related data stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variable game selected in the lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of special figure prefetch processing (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 54A to 54C).

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 2 start information has increased when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. Determines that the special figure 2 starting information has not increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S303. If it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information is pre-read from the special figure 2 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is shown in FIG. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the related lottery process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased. The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased is made, for example, in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, as in FIG. The comparison is made with the stored special figure 1 look-ahead number. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the main control unit timer interrupt process is completed. Return to.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information is pre-read from the special figure 1 random value storage area before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination 1 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is shown in FIG. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the related lottery process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in this embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 2 starting information, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased special figure 1 starting information except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the start information of the special map 1 and the special map 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the starting information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit, and the prefetching is performed. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the rendering using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 54 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 54A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 54 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special figure F” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special figure F” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure A ”(15R special jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure F ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 54B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 54 (b), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 54B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 54 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 54 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. And may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S413 following step S411, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S417 following step S415, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S419 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, examples described below will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a configuration that is used almost in common among the configurations shown in the drawings used in the following embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 56 (a) as an example. FIG. 56 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a special figure 1 holding lamp that constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the speaker 120 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is shown in FIG. It is shown on the right side of the display device 212. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214. In addition, the extinguished portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. The speaker 120 is shown on the right side of the special figure 2 display device 214.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 56 to 63, an example of an effect in the case where the gaming state is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (hereinafter referred to as “probable substation support state”) will be described. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the case of winning the big win of any of the special figure A, special figure C, special figure a, or special figure c, in the special figure variable game of 80 times after the big hit game ends. This is a so-called ST machine that is in a positive transformation support state. In the probable substation support state, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing decorative display variation display and stop display are allocated to the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display area 208d is assigned to almost the entire image display area. If necessary, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display area.

  Further, the state in which all the segments are represented in white in the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is being executed. The same applies to the special figure 1 display device 212. In addition, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the execution of the special symbol variable game is indicated by a downward arrow.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided in the upper right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper side in the 4th symbol display area is the 4th symbol display area 208e1 for the special figure 1, and the lower side is the 4th symbol display area 208e2 for the special figure 2. While the special figure 1 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◯” painted in light ink color as the special figure 1 fourth graphic is displayed in the special graphic 1 fourth graphic display area 208e1. While the special figure 2 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “□” painted in a light black color as the special figure 2 fourth graphic is displayed in the special graphic 2 fourth symbol display area 208e2. While the special figure 1 variable game is in operation, an image representing a white “◯” as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 208e1. While the special figure 2 variable game is in operation, an image representing white “□” is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208e2 as the special figure 2 fourth symbol.

  A vertically long hold icon display area A is provided at the right end in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold icon display area A, four circular images are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. In the probable substation support state, the number of reservations in the special fluctuation side of FIG. 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area A. In the hold icon display area A, the lowermost circular image corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the hold order of the first place, and the second circular image from the bottom corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the hold order of the second place. The third circle image from the bottom corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the third hold order, and the fourth (top) circle image from the bottom corresponds to the hold of the special figure 2 with the fourth hold order. doing. When the circular image is displayed in a predetermined color (light ink color in this example), the circular image is referred to as a holding icon, and the special figure 2 variable game of the holding order corresponding to the circular image is held. Represents that. In addition, when the circular image is displayed in white, it indicates that the special figure 2 variable game of the holding order corresponding to the circular image is not held. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon in red, green, blue, or a character image display mode, and execute a pre-reading advance notice for notifying the determination result of the reserved special figure variation game. . The prefetching notice is executed based on the prefetching result by the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. Note that a hold icon corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 1 on the non-priority fluctuation side may be displayed in the hold icon display area A in the probability substation support state.

  Further, in the probability transformation support mode, a character string image indicating the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probability transformation support mode is displayed above the center of the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 56 (a), since the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probability substation support state is 80, a character string image of “remaining 80” is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a general start port 228 and a special view start port 232. Will proceed. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), a right-pointing white arrow image is displayed at the upper right of the effect display area 208d, a “right-handed” character string image is displayed in the arrow image, and right-handed. This is reported to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the probable substation support state, a wilderness background image and an animation of Yoshimune running in the wilderness are displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the positive transformation support state, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a notice effect, a reach effect, etc. are executed.

  A horizontally long rectangular music selection area B is displayed at the upper left in the effect display area 208d. A music composed of a horizontally long rectangular frame image in the music selection area B and a character string image of any of “Song 1” to “Song n” (n is a natural number of 2 or more) displayed in the frame image. The display is displayed. The music displayed in the center of the music selection area B and indicated by the music display indicated by the downward black arrow is the currently selected music. The player can select the music output from the speaker 120 by switching the music display displayed in the center of the music selection area B by operating the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137. When the frame image of the music display is displayed in white and the character string image of any of “Song 1” to “Song n” is displayed in the frame image, the music indicated by the music display is selected. It is possible. Further, when the frame image of the music display is displayed in light ink color and an image representing “?” Is displayed in the frame image, the music corresponding to the music display cannot be selected. . Further, the music selection operation by the player may be possible only during the execution of the symbol variation display (special symbol variation game), may be possible only in the probable substation support state, or the special diagram low probability normal diagram. Only the low probability state may be possible, the special figure high probability ordinary figure only the low probability state may be possible, the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state only may be possible, or the jackpot game It may be possible only inside or always possible. Moreover, in the state where the music selection area B is displayed, the music selection operation by the player may always be possible.

  The music that can be selected in this embodiment is a music including a song. The speaker 120 outputs the accompaniment and singing of the currently selected music. In addition, a lyrics display area C for displaying a character string image (hereinafter simply referred to as “lyrics”) representing lyrics corresponding to the song singing is provided below the center of the effect display area 208d. The lyric display area C is partitioned by a horizontally-long rectangular frame image, and lyrics are displayed in the frame image. Note that the lyrics display area C may not be partitioned by the frame image, and the lyrics may be displayed immediately above the background image.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the music output from the speaker 120 may be longer than the longest variation time among all the variation times of the variation display of the special figure. , It may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of winning the big hit in the probability transformation support state, may be longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the big hit in the probability transformation support state, It may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection, may be longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection in the probable substation support state, or may be longer than the longest fluctuation time at the big hit in the non-probable substation support state Longer than the shortest fluctuation time at the time of big hit in the non-probable substation support state, or longer than the longest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection in the non-probable substation support state However, from the shortest fluctuation time at the time of disconnection in the reliable substation support state May be long, it may be longer than the shortest of the variation time of the total time-varying. Note that the length of the music may be longer than the total variation time, longer than some of these variation times, or shorter than the other portions.

(Example 1) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, an effect example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (f) show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. It should be noted that, in the diagrams showing the example effects in chronological order, the passage of time between one diagram and the next diagram does not necessarily match between the diagrams.

  FIG. 56 (a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is executed. Here, Renso means winning a big hit in the promising substation support state. On the other hand, winning a big hit in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is called a first win. Two consecutive villas are to shift to a promising substation support state based on winning in the first win, and to win a big hit in the probable substation support state. In other words, 2 consecutive villas are to win the second big hit from the first win.

  In the state shown in FIG. 56 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4. The currently selected music is “Song 1”. In the present embodiment, the song 1 is set as a song “Acorn Roll”. From the speaker 120, the song “Acorn” is output together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics “Acorn Roller” is displayed in the lyrics display area C. In the present embodiment, the lyrics for each measure are displayed in the lyrics display area C. The lyrics for every two measures may be displayed in the lyrics display area C. In the music selection area B, instead of the character string image of “Song 1”, a character string image representing the title of the music (in this example, a character string image of “Acorn Roller”) may be displayed. The same applies to the music 2 and the like described later. During the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, the lyric display may be displayed or the lyric display may be hidden.

  In addition, in the probable substation support state, the player can perform a music selection operation, and the number of music that can be selected is set according to the number of consecutive games. Only one song, song 1, can be selected in the probable power support state after winning the first win, and two songs, song 1 and song 2, can be selected in the probable power support state after two consecutive villas. . Note that the number of songs that can be selected in the probable substation support state after winning the first win may be two or three or more. In addition, the number of songs that can be selected may be increased by one song each time a series is performed, may be increased by two songs, or may be increased by three or more songs.

  FIG. 56 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. The speaker 120 outputs a singing “Korokoro” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 56 (c) shows a state in which one special figure 2 hold is consumed and the next special figure 2 variable game is started. The number of holds in the special figure 2 is decreased by 1 to 3. Further, the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probable substation support state is 79 times. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the main control unit 300 makes a determination of success / failure by referring to a determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of sync. And “Special Figure d” is selected as the off symbol. In the present embodiment, the special symbol 2 has only one special symbol “special diagram d”. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is wrong, it is uniquely “special diagram d”. Is selected. Next, the main control unit 300 executes a lottery process with reference to a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, for example, 1 second. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a lottery process using an effect lottery table (not shown) stored in the ROM 406, and performs a reach effect and a special feature being executed. It decides not to execute the notice effect of the figure variation game.

  FIG. 56 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 56 (e) shows a state in which one special figure 2 hold is consumed and the next special figure 2 variable game is started. The number of holds in the special figure 2 is decreased by 1 to 2. Further, the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probable substation support state is 78 times. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. From the speaker 120, the song “Come on” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Further, prior to the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the main control unit 300 makes a determination of success / failure by referring to a determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of sync. And “Special Figure d” is selected as the off symbol. Next, the main control unit 300 executes a lottery process with reference to a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM 306, and determines the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, for example, 1 second. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, performs a lottery process using an effect lottery table (not shown) stored in the ROM 406, and performs a reach effect and a special feature being executed. It decides not to execute the notice effect of the figure variation game.

  FIG. 56 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Come on now” to “Dome comes out”. From the speaker 120, the song “Dojoga” is output together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in Production Example 1 of the present embodiment, music including a song is output from the speaker 120, and lyrics corresponding to the song are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, Production Example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 56 (g) to (l) show production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 56G to 56J are the states shown in FIGS. 56A to 56D, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 (k) shows a state where the third measure (measure “Additional pond”) of the song “Dongori Koroko” has been completed and the next measure (measure “Just” ”) has been completed. Show. In the lyrics display area C, the lyrics “Saitai” is displayed, but at the time shown in FIG. 56 (k), the singing of the fourth measure has not yet started, and only the accompaniment is output from the speaker 120. ing. In this way, when the measure of the music advances to the next, the lyrics display may be switched before the singing of the next measure is started. In addition, the switching of the lyric display when proceeding to the next measure may be performed simultaneously with the start of the singing of the next measure or after the start of the singing.

  FIG. 56 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is finished. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the singing of the fourth measure of the song “Donguri Korokoro” has started, and the song “Saitai” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  As described above, in the production example 2 of this embodiment, when the music advances to the next measure, the lyrics display of the next measure is started before the singing of the next measure is started.

(Example 2) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 57 (a)-(e). FIGS. 57A to 57E show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is executed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 4. The currently selected music is “Acorn Roller” of “Song 1”. From the speaker 120, the song “Acorn” is output together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics “Acorn Roller” is displayed in the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 57 (b) shows a state in which a notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. The speaker 120 outputs a singing “Korokoro” along with the accompaniment. Prior to the start of the notice effect, a continuous notice including a countdown display until the notice effect is started may be executed in the effect display area 208d. In the notice effect of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a balloon image including a character string image of “Enemy?” As a word of Yoshimune.

  FIG. 57C shows a state in which the notice effect is continued, and the effect display area 208d includes a balloon including a character string image “??” instead of a character image image “??”. An image is displayed. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 57 (d) shows a state in which the notice effect ends without developing and an animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 57 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. From the speaker 120, the song “Come on” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, the lyrics display is continued even during the execution of the announcement production.

  Next, an effect example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (f) to (j) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 57 (f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 57 (g) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. Prior to the start of the notice effect, a continuous notice including a countdown display until the notice effect is started may be executed in the effect display area 208d. The countdown display is the same as the countdown display displayed prior to the start of the notice effect shown in FIG. In the notice effect of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a balloon image including a character string image of “Enemy?” As a word of Yoshimune. The character image and balloon image of Yoshimune displayed in the effect display area 208d in the notice effect of this example are the same as the character image and balloon image of Yoshimune displayed in the notice effect shown in FIG.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of notice effects, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are erased while the notice effects of this example are being executed. Note that a lyrics display may be displayed during execution of a notice effect different from the notice effect of the present example. The erasing timing of the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display may be at the start of the countdown display described above, may be during the display of the countdown display, or may be at the start of the notice effect. It may be after the start of the notice effect. Also, if the lyrics display is erased during the notice effect, there is a higher probability that it will develop into a super reach effect, and the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed is higher. . In addition, the music output from the speaker 120 continues as it is even after the lyric display area C and the lyric display are erased, and the singing “Korokoro” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 57 (h) shows a state in which the notice effect is continued. In the effect display area 208d, instead of the animation of Yoshimune who found the enemy and the character string image of “Enemy?” A balloon image including the character string image “is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. In addition, the lyric display area C and the lyric display are maintained in an erased state.

  FIG. 57 (i) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into a super reach A effect. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a manner that swings up and down (hereinafter referred to as “fluctuation variation display”), and the variation display of the ornament symbol is reached. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has started.

  On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of Super Reach A in place of the music “Donguri Korokoro”. The timing at which the song selection area B is erased and the output of the song “Acorn Roller” from the speaker 120 is interrupted may be at the same time as the start of the super reach production, or the song “Acorn” immediately after the start of the super reach production. It may be at the end of one measure of "Korokoro". In addition, the music selection operation is impossible during the period in which the music selection area B is not displayed. Thus, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is erased and the music selection operation becomes impossible.

  FIG. 57 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. If the result of the special figure variation game is out of place, after the animation of the scene where Yoshimune loses to the enemy in the Super Reach A production is displayed in the production display area 208d, the Super Reach A production ends and the symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, a decorative pattern of the combination at the time of deviation is displayed.

  Also, the output of the interrupted song “Donguri Koro” has been resumed, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics of “Dojo is coming out”. From the speaker 120, the song “Dojo” is displayed along with the accompaniment. Is output. In this example, the song “Acorn Roller” is restarted at the same time as the end of the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the output restart timing of the song “Acorn Roller” may be the decorative symbol stop display period, or may be the start of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the next special symbol variable game, It may be simultaneously with the end of the production of Super Reach A.

  Also, in this example, the music is progressing internally even when the output of the music “Acorn Roller” is being interrupted, and the output of the music is resumed from where it has progressed internally. In this example, while the output is interrupted, the music progresses internally and the measures of “Fill in the pond” and “Now,” have ended, and the song has started from the beginning of the measure of “Dojo comes out”. Output has been resumed. Note that the music may be resumed from the point where the output was interrupted, from the beginning of the measure when the output was interrupted, or from the measure following the measure when the output was interrupted. Good.

  As described above, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, the output of the selected music and the display of the lyrics are interrupted during the execution of the super reach production.

(Example 3) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using Fig.58 (a)-(e). FIGS. 58A to 58E show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  58 (a) to 58 (c) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 57 (f) to 57 (h), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 58D shows a state in which the effect of super reach A is started. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that super reach A has started.

  On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a music for Super Reach A in place of the music “Acorn Roll”. In the present embodiment, “Snow and Konko” of nursery rhymes is set as the music exclusively for Super Reach A. From the speaker 120, the singing “Yukiya” is output together with the accompaniment. As described above, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is deleted. When the super reach production is started, the lyrics display may be deleted.

  In this example, a song with relatively long one-bar lyrics, such as the song “Donguri Korokoro”, displays the lyrics for each bar, and a relative one-bar lyrics, such as the song “Yukiya Konko”. For short songs, lyrics are displayed every two bars. As shown in FIG. 58 (d), when lyrics are displayed every two bars, a space is provided between the bars of the lyrics, and “Yuki and Konko” is displayed in the lyrics display area C. Moreover, the lyrics display of the music only for super reach may be displayed without being hidden by a button image, a cut-in image, or a movable body, which will be described later. For example, the lyrics display of the music for exclusive use by Super Reach may be hidden by being displayed at a position that does not overlap the button image or the movable body. In addition, the lyrics display of music for exclusive use of Super Reach is hidden by a button image, cut-in image, and movable body, which will be described later, and the lyrics display of music that can be selected by the player (for example, “Acorn Roller”) The cut-in image may be displayed without being hidden by the movable body.

  FIG. 58 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. If the result of the special figure variation game is out of place, after the animation of the scene where Yoshimune loses to the enemy in the Super Reach A production is displayed in the production display area 208d, the Super Reach A production ends and the symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, a decorative pattern of the combination at the time of deviation is displayed.

  Also, the output of the interrupted music “Donguri Koro” has been resumed, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics of “Addition to Oike”. "Fucked" is output. In this example, the song “Acorn Roller” is restarted at the same time as the end of the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the restart timing of the song “Acorn Roller” may be the stop display period of the decorative symbol, the start of the decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the next special symbol variable game, or the supermarket. It may be simultaneously with the end of the reach production.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 may execute the effect by causing the frame lamp 122 or the game board lamp 532 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode that matches the output of the music. For example, these lamps may emit light in a light-emitting manner that matches the melody of the song “Donguri Korokoro”, and the performance may be executed. As in this example, when the output of the song “Acorn Roller” is interrupted from the speaker 120 due to the start of the super reach effect, the effect by the light emission of the lamp that matches the melody of the song “Acorn Roller” is also possible. These lamps are interrupted, and these lamps are lit in a light-emitting manner in accordance with the melody of the musical piece “Snow and Konko” for super reach production. In addition, the production by the lamp lighting in accordance with the song “Acorn Roller” progressed without interruption internally, and progressed internally when the output of the song “Acorn Roller” was resumed from the speaker 120. It may be resumed from. Thus, the sound effect and the light emission effect corresponding to the sound can be executed before and after the music is interrupted. It should be noted that the effect by the lamp emission corresponding to the song “Acorn Roller” may be interrupted internally, and may be resumed from where it was interrupted when the output of the song “Acorn Roller” was resumed from the speaker 120. Thereby, before and after the interruption of the music, there may be a case where the effect of the sound and the effect of the light emission corresponding to the sound are shifted and the effect is changed so that the player is not bored with the effect.

  In this example, the song “Acorn Roller” is resumed from where it was interrupted. As shown in FIG. 58 (c), since it ends at the end of the measure of “Donbrico”, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), from “Addition to the pond” next to the measure of “Donbrico”. Has been resumed. If the song “Acorn Roller” is interrupted at the end of the song “Donbuco” in “Donbrico”, the song “Rico” in the measure of “Donbrico” may be resumed. As described above, when the music is interrupted in the middle of the measure, the music may be resumed from the middle of the interrupted measure. Also, if the music that can be selected by the player (in this example, the nursery rhyme “Donguri Korokoro” of song 1) is interrupted, even if the music is resumed from the beginning of No. 2 of that music (the nursery rhyme “Dongorokoro”) Alternatively, the output of another song that can be selected by the player (for example, song 2 (song “Sakura Sakura”)) may be started.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (f) to 58 (i) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 58 (f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 58 (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 58 (g), the song “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next measure, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Konko” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 58 (h) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is being executed while the super reach effect is being executed. In this example, the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the cut-in image on the entire surface of the effect display area 208d. The cut-in image of this example is composed of a character image of Yoshimune and a balloon image including a character string image of “game! Further, when the cut-in image of this example is displayed, the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are deleted. Thereby, during the execution of the cut-in effect, the lyrics display of the music is erased and interrupted. In addition, the song “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next measure, and the song “Aya” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 58 (i) shows a state where an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune and the enemy slash is displayed in the effect display area 208d after the cut-in image is erased and the cut-in effect ends. Also, the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are displayed, and the lyrics display is resumed. The lyric display may be resumed at the same time as the cut-in image is erased or after the cut-in image is erased. Also, the song “Yukiya Konko” advances to the next measure, and the song “Konko” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, when the production display such as the cut-in image is displayed, the lyrics display is not displayed.

(Example 4) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, an effect example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 59A to 59E show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows a state in which an operation effective period (operation reception period during which an operation is accepted) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid during the execution of the notice effect is started. Prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, an image imitating the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and an image having a relatively small display size (hereinafter referred to as a “mini button image”). 800 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The mini button image 800 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  The mini button image 800 is displayed so as to overlap at least part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the mini button image 800 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden by the mini button image 800. As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the lower half of the mini button image 800 is displayed so as to overlap the upper center portion of the lyrics display area C, and the upper part of the “mumble” of the lyrics “Donbrico” is displayed by the mini button image 800. Hidden and invisible.

  FIG. 59D shows a state in which an effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 (single pressing) during the operation effective period is being executed. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the mini button image 800 is deleted. Further, in this example, based on the single press of the chance button 136 during the operation effective period, an effect that suggests whether or not the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect is executed. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the effect is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “??” is displayed instead of the character string image of “Is it an enemy?”, Suggesting that the notice effect does not develop into a super reach effect. Production is being performed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 59 (e) shows a state in which the notice effect ends without developing and an animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. From the speaker 120, the song “Come on” is output along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, when the production display of the mini button image 800 is displayed, the mini button image 800 and a part of the lyrics display are displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (f) to (j) show production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in chronological order.

  The states shown in FIGS. 59 (f) and (g) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 59 (h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, an image simulating the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and having a relatively large display size (hereinafter referred to as a “deca button image”). ) 802 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. It should be noted that the display of the big button image 802 may be started simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be started after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  The big button image 802 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the deca button image 802 is displayed in front of the lyric display in the lyric display area C, a part of the lyric display in the lyric display area C is hidden by the deca button image 802. As shown in FIG. 59 (h), the lower part of the deca button image 802 is displayed so as to overlap the central portion of the lyrics display area C, and the entire lyrics “Donbrico” is hidden by the deca button image 802 and becomes invisible.

  When the deca button image 802 is displayed, it is more likely to develop into a super reach effect than when the mini button image 800 is displayed, and it is more likely to win a big win in the special figure variation game being executed. It has become. In other words, the big hit reliability of the big button image 802 is set to be higher than the big hit reliability of the mini button image 800. As described above, the image having a larger display size among a plurality of types of images simulating the chance button 136 may be set so that the big hit reliability becomes higher. Further, the decabutton image 802 has a higher ratio of hiding the lyrics display than the minibutton image 800. As described above, an image in which the big hit reliability is set to be relatively high may have a larger area overlapping the lyric display than an image in which the big hit reliability is set to be relatively low.

  FIG. 59 (i) shows a state in which an effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the deca button image 802 is deleted. Further, in this example, based on the single press of the chance button 136 during the operation effective period, an effect that suggests whether or not the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect is executed. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the effect is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “discovery” is displayed instead of the character string image of “enemy?”, And an effect suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. Is running. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 59 (j) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into a super reach A effect. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has started. On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of Super Reach A in place of the music “Donguri Korokoro”. As described above, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is deleted.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, when the production display of the deca button image 802 is displayed, the deca button image 802 and the entire lyrics display are displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Further, when an image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed, an effect image may be displayed so as to surround the image. The larger the display size of the image imitating the chance button 136, the larger the display size of the effect image. Further, the effect image may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the lyrics display. For example, the effect image surrounding the big button image 802 may have a higher ratio of hiding the lyrics display than the effect image surrounding the mini button image 800. The reverse is also possible. In addition, the visibility of the lyrics display decreases as the ratio of the hidden lyrics increases. Further, the transmittance of the effect image may be 0% or may be larger than 0% (for example, 50%).

(Example 5) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, an effect example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 60A to 60E show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIGS. 60A and 60B show a state in which the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B are being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 60A, a movable body 804 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 804 has a vertically-long rectangular flat plate shape, and is labeled “Yoshimune” on the surface. The movable body 804 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor and is guided in a guide groove (not shown), and can move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen. It is. In the state shown in FIG. 60A, the movable body 804 is located at the initial position. The drive control of the movable body 804 may be executed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500. The movable body 804 may be driven by a link mechanism.

  FIG. 60C shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, an image simulating the chance button 136 in the effect display area 208d and having an intermediate display size (hereinafter referred to as “button image”). 806 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  Also, the button image 806 in this example is not displayed overlapping the lyrics display area C, unlike the mini button image 800 shown in FIG. 59 (c) and the deca button image 802 shown in 14 (h). Thus, depending on the type of image imitating the chance button 136, it may be displayed overlapping the lyric display or may not be displayed overlapping the lyric display.

  FIG. 60D shows a state in which an effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the button image 806 is deleted. In this example, the movable body 804 moves leftward from the initial position based on the single press of the chance button 136 during the operation effective period. When the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the movable body 804 does not move from the initial position. The movable body 804 is stopped approximately at the center of the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The position indicated by the dotted line on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 60D is the initial position of the movable body 804, and the movable body 804 can move the range of the position in FIG. 60D from the initial position. is there. Further, during the operation valid period, the player may be required to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 or press the button for a long time. In this case, the operation effect of the movable body 804 is executed only when the player executes the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 or the long press of the button. Similarly, the player may be required to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 or press and hold the button during the operation valid period when the mini button image 800 or the big button image 802 is displayed. In this case, the cut-in effect and the notice effect are executed only when the player performs a continuous hit of the chance button 136 or a long button press.

  Further, when the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display, the button image 806 is erased when the chance button 136 is pressed once, and the entire lyrics display becomes invisible. After that, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the movable body 806 by the movement of the movable body 806. As described above, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where a part of the lyric display is hidden, a period in which the entire lyric display can be visually recognized may be provided.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “discovery” is displayed instead of the character string image of “Is it an enemy?”, Suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. From the speaker 120, the singing “Fill in the pond” is output together with the accompaniment.

  In addition, since the movable body 804 has moved to substantially the center of the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden. In this example, part of the “pond” and the entire “Hama” are hidden in the lyrics “addicted to the pond”. The movable body 804 may have a width equal to or greater than the width of the lyrics display area C, and the entire lyrics display may be hidden by the movable body 804. As described above, in this example, at least a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the operation effect of the movable body 804 that is executed based on the pressing of the chance button 136. Moreover, since the movable body 804 moved toward the left, the lyrics displayed from the right are hidden by the movable body 804 from the rear side. In addition, when the movable body 804 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 804 moves toward the right side, the lyrics displayed from the right are hidden by the movable body 804 from the front side. . Further, when the movable body 804 is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves upward, the movable body 804 is hidden by the movable body 804 from the lower side of the horizontally displayed lyric display, and the movable body 804 is hidden by the decorative symbol display device. When it is arranged above 208 and moves downward, it is hidden by the movable body 804 from the upper side of the horizontally displayed lyric display. Thus, the direction in which the lyrics display starts to be hidden differs depending on the arrangement position and the moving direction of the movable body 804 at the initial position.

  FIG. 60 (e) shows a state in which the notice effect has evolved into a super reach A effect. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. In addition, a character string image of “SP reach A” is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the effect of super reach A has started. On the condition that the super reach production is started, the music selection area B is deleted, and the output of the music “Acorn Roller” being selected from the speaker 120 is interrupted. The speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of Super Reach A in place of the music “Donguri Korokoro”. Further, the movable body 804 moves rightward and returns to the initial position. As described above, when the super reach effect is started, the music selection area B is deleted.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the operation production of the movable body 804 that is executed based on the operation of the chance button 136.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 (f) to (i) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIGS. 60F and 60G show a state in which the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B are being executed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 60F, a movable body 808 is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 808 has a circular shape, and has a family crest (for example, a trefoil) pattern on the surface. The movable body 808 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor and guided in a guide groove (not shown) to move in the vertical direction on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen. Is possible. The drive control of the movable body 808 may be executed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

  In the state shown in FIG. 60F, the movable body 808 is located at the initial position. In the state where the movable body 808 is located at the initial position, approximately 2/3 of the upper part is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and approximately 1/3 of the lower part is disposed on the decorative symbol display device. It is located below the display screen 208 and behind the stage 244 shown in FIG. 48 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 60F and 60G, the movable body 808 overlaps the central portion of the lyrics display area C and the central portion of the lyrics display area C is hidden. The display is displayed so as not to be hidden by the movable body 808. For example, the lyric display area C of this example is provided horizontally longer than the examples shown in FIGS. 60A to 60E, and the lyrics “Acorn” is displayed on the left side of the lyric display area C and overlaps the movable body 808. A predetermined space is provided in the part, and the lyrics “Korokoro” is displayed on the right side of the lyrics display area C. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the entire lyrics display.

  FIG. 60 (h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, a button image 806 is displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. The lyrics “Donbu” is displayed on the left side of the lyrics display area C, a predetermined space is provided in a portion overlapping the movable body 808, and the lyrics “Rico” is displayed on the right side of the lyrics display area C. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the entire lyrics display. Also, the speaker 120 outputs a singing “Donbrico” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 60 (i) shows a state in which an effect is executed based on the chance button 136 being pressed (single press) during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period of this example, a single press of pressing the chance button 136 only once is requested, and the operation effective period of this example ends when the chance button 136 is pressed once. When the chance button 136 is pressed once, the button image 806 is deleted. Also, in this example, a horizontally-long rectangular (band-like) cut-in image 810 is displayed in the effect display area 208d when the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. The cut-in image 810 includes a character string image “CHANCE !!” at the center. When the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the cut-in image 810 is not displayed.

  In addition, in the effect display area 208d, a balloon image including a character string image of “discovery” is displayed instead of the character string image of “Is it an enemy?”, Suggesting that the notice effect is developed into a super reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. The cut-in image 810 is displayed in front of the lyrics display area C, and is displayed so as to overlap the upper half of the lyrics display area C. Thereby, a part of the lyric display is hidden in the cut-in image, so that the lyric display is difficult or impossible to read. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the production display of the cut-in image 810 displayed based on the operation of the chance button 136.

(Example 6) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 61 (a)-(f). FIGS. 61A to 61F show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the first special figure 2 variable game started after the end of the big hit game of the second consecutive resort is executed, as in FIG. 56 (a). In this example, the lyrics display can be switched on and off by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137. When the lyric display is on, the lyric display is displayed in the lyric display area C, and when the lyric display is off, the lyric display end area C is not displayed and the lyric display is not displayed. In addition, if the upper or lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed when the lyric display is on, the lyric display is switched to the off state. If the lyric display is off, the upper of the setting operation unit 137 is displayed. When the button or the down button is pressed, the lyrics display is switched on. In the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, a lyric display switching notification image 812 including a horizontally-long rectangular frame image and a character string image of “Lyrics ON / OFF with up / down button” displayed in the frame image is displayed. Then, the player is informed that the lyrics display can be switched on and off by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137.

  In this example, since the lyrics display is set to the on state, the lyrics of “Acorn Roller” are displayed in the lyrics display area C. In addition, a song “Acorn” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  The on / off switching operation of the lyrics display may be possible only during execution of the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the lyrics display switching notification image 812 is not displayed while the super reach effect is being executed, but the on / off switching operation of the lyrics display is enabled, and the lyrics display during the super reach effect is turned on, The result of the off-switching operation may be reflected after the end of the super reach production. For example, the super reach effect is started with the lyrics display turned off, and the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is displayed while the super reach effect is being executed and the lyrics display switching notification image 812 is not displayed. When pressed, the lyrics display is switched on. Since the lyrics display is not displayed during execution of the super reach effect, the result of the on / off switching operation of the lyrics display is reflected in the display after the super reach effect is finished, and the lyrics display is started.

  FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which the notice effect is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. The speaker 120 outputs a singing “Korokoro” along with the accompaniment. Prior to the start of the notice effect, a countdown display until the notice effect starts may be displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the notice effect of this example, an animation in which the character Yoshimune finds an enemy is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a balloon image including a character string image of “Enemy?” As a word of Yoshimune.

  FIG. 61C shows a state in which the notice effect is continued, and the effect display area 208d includes a balloon including a character string image “??” instead of a character image “?”. An image is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Further, when the player presses the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137, the lyrics display is switched to the off state, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are erased.

  FIG. 61 (d) shows a state in which the notice effect ends without developing and an animation in which Yoshimune runs is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the speaker 120 outputs the singing “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 61 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, “Special figure d” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop is displayed. Also, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Come hard” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 61 (f) shows a state in which one special figure 2 hold is consumed and the next special figure 2 variable game is started. The number of holds in the special figure 2 is decreased by 1 to 3. Further, the remaining number of special figure variable games executed in the probable substation support state is 79 times. Further, when the player presses the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137, the lyrics display is switched to the on state, and the lyrics display area C and the lyrics display are displayed. The song “Donguri Korokoro” has advanced to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C have been switched from “Now it ’s hard” to “Dome comes out”. From the speaker 120, the song “Dojoga” is output together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 1 of the present embodiment, the lyrics display can be switched on / off by the operation of the setting operation unit 137.

  Next, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 61 (g) to 61 (j) show production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in this order in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (g), in this example, the lyrics display is set to off. For this reason, the lyrics display area C is not displayed, and the lyrics display is not displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 61 (g) and (h) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and (b) except for the presence / absence of lyrics display.

  FIG. 61 (i) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, a button image 806 is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The button image 806 may be displayed at the same time as the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, or may be displayed after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the song “Donbrico” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 61 (j) shows a state in which the lyrics display is switched to the on state by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 while the button image 806 is displayed. The lyrics display area C is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the lyrics display is displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next bar, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics “Addition to Pond”, and the speaker 120 outputs the song “Addition to Pond” along with the accompaniment. Has been.

  In this example, a part of the lyrics display area C is displayed so as to overlap the button image 806. Since the button image 806 is displayed in front of the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is hidden by the button image 806. In this example, the upper part of “Hama” of the lyrics “Fill in the pond” overlaps the button image 806 and is hidden.

  Thus, depending on the timing at which the lyrics display is switched on, a part of the lyrics display may be hidden when the display of the lyrics display is started. For example, when the timing when the lyrics display is started overlaps with the timing when the cut-in image 810 is displayed, or when the movable body 804 moves to the position shown in FIG. A part of the lyric display may be hidden by the cut-in image 810 or the movable body 804.

(Example 7) Next, the effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 62 (a)-(e). FIGS. 62A to 62E show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  The states shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 62 (c) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during the execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button image 806 is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  The button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the button image 806 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the button image 806. As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the lower part of the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap the central portion of the lyrics display area C, and the upper half or more of the lyrics “Donbrico” is hidden by the deca button image 802. Thereby, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read.

  FIG. 62D shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 is continuously displayed. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. However, since the button image 806 continues to be displayed without changing the display position, the upper part of the lyrics “Add to the pond” of the lyrics “Add to the pond” is hidden by the button image 806. Thereby, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 62E shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is continued because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 is continuously displayed. In addition, the song “Saa Dai” has advanced to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C have been switched from “Still in the Pond” to “Saa Dai”. However, since the button image 806 continues to be displayed without changing the display position, the upper part of the lyrics “Now” is hidden by the button image 806. Thereby, the lyrics display is hidden to the extent that it is difficult to read. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Come on” along with the accompaniment.

  In this way, at least a part of the lyrics display is continuously hidden by the button image 806 in a period in which the chance button 136 is not pressed even when the button image 806 is displayed. Thereby, even when the music advances to the next measure and the lyrics display is switched to the next measure, at least a part of the lyrics display of the next measure may be hidden by the effect display of the button image 806. is there. Further, when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the button image 806 is displayed to switch from the song 1 to the song 2, the lyrics display of the song 2 is hidden by the button image 806 and displayed. May be started.

  Next, Production Example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (f) to (k) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  The states shown in FIGS. 62 (f) and 62 (g) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 62 (h) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started during execution of the notice effect. In this example, prior to the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the button image 806 is displayed below the center of the effect display area 208d, and the remaining operation effective period is below the button image 806 in the effect display area 208d. A gauge image (meter image) 814 indicating the time is displayed. The gauge image 814 has a black horizontally long rectangular shape, and represents the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 as a length. In this example, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are displayed to notify the player that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started. The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Dongkorokoro” to “Donbrico”. From the speaker 120, the song “Donbrico” is output along with the accompaniment.

  In this example, the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. Since the gauge image 814 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the gauge image 814. As shown in FIG. 62 (h), the lower part of the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to overlap the upper center of the lyrics display area C, and the upper part of the lyrics “Donbrico” is hidden by the gauge image 814. The lower part of the gauge image 814 may be displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the lyrics display, and the button image 806 may be displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the lyrics display.

  FIG. 62 (i) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. Further, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation effective period has decreased. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Donbrico” to “Addition to Oike”. In addition, the upper part of “Ikebamama” in the lyrics “Ikegabama” is hidden by the gauge image 814. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Fuck in the Pond” along with the accompaniment.

  During the operation effective period, the gauge image 814 is displayed so as to become shorter from the left to the right. The lyrics are displayed from left to right. For this reason, when the gauge image 814 is shortened, the portion visible from the front side of the lyric display is enlarged, and for example, the singing and the visible portion of the lyric display may coincide with each other. Further, when the music advances to the next measure while the gauge image 814 is shortened and the lyric display is switched to the next measure, the top portion of the lyric display of the next measure becomes visible.

  FIG. 62J shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is continued because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. Further, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation effective period has decreased. In addition, the song “Donguri Korokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Fill in the pond” to “Now hard”. In addition, the upper portion of “Large” in the lyrics “Now” is hidden by the gauge image 814. Further, the speaker 120 outputs the song “Come on” along with the accompaniment.

  FIG. 62 (k) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues because the chance button 136 is not pressed. For this reason, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are continuously displayed. Further, the length of the gauge image 814 is shortened, and it is displayed that the remaining time of the operation effective period has decreased. In addition, the song “Dongkorokoro” advances to the next measure, and the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C are switched from “Come on now” to “Dome comes out”. In addition, the upper part of “Tele come” in the lyrics “Take me out” is hidden by the gauge image 814. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a singing “Doujo comes out” along with the accompaniment.

  Thus, in the production example 2 of the present embodiment, the gauge image 814 displaying the lyrics is displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display.

Example 8 Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the example production 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is demonstrated using FIG. 63 (a)-(c). 63A to 63C show, in this order, production example 1 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  The state shown in FIG. 63 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 56 (a), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 63 (b) shows a state where the player has pressed the right button of the setting operation unit 137 and switched from song 1 to song 2. In the center of the music selection display area B, a music display of “Song 2” is displayed. However, the result of the music selection operation is not reflected, and the lyrics “Acorn Roller” of the song “Acorn Roller” of the song 1 is displayed in the lyrics display area C, and the singing “Korokoro” is accompanied by the accompaniment from the speaker 120. It is output.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows a state in which the lyrics display and output of song 2 are executed, reflecting the result of the song selection operation. In the present embodiment, the song “Sakura Sakura” is set as the song 2. From the speaker 120, the song “Sakura” is output along with the accompaniment, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics of “Sakura Sakura”. The lyrics of the song “Sakura Sakura” are displayed every two bars.

  When the music is switched in this example, the lyrics display is first switched to the lyrics display of the music 2, and then the music output from the speaker 120 is switched from the music 1 to the music 2.

  Next, an effect example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 63D to 63F show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  The states shown in FIGS. 63 (d) and 63 (e) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 63C shows a state in which the result of the music selection operation is reflected, and the song “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. The lyrics display does not reflect the result of the music selection operation, and the lyrics display area C displays the lyrics “Dongbrico” of “Dongkorokoro” of song 1.

  When the music is switched in this example, the music output from the speaker 120 is switched from the music 1 to the music 2, and then the lyrics display is switched to the music 2 lyrics display.

  Next, Production Example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 (g) and 63 (h) show, in this order, production example 2 in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 63 (g) shows a state in which the song selection operation is reflected, and the song “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. The lyrics display in the lyrics display area C is not displayed.

  FIG. 63 (h) shows a state in which the lyric display is switched to the lyric display of song 2. In the lyrics display area C, the lyrics “Sakura Sakura” of the song “Sakura Sakura” are displayed. In addition, the music “Sakura” has advanced to the second measure, and the song “Sakura” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment.

  Thus, at the time of music switching, the lyrics display of the music 2 may be started after the lyrics display of the music 1 is once erased. The lyric display start timing of the song 2 is after the output of the song 2 from the speaker 120 is started, and may be, for example, when the song 2 enters the second measure.

  Next, effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the effect by the modification 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated using Fig.64 (a). In this example, the lower end of the button image 806 is in contact with the upper end of the central portion of the lyrics display area C so that the gauge image 814 is in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C and overlaps the lower part of the lyrics display. It is displayed. As a result, the upper part of the lyrics “Acorn Roller” is displayed between the gauge image 814 and the button image 806. The button image 806 may overlap at least a part of the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 2 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.64 (b). In this example, a horizontally long hold icon display area D is provided below the effect display area 208d. In the hold icon display area D, a maximum of 4 hold icons corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 can be displayed, and a maximum of 4 hold icons corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 can be displayed. A hold icon can be displayed. In addition, a square variation icon display area E is provided on the left side of the hold icon display area D. In the variation icon display area E, an icon corresponding to the digested suspension (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) is displayed.

  In this example, the hold icon 816 of the display pattern of the face pattern of Yoshimune displayed third from the left is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display. A hold icon 816 is displayed in front of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C, and a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the hold icon 816. Thus, the hold icon may be displayed so as to overlap the lyrics display.

  The hold icon 816 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of the special figure variable game held third. Since the display size of the hold icon for prefetching notice is larger than the display size of the default circular hold icon, it overlaps a part of the lyrics display. For this reason, when four or more hold icons for prefetching notices are displayed, the lyrics display may be hidden by the hold icon for prefetching notices so that it is difficult to read. Further, since the variation icon display area E is arranged at a predetermined interval from the lyrics display area C, the variation icon and the lyrics display do not overlap.

  Next, the effect by the modification 3 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.64 (c), (d). FIGS. 64C and 64D show an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 64C, a princess character image (hereinafter, “princess”) 818 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. Using the princess 818, a hold icon change effect, a pre-reading notice effect, a notice effect of the change, a tutorial effect, a conversation notice display, and the like can be executed.

  FIG. 64C shows a state in which the hold icon change effect is started. The animation in which the princess 818 emits an arrow toward the hold icon to be changed is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon change effect is executed. In this example, a pre-reading notice effect is executed for the special figure 1 variable game with the third holding order. As shown in FIG. 64D, a notice animation in which an arrow flies toward the third hold icon 820 from the left is displayed. In addition, the notice animation and a part of the lyrics display are displayed overlapping each other. Since the notice animation is displayed in front of the lyrics display, a part of the lyrics display is hidden by the notice animation.

  FIG. 64D shows a state in which an arrow has hit the hold icon 820 and the display mode of the hold icon 820 has changed. The display mode of the hold icon 820 has changed from the default circular display mode to the display mode of Yoshimune's face. In this example, the hold icon display area D and the lyrics display area C are arranged with a predetermined interval, so that the changed hold icon 820 is displayed so as not to overlap the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 4 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.64 (e). In this example, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the lyric display is displayed in two upper and lower stages. For example, when a song includes a plurality of parts, the lyrics for each part may be displayed in the upper lyric display area F and the lower lyric display area G. Also, the upper lyric display and the lower lyric display displayed for each part may be different. In addition, only the upper lyric display may be hidden by an effect display such as a cut-in image or a button image or a movable body, or only the lower lyric display may be hidden by an effect display or a movable body such as a cut-in image or a button image. Alternatively, the upper and lower lyric display may be hidden by an effect display such as a cut-in image or a button image or a movable body.

  Next, the effect by the modification 5 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.64 (f), (g). FIG. 64 (f) shows a state in which the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in light ink color. The display mode of the lyrics display area C shown in FIG. 64 (f) is a default display mode.

  FIG. 64G shows a state in which the inside of the lyrics display area C is displayed in red (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure). In this example, the inside of the frame of the lyrics display area C is displayed in red and the notice effect is executed. The colors in the frame of the lyrics display area C are set to, for example, red, green, and blue in descending order of the jackpot reliability. In this way, the jackpot reliability may be indicated in the form of lyric display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 6 of this embodiment is demonstrated using Fig.65 (a). In this example, an error image 822 is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d. The error image 822 of this example displays a lower pan full tank error, and includes a character string image of “please remove the ball”. In the error image 822, the lower plate full sensor detects that the lower plate 128 is full, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information that the lower plate full error has occurred from the main control unit 300. It is displayed based on what you did. Therefore, the error image 822 is not erased unless the lower pan full error is eliminated, more specifically, unless the ball discharge lever 132 is operated.

  The error image 822 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display area C. The lyric display may be hidden by a plurality of types of display such as an effect display such as a button image 806 and an error display such as an error image 822. For example, the display area of the lyrics display may be larger in the effect display than the error display, or vice versa. Further, the effect display may hide the front side of the lyrics display, and the error display may hide the rear side of the lyrics display, or vice versa.

  Next, the effect by the modification 7 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.65 (b)-(d). 65 (b) to 65 (d) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 65 (b) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an animation for notifying that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, a button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed to the left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed to the right of the effect display area 208d. An animation in which the button images 806a and 806b move to the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed.

  FIG. 65C shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. The button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. After the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped, the button introduction animation is ended.

  FIG. 65D shows a state where the button introduction animation is finished and the button image 806 is displayed. After the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap, when the button images 806a and 806b change to the button image 806, the button introduction animation ends.

  The button introduction animation in this example is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display. More specifically, the button images 806a and 806b are displayed without overlapping the lyrics display. On the other hand, the button image 806 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 8 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.65 (e) and (f). FIGS. 65 (e) and (f) show an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  In this modification, a predetermined mission is given to the player, and when the mission is achieved, an image for notifying the mission achievement is displayed. In the mission of this example, the mission achievement condition is, for example, that a predetermined effect display is executed. Mission achievement ranks A, B, and C are assigned in descending order of the jackpot reliability of the predetermined effect display.

  FIG. 65 (e) shows a state in which the mission of rank C has been achieved. A rank C achievement image 824 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The rank C achievement image 824 includes a horizontally-long rectangular frame image and a character string image of “rank C achievement” displayed in the frame image. The rank C achievement image 824 is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 65F shows a state in which the mission of rank A has been achieved. A rank A achievement image 826 is displayed below the rank C achievement image 824 at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The rank A achievement image 826 includes a horizontally-long rectangular frame image and a character string image “Rank A achievement” displayed in the frame image.

  In this example, the rank C achievement image 824 that displays the achievement of the rank C mission that was achieved the first time is displayed without overlapping the lyrics display area C, and the mission achievement of rank A that was achieved the second time is displayed. The rank A achievement image 826 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display area C. As described above, when a plurality of missions are achieved, an effect display for notifying the completion of the mission may be displayed overlapping the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 9 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.65 (g). FIG. 65 (g) shows the timing of singing output from the speaker 120 and the timing of lyrics display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 65 (g) shows the passage of time from left to right, and shows the state of singing output from the speaker 120 on the upper stage and the state of lyrics display on the decorative symbol display device 208 on the lower stage.

  In this example, prior to the singing output, the lyric display “Acorn Roller” is displayed at time t1, and the singing “Acorn Roller” is output at time t2 after the lyric display is started. Also, at time t3, the lyrics display “Acorn Roller” is erased, and the song “Acorn Roller” ends.

  In the second measure of the music, like the first measure, the lyric display “Donbrico” is displayed at time t4 and the singing “Donbrico” is output at time t5 after the lyric display is started. The At time t6, the lyrics display “Donbrico” is erased, and the song “Donbrico” ends.

  In this example, after the display of the lyrics for one measure is started, the singing of the one measure is started. The start timing of lyric display and the start timing of singing output may be simultaneous, or the start timing of lyric display may be later than the start timing of singing output. Further, in this example, the display of the lyrics of the one measure is finished simultaneously with the end of the singing of one measure. In addition, after the end of the singing of one measure, the lyric display of the one measure may end or vice versa. Further, when proceeding to the next measure, the lyric display may be temporarily hidden, or the lyric display of the next one measure after the one measure may be started simultaneously with the end of the display of the one measure.

  FIG. 65 (h) to FIG. 65 (k) are diagrams for explaining effects by the modification 9A of the present embodiment, and show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in this order in time series.

  FIG. 11H shows a state in which a button introduction animation (button production introduction animation, fade-in animation) is started. A button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect display. An animation that moves to the center of the area 208d is displayed.

  Further, in the same figure (i), after the button images 806a and 806b move to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped as shown in the same figure (j). The button introduction animation is finished.

  In this modification, FIGS. 65 (h) to (j) show a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. In this modification, the period from the start of the button introduction animation (FIG. (H)) to the end of the button introduction animation (FIG. (J)) is when the chance button 136 is operated. Even if it exists, the operation is not accepted as an effective operation.

  In addition, the error image 822 from the start of the button introduction animation is displayed (in this example, the lower pan full error is displayed, and the display including the character string image “Pull out sphere” (ball-free display)). Although displayed, the button introduction animation does not overlap the error image 822 (the button introduction animation is not overlapped with the error image 822).

  FIG. 9K shows a state after the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped, and then the button images 806a and 806b are changed to the button image 806 to complete the button introduction animation. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are not overlapped with the error image 822).

  The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  FIG. 65 (l) to FIG. 65 (o) are diagrams for explaining effects by the modification 9B of the present embodiment, and show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification in this order in time series. The modification 9B is an example of “better button effect” than the modification 9A. “Good button effect” means that the effect display displayed when the chance button 136 is operated is higher than the button effect of the modified example 9A, or the expectation degree of the big hit is high. It is easy to produce. Further, even if the effect display displayed when the chance button 136 is operated is the same as the button effect of the modified example 9A, it is an effect that has a high expectation level for the big hit.

  FIG. 65 (l) to FIG. 65 (o) show a state during execution of the “good button introduction animation” that can be expected to be a “good button effect”, as compared with FIG. 65 (h) to (j).

  First, FIG. 1 (l) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. In this case, a button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed in the upper left of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed in the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are displayed. Is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d. For example, a button image 806c with a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806d with a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. Then, an animation in which the button images 806c and 806d move to the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed. In addition, an error image 822 (in this example, a lower pan full error is displayed and a display including a character string image of “please remove the ball” (ball removal display)) is displayed. Then, the error image 822 and part of the button introduction animation do not overlap.

  Further, in FIG. 5 (m), the button images 806a and 806b move to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806c and 806d move to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d, for example, at the same timing. Moving. At this timing, a part of the button introduction animation (in this example, the button images 806 c and 806 d are overlapped with the error image 822.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9 (n), the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped, and the button images 806c and 806d are completely overlapped with each other, for example, at the same timing (the button images 806a and 806b are also completely overlapped). The button introduction animation is terminated after the state is reached.

  In FIG. 5 (o), after the button images 806a, 806b, 806c, and 806d are completely overlapped, the button images 806a, 806b, 806c, and 806d change to a large button image (deca button image) 806 ′, and the button introduction animation is changed. This is the state after finishing. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, and a large button image 806 ′ and a gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the large button image 806 ′ nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (neither the large button image 806 ′ nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822).

  The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the large button image 806 ′ and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  In this modified example, a large button image 806 ′ and a gauge image 814 are always displayed after the button introduction animation is finished, and the button effect is executed. However, even if the button effect is included, Good. In the case of a configuration including a Gase button effect, the “good button introduction animation” may be easier to achieve the button effect than the “button introduction animation” of the modified example 9A, and instead of this, or in addition to this The configuration may be such that a “good button effect” can be expected when the button effect is established.

  Note that neither the button image 806 of the modified example 9A (FIG. 65 (k)) nor the big button image 806 ′ of the modified example 9B (FIG. 65 (o)) overlaps with the error display 822, but the modified example 9A and modified example 9A. Only in the case of one of the production examples in Example 9B, some display (for example, the button image 806, the big button image 806 ′, the gauge image 814, etc.) may be configured to overlap the error display 822.

  Note that each of the button images 806, 806a to 806d and the large button image 806 ′ shown in FIG. 65 may be one of the images imitating the operation means.

  FIG. 65 (p) to FIG. 65 (r) are diagrams for explaining effects by the modification 9C of this embodiment, and show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in this order in time series.

  FIG. 5 (p) shows a state where the button introduction animation is finished and the button effect is started. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are not overlapped with the error image 822).

  FIG. 6 (q) shows a state after the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (FIG. (P)), and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are not displayed. Thus, another effect image (in this example, a cut-in image of a character (dono)) is displayed. Further, the error image 822 is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 7 (r) shows a state in which “better performance” is executed than in FIG. 6 (q). For example, a cut-in image of a character (donor) larger than FIG. 7 (r) is displayed. ing. The “good performance” is an effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot, and the image (r) of FIG. (Q)) is displayed after the effect image (the cut-in image of the small character (dono))) is displayed. After the effect image (the cut-in image of the large character (donor)) is displayed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed.

  In addition, in the “good effect” shown in FIG. 7 (r), the effect image (the cut-in image of the large character (donor)) is overlapped with the error image 822. Note that, in this example, only the case of (r) in the same figure (r) and (q) in the same figure (q) is configured to overlap the error image 822. In the case of (r) in the figure (in the case of “good production”), the area overlapping with the error image 822 is larger than in the case of (q) in the figure (production having a lower degree of big hit expectation than “good production”). In the case of (r) in the figure (in the case of “good performance”), the error image 822 is 100% overlapped (always overlaps), but in the case of FIG. The effect that the expectation degree of jackpot is lower than the effect))) may be configured such that the error image 822 overlaps with 0% (no overlap).

  Next, the effect by the modification 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG. 66 (a)-(c). 66 (a) to 66 (c) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the lyrics display area C of this example is displayed above the center of the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 66 (a), the button introduction animation is started to be displayed. In the button introduction animation of this example, a button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the upper left of the effect display area 208d, and a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed at the upper right of the effect display area 208d. An animation in which the button images 806a and 806b move below the center of the effect display area 208d is displayed.

  FIG. 66B shows a state in which the button introduction animation is being executed. The button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. Further, the button images 806a and 806b are displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 66C shows a state in which the button introduction animation is finished and the button image 806 is displayed. After the button images 806a and 806b completely overlap, when the button images 806a and 806b change to the button image 806, the button introduction animation ends.

  The button introduction animation in this example is not displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display in the entire display period, but is displayed so as to overlap a part of the lyrics display in the intermediate display period. The button introduction animation in this example is displayed so that the lyrics display is hidden in the middle of the display, instead of hiding the lyrics display at the beginning. Further, the button image 806 displayed after the button introduction animation ends is displayed so as not to overlap the lyrics display.

  Next, the effect by the modification 11 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIG.66 (d), (e). 66 (d) and 66 (e) show an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 66D shows a state in which the effect of super reach A is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner, and the ornamental symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the effect display area 208d, a character image of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side, an enemy character image is displayed on the right side, and an animation of a scene where Yoshimune and the enemy face each other is displayed. Further, the music selection area B is not displayed during execution of the super reach effect.

  Further, during the production of Super Reach A in this example, the music “Snow and Konko” is output from the speaker 120. A song “Yukiya” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment, and the lyrics “Yukiya Konko” is displayed in the lyrics display area C.

  FIG. 66 (e) shows a state in which the song “Snow and Konko” has advanced to the second measure during the production of Super Reach A. In the second measure of “Snow and Konko”, the lyrics display area C is deleted, and instead, a cut-in image 824 including the lyrics display “Konko” is displayed. The cut-out image 824 has a mode in which lyrics are displayed in a horizontally-long rectangular frame image inclined to the upper right. In addition, the song “Konko” is output from the speaker 120 together with the accompaniment. Note that the cut-in image 824 including the lyric display may be displayed including the entire lyrics of the one measure in the whole of one measure, or may include a part of the lyrics of the one measure as part of the one measure. It may be displayed, or may be displayed including a plurality of measures including the entire lyrics of the plurality of measures. Further, the cut-in image 824 may be displayed as a notice effect, and the big hit reliability may be set by the character color of the lyrics display or the color in the frame image.

  66 (f) to 66 (k) are diagrams for explaining the effects of the modification 10A of the present embodiment, and FIGS. 66 (l) to 66 (m) are of the modification 10B of the present embodiment. FIG. 66 (n) to FIG. 66 (o) are diagrams for explaining the effect, and FIGS. 66 (n) to (o) are diagrams for explaining the effect according to the modification 10C of the present embodiment. 66 (f) to FIG. 66 (o) (modification examples 10A to 10C) have at least a chance button 136 and a cross button 900 as a common configuration. Here, the cross button 900 is a button having at least an upper button 900a, a lower button 900b, a left button 900c, and a right button 900d.

  The left button 900c and the right button 900d are, for example, buttons used mainly for selecting (switching) music output from the speaker 120 during ST (during electric support).

  Further, the upper button 900a and the lower button 900b are buttons used for changing the volume of the sound (music) output from the speaker 120, for example (different from the button for switching the lyrics display on / off state shown in FIG. 61). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 5F, when one of the upper button 900a and the lower button 900b is operated in the volume meter non-display state, the volume meter 901 is displayed. The sound meter 901 is 1-6. For example, every time the upper button 900a is operated, the volume meter 901 increases by one, and every time the lower button 900b is operated, the volume meter 901 decreases by one. Even if the down button 900b is operated when the volume meter 901 is “1”, the volume remains “1”, and when the up button 900b is operated when the volume meter 901 is “6”, the volume “6” is maintained. It remains. Further, when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated in the volume meter non-display state, the volume meter 901 indicating the current volume may be displayed first, or the volume meter 901 always starts from “1”. It may be a configuration. The volume meter 901 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the last operation.

  In the modified examples 10A to 10C, the light amount can be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d. However, at least during ST (during electric support) is assigned to music selection (switching), the light amount is changed in this state. Can not. In addition, the music cannot be selected (switched) during SP reach during ST (during electric support), but the light quantity cannot be changed even in that case. On the other hand, during the big hit, the light amount may be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d. In that case, it is better to change the light amount during the big hit. Further, during the big hit, the light quantity may not be changed with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d.

  Further, the up / down buttons 900a, 900b and / or the left / right buttons 900c, 900d may be used for back button effects. The back button effect refers to an effect in which some effect is performed when the button is operated in a state where there is no operation instruction for the button (there may be another button operation instruction). Here, it may be configured such that a certain effect appears more easily when a button without an operation instruction is operated than when a button with an operation instruction is operated, and it is not a back button effect. There may be an effect that does not appear (for example, a one-shot notification effect).

  Next, each modification will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 66 (f) to 66 (k), an effect produced by the modified example 10A of the present embodiment will be described. 66 (f) to 66 (k) show examples of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to this modification in this order in time series.

  FIG. 66F shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. A button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect display. An animation that moves to the center of the area 208d is displayed. In this state, an error image 822 (in this example, a lower pan full error is displayed and a display including a character string image of “please remove the sphere”) is displayed. There is no overlap.

  In FIG. 5G, the button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. At this timing, the volume meter 901 is displayed by operating the up / down buttons 900a and 900b in FIG. 8F, and notifies that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 continues to be displayed, but does not overlap with the button introduction animation or the volume meter 901.

  In FIG. 11H, the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped. At this timing, a part of the button introduction animation (button images 806a and 806b) is overlapped with the volume meter 901. On the other hand, a part of the button introduction animation (a part of the button images 806 a and 806 b) and the volume meter 901 are not overlapped by the error image 822.

  FIG. 5I shows a state after the button images 806a and 806b are completely overlapped and then the button images 806a and 806b are changed to the button image 806 and the button introduction animation is finished. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively received, and the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed. Further, the volume meter 901 is not displayed, and notifies that the volume cannot be changed. The timing when the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed (first timing) and the timing when the volume meter 901 is not displayed (second timing) may be the same timing, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

After this timing, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. In this example, neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are not overlapped with the error image 822).

  The gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started. Further, the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 may be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be displayed first.

  FIG. 6J shows a state in which, for example, the lower button 900b is operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. FIG. 10K shows that the lower button 900b is operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. As a result, the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are hidden, and another effect image (for example, a notice effect, in this example, a cut-in image of a large character) is displayed as a back button effect. It is in a state. In addition, the volume meter 901 that has been hidden is displayed again to notify that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 continues to be displayed, and a part of the cut-in image is overlapped by the error image 822 and the volume meter 901.

  In this modified example, when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during the button introduction animation, the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed as shown in FIGS. If the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during the button production, the volume meter 901 is displayed again, and the volume can be changed. For example, a cut-in image is displayed as the back button production. The

  Note that when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 6J (within the operation valid period of the chance button 136), the cut-in image as the back button effect shown in FIG. For example, another effect (for example, an effect of displaying the cut-in image shown in FIG. 65 (q)) is executed. In this case, the cut-in image does not overlap with the error image 822 (see FIG. 65 (q)).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 (l) and 66 (m), an effect produced by the modified example 10B of the present embodiment will be described. 66 (l) and 66 (m) show an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 66 (l) shows a state where the button introduction animation is started. A button image 806a having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, a button image 806b having a transmittance of 50% is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d, and the button images 806a and 806b are effect display. An animation that moves to the center of the area 208d is displayed. In this state, an error image 822 (in this example, a lower pan full error is displayed and a display including a character string image of “please remove the sphere”) is displayed. There is no overlap.

  In addition, at this timing, it is notified that the auto button mode is being set by an auto button notification 903 (in this example, “auto button ON” is displayed). The auto button mode is a mode in which an effect that is performed after a button operation is performed without any button operation. For example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to some extent (for example, when it is shortened to about half). The effect performed after the button operation is performed. It is also possible for the player to operate the button while the auto button mode is set. In this case, an effect that is performed after the button is operated is executed. In this case, the auto button mode is canceled. (Although described in Modification 10C, there are some exceptions). The setting method of the auto button mode can be turned on, for example, by long-pressing the button, and can be set from the menu screen as another method.

  In FIG. 5 (m), the button images 806a and 806b have moved to the vicinity of the center of the effect display area 208d. At this timing, the volume meter 901 is displayed when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated in FIG. 1 (l) to notify that the volume can be changed. In addition, it is notified that the auto button is not set by the auto button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the characters “auto button OFF”). At this timing, the error image 822 is continuously displayed, but does not overlap with the button introduction animation or the volume meter 901.

  In this modification, when the up / down buttons 900a and 900b are operated during the button introduction animation, the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed (the back button effect is not executed). Further, the auto button notification 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 (n) and 66 (o), an effect produced by the modified example 10B of the present embodiment will be described. 66 (n) and (o) show an example of effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in this order in chronological order.

  FIG. 66 (n) shows a state after the button introduction animation ends. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively accepted, the button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are displayed, the gauge image 814 is shortened, and the meter starts to decrease. .

  In addition, at this timing, it is notified that the auto button is being set by an auto button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the characters “auto button ON”).

  In this example, the error image 822 is displayed, but neither the button image 806 nor the gauge image 814 overlaps the error image 822 (both the button image 806 and the gauge image 814 are overlapped with the error image 822). Not) Further, the auto button notification 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

  FIG. 10 (o) shows a state after the down button 900b has been operated, for example (n) in the figure, within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. The button image 806 and the gauge image (meter image) 814 are shown in FIG. This is a state in which another effect image (in this example, a cut-in image of a large character (donor)) is displayed as a back button effect. In addition, the volume meter 901 that has been hidden is displayed again to notify that the volume can be changed. The error image 822 continues to be displayed, and a part of the cut-in image is overlapped by the error image 822 and the volume meter 901.

  Further, at this timing, an auto button notification 903 (in this example, the display of the characters “auto button OFF”) notifies that the auto button is being set. The auto button notification 903 overlaps a part of the cut-in image, but the auto button leaving 903 and the error image 822 do not overlap.

  In this modification, a plurality of chance buttons that can be operated are provided (chance buttons 136 and other chance buttons not shown), and chance buttons that are not instructed at the timing shown in FIG. When the chance button (shown) is operated, an effect display (for example, display of a cut-in image of a large character) is performed as a back button effect (notice effect), and the auto button mode is turned off ((o) in FIG. )), When one of the up and down buttons 900a and 900b is operated as shown in the figure (n), the volume meter 901 is displayed and the volume can be changed. ) (For example, display of a cut-in image of a large character), but the auto button mode is turned off. It may be configured so as not et al. The up / down buttons 900a and 900b are buttons used when the auto button mode is turned on / off on the menu screen.

  In addition, in the case of a configuration in which another chance button is provided and the back button effect is executed by operating another chance button, the back button effect is not executed by the operation of the up / down buttons 900a and 900b. May be.

  Note that the configurations described as the up and down buttons 900a and 900b in the modified examples 10A to 10C can be similarly implemented even with the left and right buttons 900c and 900d.

  Further, in each modification in which the error image 822 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 is displayed, a configuration in which only the button introduction animation is overlapped by the error image 822 (for example, FIGS. 65 (m) and (n)). May be applied to the music selection area B shown in FIG. 56 and the like, or the music selection area B shown in FIG. 56 and the like may be overlapped by the error image 822.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example is a so-called singing pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example always outputs music during the super reach production, and displays the lyrics as a telop as shown in FIG. 66 (d), or in the center of the display area as shown in FIG. 66 (e). Display lyrics with a relatively large display size. The lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be hidden by another effect display (for example, the cut-in image 810, the button image 806, etc.) or the movable body 804, etc. Note that the telop display of the lyrics displayed in the lyrics display area C even for the same music is hidden by another effect display or movable body, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 is not hidden by the other effect display or movable body. It may be, or vice versa. Further, the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be hidden by an effect display (for example, the cut-in image 810) displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed. When the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 is hidden, the output of music from the speaker 120 may be continued, or the output of music from the speaker 120 may be interrupted. Further, the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed while displaying the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C. In this case, the start timing of the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C and the start timing of the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be the same or different. The end timing of displaying lyrics in the lyrics display area C and the end timing of displaying lyrics in the cut-in image 824 may be the same or different. In addition, the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C may be displayed in accordance with the singing output from the speaker 120, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed in deviation from the singing output from the speaker 120. Further, the lyrics display in the lyrics display area C may be displayed in a manner shifted from the output of the song from the speaker 120, and the lyrics display in the cut-in image 824 may be displayed together with the output of the song from the speaker 120.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 66 again.
(1) The game table according to this embodiment is
Sound output means (for example, speaker 120);
A game machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

The sound output means can output music (for example, nursery rhyme “Donguri Koro”, nursery rhyme “Yukiya Konko”, song “Sakura Sakura”),
The music includes a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,

  One of the plural types of displays is a display (hereinafter referred to as a “first display”) of lyrics corresponding to the singing (for example, lyrics such as “acorn rolls”).

  One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806, button images 806a and 806b, a cut-in image 810, a gauge image 814, a hold icon 816, Mission achievement notification image such as rank A achievement image 826) (hereinafter referred to as "second display"),

  When the second display is displayed, the second display is configured to overlap at least a part of the first display (for example, FIG. 59 (c), (h), 62 (c)-(e), FIGS. 62 (h)-(k), FIGS. 64 (a), (b), 65 (a), (d), (f), and FIG. 66 (b). ), A game table characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, there is a case where the entertainment of the game can be improved by making the player pay attention to the effect display that is displayed overlapping the lyrics display while enjoying the music output by the sound means.
(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

The game table, wherein the second display is an image imitating the operation means (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806, and button images 806a and 806b).
(3) The gaming machine according to (1),
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

The game table characterized in that the second display is an effect display (for example, a cut-in image 810) displayed after the operation means is operated.
(4) The gaming machine according to (3),

The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated.
(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),

  One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a notice animation (for example, a notice animation of a pending change effect shown in FIG. 64C) (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).

When the third display is displayed, the gaming table is configured so that the third display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),

  A first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 1 variation display);

  A second symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214) capable of executing the second symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 2 variation display);

  A determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination (for example, a special drawing related lottery process (step S229) and a special drawing related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 52);

  The first symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50A) corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure,

The game table characterized in that the second symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50 (b)) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination.
(7) The gaming machine according to (6),
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,

The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.
(8) The gaming machine according to (6) or (7),
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.
(9) The gaming machine according to (8),
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means;

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is capable of controlling the display means.
(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),

  The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).

When the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display, a part of the second display is erased.
(11) operation means (for example, chance button 136);
Sound output means (for example, speaker 120);
A game machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

The sound output means is capable of outputting a song including a song (for example, a nursery rhyme “Dongorokoro”, a nursery rhyme “Yukiya Konko”, a song “Sakura Sakura”),
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,

  One display of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the song (for example, lyrics such as “Acorn Roller”) (hereinafter referred to as “first display”).

  One of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting the operation means to operate (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806, a gauge image 814) (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). And)

  The second display is a display that may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”) (for example, FIG. 59C). 59 (h), 62 (c), 62 (h), 64 (a)),

A gaming table, wherein the second display is erased in accordance with an operation of the operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 59D and 59I).
(12) The gaming machine according to (11) above,

By erasing the second display, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated, so that the entire first display is displayed (for example, FIG. 59D). , See FIG. 59 (i)).
(13) The game stand according to (11) or (12) above,

2. The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display that is erased when the operation valid period of the operation means ends even when the operation means is not operated.
(14) The game stand according to any one of (11) to (13),

The game table characterized in that the second display is a display including an image (for example, a mini button image 800, a deca button image 802, a button image 806) imitating the appearance of the operation means.
(15) The game stand according to any one of (11) to (14) above,

The game machine characterized in that the second display is a display including a character image (for example, a character image of “PUSH !!”) that prompts the operation means to operate.
(16) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (15),

  One display of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the notice effect shown in FIG. 59D or 59I is developed into a super reach effect, Cut-in image 810) (hereinafter referred to as "third display"),

  The second display is a display that is displayed during the operation effective period of the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 59 (d), FIG. 59 (i), and FIG. 60 (i)).

The third display is a display that starts to be displayed in response to an operation of the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 59 (d), FIG. 59 (i), and FIG. 60 (i)). Amusement stand.
(17) The game stand according to any one of (11) to (16) above,

  A first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) capable of executing the first symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 1 variation display);

  A second symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214) capable of executing the second symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol 2 variation display);

  Starting information acquisition means (for example, winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 52) capable of acquiring starting information (for example, special figure 1 starting information, special figure 2 starting information);

NG determination means capable of executing NG determination based on the start information (for example, special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 52)) When,
A first area in which game balls can enter (for example, special figure 1 starting port 230);
A second area (for example, special figure 2 starting port 232) in which a game ball can enter,

  The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring first starting information (for example, special figure 1 starting information) when a game ball enters the first area,

  The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring second starting information (for example, special figure 2 starting information) when a game ball enters the second area,

  The first symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50 (a)) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination based on the first start information.

The second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 50B) corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure based on the second start information. To play.
(18) The gaming machine according to (17) above,
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,

The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.
(19) The game stand according to (17) or (18) above,
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400),
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.
(20) The gaming machine according to (19) above,

  The first control means can control the first symbol display means (for example, see FIG. 49),

  The first control means can control the second symbol display means (for example, see FIG. 49),

The game machine characterized in that the second control means can control the display means (for example, see FIG. 49).
(21) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (20) above,

The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(22) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (16) above,

The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
(23) operation means (for example, chance button 136);
A game machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),

  The display means includes a plurality of types of display (for example, display of lyrics, display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136 of the mini button image 800, the deca button image 802, and the button image 806, the chances shown in FIGS. 96 (b) to 96 (d). An image imitating the button 136, a message “Please select a song”, and an effect selection effect display shown in FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (g) can be displayed.

  One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of lyrics),

  One of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, button introduction animation shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (c) and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b)), and operation of the chance button 136. An animation that warns that the validity period will start)

  One of the plural types of displays is a third display (for example, a button image 806),

  The third display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means, and the second display is a display performed before the display of the third display is started (for example, FIG. ) To (c))

  The second display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means is not accepted,

In some cases, the second display overlaps with at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”) (see, for example, FIG. 66B). A game stand characterized by that.
(24) The game stand according to (23) above,

  The first display is a display of lyrics (for example, display of lyrics of a nursery rhyme “Donguri Koro”),

The game machine characterized in that the second display is a display related to the operation means (for example, a button introduction animation, an animation for notifying that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started). .
(25) The game stand according to (23) or (24) above,

When the second display (for example, button images 806a and 806b having a transmittance of 50%) is displayed in an overlapping manner on the first part, the first part is visible. A game stand characterized by that.
(26) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (25),

The gaming machine is characterized in that an operation of the operating means is accepted during a period in which the third display is displayed (see paragraph “0229”).
(27) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (26) above,

There is no case where the third display overlaps with the first display (see, for example, FIG. 66 (c)).
(28) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (27),

The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is an animation display (for example, a button introduction animation or an animation for notifying that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started).
(29) The game stand according to any one of (23) to (28),

The game table characterized in that the second display is a display in which a plurality of images (for example, button images 806a and 806b) simulating the operation means are displayed.
(30) The gaming table according to any one of (23) to (29) above,

The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a display including an image (for example, a button image 806) simulating the operation means.
(31) The game stand according to any one of (23) to (30) above,
Sound output means (for example, speaker 120),

The game table characterized in that the sound output means is capable of outputting music including singing (for example, nursery rhyme “Donguri Korokoro”, nursery rhyme “Yukiya Konko”, song “Sakura Sakura”, etc.).
(32) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (31) above,

The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
(33) The gaming machine according to any one of (23) to (31) above,

The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 1000).
In the said embodiment, you may comprise as follows.
At the bar break, the lyrics are displayed before the singing output.
There are cases where the lyrics display is hidden or not hidden even in the same effect display.
During super reach production, a song different from the song selected by the player is played.

  The music for the super reach production (for example, the nursery rhyme “Snow and Konko”) may be played only during the super reach production, or may be played other than during the super reach production.

  Moreover, the lyrics display may be displayed and hidden over the cut-in image or the button image only when the music for super-reaching production is reproduced.

  In addition, the lyrics display is hidden by an effect that starts based on the operation of the operating means.

  When the lyric display is switched on / off, the lyric display displayed later may be hidden by the previously displayed button image or cut-in image.

  If the operation timing of the operation means is delayed during the operation valid period, the lyrics display of a plurality of measures and the lyrics display of a plurality of songs are hidden by a button image or the like and cannot be read.

Also, the gauge image (meter image) overlaps the lyrics display, but the lyrics display becomes visible as the gauge decreases.
Moreover, the music should just contain a song, such as a song, a folk song, and a classic.

  In addition, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state, special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state, jackpot gaming state, the music selected by the player is output from the sound output means. May be.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp so far is an example of a light emission means, and a lamp | ramp can be substituted if it emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 67, “a plurality of types of reels 1002 that are rotated and driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 displays a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 68 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.
The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
Sound output means;
A game machine comprising display means,
The sound output means can output music,
The music includes a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,

  One of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the singing (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),

  One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),

When the second display is displayed, the gaming table is configured so that the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
With operating means,

The game table, wherein the second display is an image imitating the operation means.
(Appendix 3)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
With operating means,

The game table characterized in that the second display is an effect display displayed after the operation means is operated.
(Appendix 4)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 3,

The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated.
(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,

  One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a notice animation (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),

When the third display is displayed, the gaming table is configured so that the third display overlaps at least a part of the first display.
(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
A first symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
A determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, and

  The first symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination,

The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.
(Appendix 7)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,

The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.
(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 6 or 7,
A first control means;
A second control means,
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.
(Appendix 9)
The game stand according to appendix 8,
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means;

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is capable of controlling the display means.
(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,

The gaming table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Appendix 11)
Operation means;
Sound output means;
A game stand comprising display means,
The sound output means can output a song including a song,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,

  One of the plurality of types of display is a display of lyrics corresponding to the singing (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),

  One display of the plurality of types of displays is a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).

  The second display is a display that may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),

A gaming table, wherein the second display is erased in response to an operation of the operating means.
(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11,

The gaming table is characterized in that the entire first display is displayed by eliminating the overlap of the second display with the first portion by erasing the second display. .
(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11 or 12,

2. The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display that is erased when the operation valid period of the operation means ends even when the operation means is not operated.
(Appendix 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 13,

The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display including an image imitating an appearance of the operation means.
(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 14,

The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second display is a display including a character image prompting the operation of the operation means.
(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 15,

One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The second display is a display that is displayed during an operation effective period of the operation means,

The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a display that starts to be displayed in response to an operation of the operation means.
(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
A first symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
Starting information acquisition means capable of acquiring starting information;
Correct / incorrect determination means capable of executing correct / incorrect determination based on the starting information;
The first area where game balls can enter,
A second area where game balls can enter,

  The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring first starting information when a game ball enters the first area,

  The starting information acquisition means is means capable of acquiring second starting information when a game ball enters the second area,

  The first symbol variation display is a display that stops and displays a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination based on the first start information,

The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure based on the second start information.
(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to appendix 17,
The display means is capable of executing a decorative display variation display,

The game table according to claim 1, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure.
(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to appendix 17 or 18,
A first control means;
A second control means,
The first control means is means including the success / failure determination means,

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is means capable of executing control in accordance with a command from the first control means.
(Appendix 20)
The gaming machine according to appendix 19,
The first control means can control the first symbol display means,
The first control means can control the second symbol display means;

The game machine characterized in that the second control means is capable of controlling the display means.
(Appendix 21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 20,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix 22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.
(Appendix 23)
Operation means;
A game stand comprising display means,
The display means can display a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second display is a display performed before the display of the third display is started,

  The second display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means is not accepted,

A gaming table, wherein the second display may be displayed in an overlapping manner on at least a part of the first display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”).
(Appendix 24)
The game stand according to appendix 23,
The first display is a display of lyrics,

The game table, wherein the second display is a display related to the operation means.
(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to appendix 23 or 24,

A gaming table, wherein when the second display overlaps and is displayed on the first part, the first part is visible.
(Appendix 26)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 25,

The gaming table, wherein an operation of the operation means is accepted during a period in which the third display is displayed.
(Appendix 27)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 26,

The gaming table, wherein the third display does not overlap with the first display.
(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 27,
The game table, wherein the second display is an animation display.
(Appendix 29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 28,

The gaming table, wherein the second display is a display in which a plurality of images simulating the operation means are displayed.
(Appendix 30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 29,

The game table characterized in that the third display is a display including an image simulating the operation means.
(Appendix 31)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 30,
With sound output means,
The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the sound output means is capable of outputting music including singing.
(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 31,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.
(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 31,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes the first operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate, And a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein the display means can display a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is: 65 is a first display (for example, an introductory animation that can be expected to be a performance that tends to have a high expectation level for big hits, an animation shown in FIG. 65 (l) to FIG. 65 (n)). One of the displays is a second display (for example, an image display that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136, for example, a button image 806 'shown in FIG. 65 (o)). Table of Is a third display (for example, the lyrics shown in FIG. 65 (a) (“Acorn Roller”), the ball removal display 882 shown in FIG. 65 (a), the rank C achievement image 824 in FIG. 65 (e), etc.). The first display is an animation display related to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first animation”), and the second display is an appearance of the first operation means. The third display is a display of the character display, and the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started. May be started, and an image in the first animation displayed in a state where the third display is displayed (for example, an image at a certain timing in the first animation, FIG. 65 (m ), Button images 806c and 8 in FIG. 06d, etc.) are overlapped with the third display.

  It should be noted that other button images displayed after the first display (for example, the button image 806 shown in FIG. 65 (p)) and other animation displays (for example, those with a big hit expectation lower than the first animation) An introductory animation in the case of a production that tends to occur, a second display displayed after the animation shown in FIGS. 65 (h) to 65 (j)), and other button images (for example, displayed after another animation display) One or more of the button images 806) shown in FIG. 65 (k) may be provided, and conversely, one or more of these may not be provided.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where the third display can be focused while enhancing the interest of the player.

  In addition, the third display may be a display that prompts the game ball to be discharged (for example, an error display (ball removal display) 822 shown in FIG. 65).

  Also, sound output means (for example, the speaker 120) and second operation means (for example, the up and down buttons 900a shown in FIGS. 66 (f) and 66 (g)) provided at positions where the player can operate. 900b), and the sound output means is a means capable of outputting an effect sound according to a set volume, and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and among the plurality of types of effects The first effect is the first effect, and the first effect is one effect of the notice effect (for example, the effect of the back button effect, the cut-in image shown in FIG. 65 (k), etc.). The first effect is an effect including a first effect sound, and in the state where the first display is displayed, the operation of the first operation means is not accepted, and While the second display is displayed, The operation of the first operation means is accepted, and when the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first effect is not executed, When the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, the first effect may be executed (for example, FIGS. 65 (p) and (r)). When the second operating means is operated while the first display is displayed, the volume may be changed, and when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed. When the operation means is operated, the volume may be changed. When the second operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the first effect is executed. There may be cases (for example, FIG. 66 (k)).

  The “state in which the first display is displayed” refers to a “state in which the second display is not displayed and a state in which there is no display regarding the second operation means”.

The “state where the second display is displayed” is a “state where the first display is not displayed and a state where there is no display regarding the second operation means”.
In this case, the volume is not changed even if the first operating means is operated.
The production includes at least one of display, sound, and light.

One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display, and the seventh display is a display indicating a volume (for example, a volume meter 901 shown in FIGS. 66 (g), (h), etc.). When the second operating means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the seventh display is displayed (for example, FIG. 66 (g)). ) When the second operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the seventh display is displayed (for example, FIG. 66 (k)),
The sound output means may be means capable of outputting an error sound.

  Note that “the volume may be changed” means that the volume is not necessarily changed by the operation of the second operation means. For example, there may be a case where the player is allowed to change the volume with a switch or the like provided on the back of the gaming machine 100, and there are cases where the change is not allowed. In the first operation of the second operation means, there is a case where only the display indicating the currently set volume (display of the volume meter 901) is performed and the volume is not changed. Further, when the volume meter 901 is already in the maximum state and the second operation means is operated to increase the volume (for example, the upper button 900a), the volume is not changed (for example, the volume is not changed) ( (Only, sure) The volume is not changed.

  According to such a configuration, since the volume can be changed (adjusted) by operating the second operation means during the introduction animation, the button effect starts after the introduction animation ends, and the second operation means is operated. In this case, the first effect may be enjoyed at a volume according to the player's preference.

  Further, the auto button mode can be set, and when the first operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when the auto button mode is on. When the first operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when on, and in the state where the first display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it is not turned off even when the auto button mode is on, and the second operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed. Even if the auto button mode is on, it may not turn off.

  The auto button mode is a mode in which an effect that is performed after a button operation is performed without any button operation. For example, when the gauge image 814 is shortened to some extent (for example, when it is shortened to about half). The effect performed after the button operation is performed. It is also possible for the player to operate the button while the auto button mode is set. In this case, an effect that is performed after the button is operated is executed. In this case, the auto button mode is canceled. (Although described in Modification 10C, there are some exceptions). The setting method of the auto button mode can be turned on, for example, by long-pressing the button, and can be set from the menu screen as another method.

  Further, the auto button mode can be set, and when the first operation means is operated while the first display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when the auto button mode is on. When the first operation means is operated in a state where the second display is displayed, the auto button mode is turned off when on, and in the state where the first display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it is turned off when the auto button mode is on (for example, FIGS. 66 (l) and 66 (m)), and the second display is displayed. When the second operation means is operated, it may be turned off when the auto button mode is turned on (for example, FIGS. 66 (n) and (o)).

  In addition, you may comprise so that it may have a 3rd operation means (chance button different from the chance button 136), and a 1st effect may be performed when a 3rd operation means is operated. In the case of having this configuration, the first effect may not be executed when the second operating means is operated.

  In addition, one display among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a cut-in image 824), the fourth display is one display of a notice display, and the fourth display The one effect may be an effect including the fourth display.

  For example, the first effect may include a cut-in image 824 and sound output from the speaker 120 (for example, singing output).

  One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display (for example, a cut-in image 810), and the fifth display is different from the fourth display of the notice display. May be displayed.

  In addition, one effect among the plurality of effects is a second effect, and the second effect is an effect different from the first effect among the notice effects, The second effect is an effect including a second effect sound (for example, “Snow and Konko” of the song), and the second effect sound and the first effect sound are different effect sounds. Also good.

  One of the plural types of displays is a sixth display (for example, the lyrics shown in FIG. 65 (a) (“Acorn Roller”), rank C achievement image 824 in FIG. 65 (e), etc.) The sixth display may be a display different from the third display in the character display.

  In this case, the sixth display may overlap (do) with the first animation or may not (not) overlap.

  One of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display, and the eighth display is an animation display related to the first operation means different from the first animation ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second animation (for example, an introduction animation of an effect having a lower jackpot expectation than the first animation, animation shown in FIGS. 65 (h) to 65 (j))”. The second animation displayed in a state where the third display is displayed may be configured not to overlap the third display.

Further, the gaming table may be a slot machine, and the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.
[Fourth Embodiment]

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 148, a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100, a revolving game machine such as a sealed game machine or a slot machine). Will be described in detail. 69 to 148 are used only in the description of the fourth embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 69 to 148 are given priority. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function by the lock unit 105 and is configured in a frame shape. Thus, the door member has an opening 116 inside thereof. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, a front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Operation means 700 for performing settings relating to a game (for example, setting of time and setting of effect contents) by operation of the sbutton lamp 138 and a setter (for example, an operator, a game shop clerk, or a player in a manufacturing factory of the pachinko machine 100). (Described later), a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the balance of the player. And a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  70 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 69 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 71 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol. A holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 has a display range in which one small, for example, circular symbol can be displayed, and a fourth symbol display area (not shown in FIG. 71) provided at, for example, the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. (Shown). In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew). In the present embodiment, only one special opening 2 232 is disposed directly below the special figure 1 starting port 230. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. In addition, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is a two-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the payout control unit 600. Also, a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and detection of the shielding device sensor 430 and the chance button The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the unit 724 to the basic circuit 402, the ROM 406 for storing the control program and various effect data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read out. Use the VRAM 436 work area to generate a display image. And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, a drive circuit 517 for performing drive control of the chance button drive unit 708, and the current position of the effect movable body 224. A movable body sensor 424 to be detected, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table A game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the frame lamp 542, and serial communication control for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 The circuit 520 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. Also, the payout control unit 600 receives the detection result of the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106, and outputs the received result to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the types of types of special maps and general drawings that are stopped and displayed by the special map display device 212, the special map display device 214, and the general map display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 73 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. FIG. 73 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 73 (a) shows six types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 73 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is a difference in the special figure variable game after the big hit game, and the probability of winning the big hit is high (probable big hit) or low (normally big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, the state shifts to the electric support state (referred to as a short time state together with the variable time reduction state of the special figure variable game). Although the time-short state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time-short state is referred to as a normal high-probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time-short state is referred to as a normal-low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot game is ended, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a jackpot The game state after the game ends is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (electric support state or short time state). Note that the timing when the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state are reached is the start of the first special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden probability change. Sudden probability change will be in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called latent probability variation. The latent probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latency probability variation state) after the big hit game ends.

  “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state). In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as the “special drawing C” and “special drawing D” (twice in the case of this embodiment). Further, the “special drawing F” is a detachment symbol, which is a symbol that does not release an attacker and has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  In FIG. 73 (b), four types of special figures from “special figure a” to “special figure d” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 2. In FIG. 73 (b), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure a” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol. In both “special chart a” and “special chart b”, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a special chart high probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special drawing a” and “special drawing b” are symbols with which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is entered. The “special drawing d” is an off symbol, the attacker does not release, and the symbol has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 73 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, 16R special big hit, 8R big hit, or 8R special big hit, a combination of symbols (for example, “decorative 1- (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot or the 16R special jackpot is explicitly notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the latent probability change or the small hit, a combination of symbols in which three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” or “decoration 1-decoration 3”). -Decoration 5 ") is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing K” and “special drawing h”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 73C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

  FIG. 73 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 73 (d) as well, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 74 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 72 has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 subsequent to step S201, WDT is set so that the count value of WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 including the above-described inner frame opening sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to detect the detection signal. The presence / absence is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 72 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S205, the door provided in the RAM 308 is monitored for the presence or absence of a door opening detection signal output from the dispensing control unit 600 that has received the detection result from the front frame door opening sensor 107 that detects opening of the front frame door 106. Store in the detection signal state storage area.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then a special figure determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated. The special figure determining random value counter and the common figure winning random value counter for generating the common winning random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure timer number determining random value counter for generating the special figure timer number determining random value for determining the symbol changing time in the special figure changing game or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number value counter for determining the general-purpose timer number for generating the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the general-purpose variable game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 have been won, the value of the number-of-a-number-ball storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole is stored in the RAM 308. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and special figure determination random values in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") is special. 1 is stored in the same number as the number of the special figure 1 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and random number for determination of special figure in the special figure 2 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 start information") 2 is stored as many as the number of the special figure 2 hold stored in the hold number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired from the general figure winning random number counter as the normal winning random number Store in the usual random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (common symbol A shown in FIG. 73 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 73 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal timer number for generating the normal timer number determining random value is obtained as the random number value for determining the normal timer number. Based on the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number, one time for displaying the general-purpose figure on the general-purpose display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal-type variable display time. , It is stored in the usual variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main control unit 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number is provided. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time. Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), which will be described later, the prefetch result information may be transmitted only in increments, or the prefetch result information for all suspensions may be transmitted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 71 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes flags for a 15R big hit flag, a 16R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, an outlier flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and an ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is off and the 16R big hit flag is off FIG. 73 (b) when ON, 8R big hit flag is OFF, 2R big hit flag is OFF, small hit flag is OFF, outlier flag is OFF, special figure probability fluctuation flag is ON, and ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is ON. Special figure a, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability variation flag is on, and Special figure b when the normal probability fluctuation flag is on, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off, 8R big hit flag is on, 2R big hit flag is off Is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure c, 15R big hit flag is off, 16R big hit flag is off 8R big hit flag is off, 2R big hit flag is off, small hit flag is off, outlier flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is off, and normal figure probability variation flag is off As shown, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off, and a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 16R special big hit symbol (special figure a), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure b), the 8R special big hit symbol (special figure c), and the off symbol (special figure). d) Confirm and display one of the symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to an opening / closing solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is also output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (16 rounds or 8 rounds in the present embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short-time state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 are not included in the command data. 15R jackpot flag in the case of a symbol variation stop command, including information indicating the flag value, the flag value of the special symbol probability variation flag, and the flag value of each of the common symbol probability variation flags, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process , 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, outlier flag, special figure probability variation flag value, etc., 15R big hit flag (or 15R special big hit) start command Value, number of big hit rounds, special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, etc. In the case of the 16R special jackpot start command, the value of the 16R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the value of the short time flag, etc. In the case of a 2R jackpot start command, including the flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., in the case of a 2R jackpot start command, the value of the 2R jackpot flag, the number of jackpot rounds, the special figure probability variation flag value, the value of the hourly flag In the case of a jackpot end command, the special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number value, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, the special figure probability In the case of a big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning in the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  The prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit together with the types of special figures 1 and 2 in the command data. The prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command may be only an increment or may include prefetch result information for all suspensions. In the present embodiment, the prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information for all suspensions.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 stored in the RAM 308 as command data are also shown. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, and the like are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, 16R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. To do. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224 in FIG. 75) will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure prefetch processing. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S251). It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased, the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetching stored in the special figure 2 prefetching number storage area. Compare with the number. The main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 hold number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and if the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the special figure 2 start information is increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 holding number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number, it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased.

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 start information is increasing, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random number set related to the increased special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229), using the pre-read random number for hit determination and the big hit determination table (not shown), the determination of whether or not the hit / failure is a big hit or small Pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S252). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to predetermine a symbol (stopped symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 2 ( Step S252). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and special figure determination table (see FIGS. 79 and 80) used at the time of success / failure determination. A special determination table is prepared for the pre-reading process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol information as a special figure 2 prefetching result in the preemptive space of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. Store (step S253), and proceed to step S254. If the main control unit 300 determines in step S251 that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S254 without executing steps S252 and S253.

  Next, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased (step S254). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 starting information has increased is made, for example, in the same manner as in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is performed by comparing the number of special figure 1 look-ahead stored in FIG. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated.

  In step S <b> 255, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not non-electric support is being performed as an undetermined information setting condition. As the undetermined information setting condition, when the pre-reading result notification time is included in the electric support period, it is included in the jackpot game, or the case where the jackpot symbol is pre-determined for the suspension related to the special figure 1 etc. Can be mentioned.

  If the main control unit 300 determines that the undetermined information setting condition is not established, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values related to the increased special figure 1 start information from the special figure 1 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 1 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), whether or not the success / failure determination becomes a big hit by using the pre-read random number for hit determination and a big hit determination table (not shown). A pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S256). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to pre-determine a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 1 ( Step S256). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and special figure determination table (see FIGS. 79 and 80) used at the time of success / failure determination. A special determination table is prepared for the pre-reading process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 1 variable game stop symbol as the special figure 1 prefetching result in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. (Step S257), the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S255 that the undetermined information setting condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 does not prefetch the increased special figure 1 start information, and prefetches the "undecided" information for special figure 1 The result is stored in the result storage unit, and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  FIG. 77 illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. FIG. 77A illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, and FIG. 77B illustrates the prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. This is an example of the state being performed. FIG. 77 (c) illustrates information stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas “prefetch results 1” to the number of special figure variable games that can be held. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 1 start information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas "prefetch result 1" to the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. It has “look ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 2 start information storage area.

  In FIG. 77A, “prefetch result 1” indicates that the stop symbol “special figure F” is stored as the prefetch result 1. Similarly, the stop symbol “special diagram F” is stored in “prefetch result 2”, the stop symbol “special diagram A” is stored in “prefetch result 3”, and the stop symbol “special” is stored in “prefetch result 4”. FIG. F ”is stored.

  In FIG. 77 (b), the stop symbol “special drawing d” is stored in “prefetch result 1”, and the state in which stop symbol information is not stored in “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4” is illustrated. Has been. In FIG. 79, a state in which information such as a stop symbol is not stored is expressed as “none”.

  In FIG. 77 (c), not-stopped information is stored in "prefetch result 1" instead of stop symbols. When undetermined information is stored, it is expressed as “undetermined information”. In “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4”, “none” in which information such as stop symbols is not stored is stored.

  Next, the special drawing 1 related lottery process in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes, for example, a special drawing 1 related lottery process based on the flow shown in FIG. The special figure 1 related lottery process is executed, for example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the ROM 306, the RAM 308, and the like.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an exemplary flow of the special figure 1 related lottery process. As shown in FIG. 78, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure variable game or winning game is being performed (step S301). . For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure variable game or the winning game is in progress, the main control unit 300 ends the special figure 1 related lottery process without executing steps S303 to S321 to be described later, and during the special figure variable game or the winning game. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303 subsequent to step S301, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball, that is, whether or not a special figure 1 random number set is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 random value pair is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S305, and the special figure 1 random value set stores the special figure 1 holding number storage area. If it is determined that it is not stored in the area, the special drawing 1 related lottery process is terminated without executing steps S305 to S321 described later.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 probability variation flag is in an ON state. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 probability variation flag is on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S307, and if it determines that the flag is not on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S309.

  In step S307 subsequent to step S305, the success / failure determination is executed using the high / failure determination high probability table [special view 1] for special view 1 described later with reference to FIG. 79 (b). Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a special figure 2 priority change machine that changes in preference to the special figure 2 over the special figure 1, for example, the main control unit 300 has a special figure 2 reservation number storage area. The special figure 2 random value set stored first is read, and if the special figure 2 random value set is not stored, the special figure 1 random value stored first in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. The pair is read out, and a determination is made with reference to the high probability table for determination as shown in FIG. 79 (b) [Special Figure 1], and the process proceeds to step S311.

  On the other hand, in step S309 subsequent to step S305, the success / failure determination is executed using the low / probability determination probability table for special figure 1 [special figure 1] described later with reference to FIG. 79 (a). The processing in step S309 is the same as that in step S307 except that the table referred to in the determination of success / failure is the low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. . When the process of step S309 ends, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S311.

  In step S311 following step S307 or step S309, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S319. If the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S319 following step S311, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table for special figure 1 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 1], a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321.

  On the other hand, in step S313 following step S311, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S317, and if the determination result is not a small hit, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S315.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S313, a small hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 82 (a) for the special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value set used for the determination. Then, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is one small hit symbol, it is determined as “Special E” with a probability of 100%.

  On the other hand, in step S315 subsequent to step S313, a missing symbol is determined. With reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 80 (a), the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to Step S321. In the present embodiment, since there is only one off symbol, it is determined as “special drawing F” with a probability of 100%.

  In step S321 following step S315, S317, or S319, the variation time is determined according to the symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 81 to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. Since the special drawing 2 related lottery process is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. 79 and 80 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 79 (a) to (d) are used in the success / failure determination process of FIG. 1 or FIG. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown. FIG. 79A shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 79B shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure high probability. FIG. 79 (c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 79 (d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability.

  79 (a) and 79 (b), the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Range” in the second column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 79A indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, a numerical value 10220 to 10383, and a numerical value 10384 to 65535. In the third column, the “results of success / failure determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10384 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. The “small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10220 to 10383.

  “High probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 79 (b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, a numerical value 12186 to 12349, and a numerical value 12350 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 12350 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. , “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12186 to 12349.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 1]. For example, when the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the low / probability determination low probability table [Special figure 1] shown in FIG. 79A is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 79 (c) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 79 (d) shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability. 79C and 79D, the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 2] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Number Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 79 (c) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, and a numerical value 10220 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10220 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 79 (d) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, and a numerical value 12186 to 65535. In the third column, “Win / Fail determination result” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 12186 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 2]. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the probability determination low probability table [special figure 2] shown in FIG. 79 (c) is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set to 0 as one example in which the small hit probability of special figure 2 is lower than the small hit probability of special figure 1. Of course, a special random number range may be set in the special figure 2 as a small hit. Further, the small hit probability of special figure 2 may be the same as or higher than special figure 1.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 1 variable game is selected with the first probability, and the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 2 variable game is obtained by the first probability. Small hits are selected with a lower second probability.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. For this reason, during the electric support, a penalty is given to the player who does not play the game intended by the pachinko machine developer so as to increase the small hit, and the pachinko machine developer is encouraged to play the game as intended. There are cases where it is possible. For example, in the case where the special figure 2 starting port is arranged in the right area of the game board 200, the developer intends that the player makes a right turn in the electric support state. In this case, if the player does not make a right strike and makes a left strike different from the intention of the developer, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player thinks that it is more advantageous to hit the right. There is a case that can be made. Further, since the small hit probability of the special figure 2 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is low, the small hit in the electric support is often the special figure 1 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by changing the production that can be changed when a predetermined change condition is established, the player is indirectly notified that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has not entered too much, thereby suppressing gambling. May be possible.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by reducing the small hits that are disadvantageous in terms of performance in the special figure 2 variable game, it is possible to highlight that the special figure 2 variable game is more advantageous than the special figure 1 variable game and to improve the interest of the game. There is a case.

  FIG. 80 shows a special figure determination table. FIG. 80A shows a special figure determination table [special figure 1] for special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 80B shows a special figure determination table [special figure 2] for special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 80 (a), the special figure determination table [special figure 1] is composed of items of “result of determination / noness determination”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol” from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where “big hit” is determined as a result of the success / failure determination using the determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 79 (a) or 79 (b). As a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1], the case where “small hit” is determined is shown, and “out” indicates the success / failure using the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1]. As a result of the determination, a case where it is determined as “disconnected” is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 80A indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of 0-24, numerical values 25-49, numerical values 50-54, and numerical values 55-99, corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “result of judgment”. Corresponding to “small hit”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99, and corresponding to “off”, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 80A represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of the design random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 24, “special drawing A (15R probability variation)”, the numerical values 25 to 49, “special drawing B (15R)”, Stop symbols of “special drawing C (sudden probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 50 to 54 and “special drawing D (latency probability change)” corresponding to numerical values 55 to 99 are assigned. In addition, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing E (small hit)” corresponding to the value “0” to “99” in the “random hit” range. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing F (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to display any one of the special figures A to F when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Whether to stop the display of the stop symbol pattern is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] for the acquired special figure determination random value. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of the special figure E on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Decide what to do. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure F when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. To decide.

  In FIG. 80 (b), the special figure determination table [special figure 2] is composed of items of "result / no-good determination result", "random number range", and "stop symbol" from the left column. In order to facilitate understanding, a “description of symbol” is attached to the right side of the “stop symbol”. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 79 (c) or FIG. 79 (d) [special figure 2]. The case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination as to whether or not the figure determination table [Special Figure 2] is used is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 80B indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. “Random number range” is divided into three values of 0 to 69, 70 to 74, and 75 to 99 corresponding to the item “big hit” in the left column “result of judgment”, and corresponds to “out of” Thus, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 80B represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 69, “special drawing a (16R probability variation)”, and the numerical values 70 to 74 “special symbol b (8R probability variation)”. , Corresponding to the numerical values 75 to 99, the special symbol c (8R) stop symbol form is respectively assigned. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special drawing d (missing)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display any one of the special figure a to the special figure c when the success / failure determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [special figure 2] with respect to the acquired special figure determination random value whether or not the stop symbol pattern is to be stopped and displayed. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure d when the determination result based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. To decide.

  FIG. 81 shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 81 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 81, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table includes four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 1 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, the first to fifth sub-tables are provided. The first sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure A or special figure B. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure C. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 30000, a numerical value 30001 to 45000, and a numerical value 45001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numbers 30001 to 45000, the effect that the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach A lose / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach A losing / chance stop is a display in which the chance eye is stopped after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach A is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of values 45001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach B losing / chance eye stop is a display that stops the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach B is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is special figure D or special figure E. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into two values, a numerical value 0 to 30000 and a numerical value 30001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, the effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 30001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach lose / chance stop is selected. Here, the normal reach loss / chance eye stop is a display for stopping the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the normal reach is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure F, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is three. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 65000, a numerical value 65001 to 65400, a numerical value 65401 to 65500, and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 65000, the effect that the variation time is 3000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shortened is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65400, the effect that the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of numerical values 65401 to 65500, an effect in which the variation time is 40,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach A lose is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of numerical values 65501 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  The fifth sub-table is for the case where the stop symbol is special figure F, the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is non-electric support and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0 to 2, or the game at the time of determination of success / failure It is used when the status is electric support and the number of holds in Fig. 1 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fifth sub-table is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, the effect that the variation time is 10000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A Loss with a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  FIG. 82 shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 82 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 82, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table includes four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 2 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In the present embodiment, there are four sub-tables from first to fourth. The first sub-table is used when the stop symbol is special figure a to special figure c. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or a non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the first sub-table is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The second sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 1 to 3. The “random number selection range” in the second sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 65535, the effect that the variation time is 1500 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is an extremely shortened loss is selected.

  The third sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, and the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is the electric support, and the holding number of the special figure 2 is 0. The “random number selection range” in the third sub-table is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 0 to 65535, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost with a variation time of 8000 ms is selected.

  The fourth sub-table is used when the “stop symbol” is the special figure d, the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is non-electric support, and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the fourth sub-table is divided into four values: a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, the effect that the variation time is 10000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A Loss with a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S413 following step S411, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S421 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S413 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S801 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S803.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 84A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, Example 1 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the flow of a selection effect control process that is one of the effect control processes (step S409) of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. In the selection effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether it is the start timing of the selection effect (step S1101). Here, the start timing of the selection effect may be, for example, a standby state in which the symbol variation game is not performed (including during the demonstration screen), or may be during a special diagram variation game. Further, the gaming state may be any of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a short time state, and the like. Further, it may be a predetermined round during the jackpot game (for example, the first round of 15R jackpot), or all the rounds during the jackpot game (for example, excluding the start effect and end effect of the jackpot game). Good.

  The first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1103 if it is determined in step S1101 that it is the selection effect start timing, and ends the selection effect control process if it is determined that it is not the selection effect start timing. When the process proceeds to step S1103, the first sub-control unit 400 displays a selection effect. As a display example of the selection effect, for example, description of the effect (for example, performance of the song by the speaker 120) selected by the player at a predetermined position of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a song name or description of the song) ) Is included. Also, displaying the effects that can be selected by the player is also included in the display of the selected effects. For example, a display of an effect list for causing the player to select one of a plurality of effects, and a display for prompting the player to select (for example, a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136) are also included in the display of the selected effect. .

  When the selection effect is displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a selection operation by the player has been performed (step S1105). Examples of the selection operation include, for example, pressing the chance button 136, pressing any one of the direction keys 139, and the like. If it is determined in step S1105 that there is no selection operation, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1109 and performs a continuation process of the currently executed effect (for example, effect A and effect α in FIG. 86) to select the effect. The control process ends. If it is determined in step S1105 that there has been a selection operation, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1107 and determines whether it is the production start timing. If it is determined in step S1107 that it is not the production start timing, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1109 and performs the continuation processing of the currently executed production (for example, production A in FIG. 86, production α) to select the production The control process ends. If it is determined in step S1107 that it is the production start timing, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1111 and selects a process for executing the selected production (eg, production B, production β in FIG. 86). The effect control process ends.

  Examples of the production start timing in step S1107 include the elapse of a specified time, the end of the delay time until the selection result is reflected, and the start timing of the special figure variable game. The execution of the selected effect in step S1111 includes transmitting a command related to the selected effect to each control means (image, sound, etc.).

  FIG. 86 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 86 shows time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 86, t0 to t6 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of production. The middle part of FIG. 86 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A (eg, included in the first effect) or starts effect A from time t0, and the second effect at time t0. It is assumed that the effect means is executing the effect α (eg, included in the first effect) or starts the effect α from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B (for example, included in the second effect). To start). In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β (eg, included in the second effect) is started. In addition, on the operation means, on the condition that the chance button 136 is pressed, the selectable period ends at the time t1, and the selectable period in which the effect selection is impossible is started. The non-selectable period is a period during which the detection result of the sensor is not accepted even if the selection operation is performed. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds.

  Even if the player depresses the chance button 136 at, for example, time t2 during the non-selectable period, the selection is not accepted, so the effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed.

  The operation means enters the selectable period again after time t3 when the predetermined T seconds elapse and the selectable period ends. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts. In addition, the selectable period for the operation means is terminated at the time t4, and the selectable period in which the effect selection is impossible is started. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds.

  Even if the player presses the chance button 136 during the non-selectable period, the selection is not accepted, so the effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed.

  The operation means again enters the selectable period from time t5 after the selectable period ends. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts.

  According to this embodiment, since the operation result of the selection means is not accepted (invalidated) for T seconds after the selected production starts, the player cannot select the production. Since the player always sees the selected effect for a certain period, it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.

  87 and 88 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the first embodiment. 87 (a) to 87 (d) and FIG. 88 (a) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 87 (A) to 87 (D) and FIG. 88 (A) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second effect means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 87 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 87 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 86, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A for displaying the character string “M1: Might be there” at the time t1 ends, and “M2: Production B is started to display the character string “Kiseki no Universe”. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at the time t1, the production α that the song 810 “may be there” on the speaker 120 is finished, and the song name is “Kiseki no Universe” as shown in FIG. 87 (B). The production β in which the song 810 flows is started. In the operating means, the selectable period ends at time t1, and a T-selectable non-selectable period of T seconds is displayed in which no effect selection is possible even if the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 87 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At the time t2, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 86, the time t2 is within the selection impossible period since T seconds have not elapsed since the time t1, so even if the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t2, the processing by the pressing is not performed. It is invalidated and the production is not changed. For this reason, in the selected effect display area 800 at the time point t2, the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” is continued. Also, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the stage effect β in which the song 810 having the song name “Kiseki no Universe” is continued from the speaker 120 at time t2.

  FIG. 87 (d) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At time t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 86, since the time point t4 is within the selectable period started at the time point t3, when the player presses the chance button 136, the selection effect display area 800 displays “M2: Kiseki” at the time point t4. The production B for displaying the character string “universe” is finished, and the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The production C displays the character string of the song title of the song that flows from the speaker 120 called “M3: Your Fragrance”. Also, at time t4, the stage 120 in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows is finished at the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the stage γ in which the song 810 whose title is “Your Fragrance” flows. Is started. In the operation means, the selectable period ends at time t4, and a T unselectable period of T seconds is displayed in which no effect selection is possible even if the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t6 shown in FIG. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described with reference to FIG. 86, since the time point t6 is within the selectable period started at the time point t5, when the player presses the chance button 136, the selection effect display area 800 displays “M3: Your The effect C for displaying the character string “Kakera” ends, and the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The production D displays a character string of a song title of a song flowing from the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!”. Also, at time t6, the production γ in which the song 810 of “Your Fragrance” is played on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! The flowing effect δ is started. In the operating means, the selectable period ends at time t6, and a T unselectable period of T seconds in which the effect selection is impossible even when the chance button 136 is pressed is started.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect means capable of executing at least an effect, and as an effect changing means capable of changing at least an effect, for example, a first sub control unit 400 includes an effect control process ((step S409) and a sound control process (step S415)), an operation means that can be operated by the player, for example, a chance button 136, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is the first The first effect (for example, effect A) and the second effect (for example, effect B) can be executed at least, and the first sub-control unit 400 starts from the first effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As change control that can be changed at least to the second effect, for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes and step S11. 1 is executed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied at least by the player operating the operating means during the execution of the first effect (for example, pressing the chance button 136). The changing means is characterized in that an operation of the operating means by the player is not accepted for a predetermined period (for example, T seconds) after the predetermined condition is established.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the selection of the effect is not accepted by the operation means for a predetermined period after the selected effect is started (disabled), the player cannot select the effect. Thereby, since the player always views the selected effect for a certain period, it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.

  The selection effect display area of the present embodiment displays a character string, but may display an image. The selection effect display area may be a combination of an image and a character string, only an image, only a character string, or the like. The same applies to the selection effect display areas shown in the second and subsequent embodiments.

  The operation means may be other than the chance button, and may be any operation means that can be operated by the player, such as a handle or a direction key. The operation means shown in the second and subsequent embodiments is also the same.

  FIG. 89 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 2 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 89 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. 89, t0 to t6 in the upper stage indicate various operations, or the time points when the production starts and ends. 89 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A (eg, included in the first effect) or starts effect A from time t0, and the second effect at time t0. It is assumed that the effect means is executing the effect α (for example, included in the second effect) or starts the effect α from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In this embodiment, the production selection is always possible. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effecting means ends the effect A and the effect B (at the time t3 T seconds after the time t1. For example, it is included in the third effect). In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β (for example, included in the fourth effect) is started. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selected effect is reflected in the first and second effect means when a delay time of T seconds elapses after selection of the effect by pressing the chance button 136, and the first effect is produced. To the third effect, and similarly, the second effect is switched to the fourth effect.

  Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at time t2 during the delay time of T seconds, at the time t4 T seconds after time t2, the first effect means ends the effect B and the effect C Is started. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts. In this example, if there is an operation for selecting an effect again during the delay period, the delay periods are overlapped, but after the previously started delay period ends, the next delay period starts. It may be.

  When a player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t4, the effect C is ended and the effect D is completed at the first effect means at a time t6 T seconds after the time t5. Be started. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts.

  According to the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity by reflecting the changed result after a while, and to attract the player's attention until the changed performance is started. There are cases where it is possible. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the production, the production will be monotonous, but by performing the production using the time lag as described above, variations can be made in the production, and the player You may not be bored.

  90 and 91 show the selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the second embodiment. 90 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 91 (a) to (c) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 90 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 91 (A) to (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 90A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 90 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 90B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 89, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player presses the chance button 136 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect is not changed until T seconds of a predetermined delay time have elapsed. For this reason, in the selection effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: may be there” continues at the time point t1. Also, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), at the time point t1, the effect α that the song 810 “may be there” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 90C shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 89, the time point t2 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t2, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player intends to change the production and presses the chance button 136, the production is not changed because it is during the predetermined delay time. For this reason, in the selection effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: may be there” continues at the time point t1. In addition, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), at time t1, the production α that the song 810 “may be there” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 90D shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. The time point t3 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t1 when the player first pressed the chance button 136. At the time point t3, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t3, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: Might be there ...” ends, and the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” is displayed. Be started. The production B displays the character string of the song title of the song “M2: miracle of miracle” flowing from the speaker 120. Further, at time t3, the production α in which the music 810 of “M1: It may be there ...” is finished at the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started.

  FIG. 91A shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t4 shown in FIG. Time t4 is a time when a predetermined delay time T seconds elapses from time t2 when the player presses the chance button 136 following time t1. At time t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At time t4, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” is finished, and the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The production C displays the character string of the song title of the song “M3: Your Fragrance” flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at time t4, the stage β in which the music “810: universe of miracle” 810 flows on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the music 810 whose title is “Your Fragrance” flows. The production γ is started.

  FIG. 91B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 89, the time point t5 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time point t5, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, even if the player presses the chance button 136 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect is not changed until T seconds of a predetermined delay time have elapsed. For this reason, in the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t5. Also, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), at time t5, an effect γ in which a song “810” of “Your Fragrance” flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  FIG. 91 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. The time point t6 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t5 when the player pressed the chance button 136. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time point t6, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” ends, and the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. . The production D displays a character string of a song title of “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flowing from the speaker 120. At time t6, the stage γ in which the song “810 of yours” is played on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 91C, a song 810 with the title “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is created. The flowing effect δ is started.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect means capable of executing at least an effect, and as an effect change means capable of changing the effect at least, for example, a first sub-control unit 400 (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415), the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a first effect (for example, effect A) and a third effect (for example, effect). B) can be executed at least, the speaker 120 can execute at least a second effect (for example, an effect α) and a fourth effect (for example, an effect β), and the first sub-control unit 400 can As the first change control that can be changed at least from the first effect to the third effect when one condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operation means), for example, FIG. The step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in 85 is Yes and the effect selected in step S1111 is executed, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the second condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operation means). If there is, as the second change control that can be changed at least from the second effect to the fourth effect, for example, the effect selected in step S1111 is Yes in step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. The first change control is a control that is executed after the first time has elapsed since the first condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds), and the second change control. The control is characterized in that the control is executed after the second time has elapsed since the second condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds).

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the first effect is changed to the third effect after the first time has elapsed, and the second effect is changed to the fourth effect after the second time has elapsed. Therefore, there are cases where the player's interest can be improved because various effects can be performed.

  More specifically, the result of the change after a certain amount of time is reflected to give the player a sense of incongruity and can attract the player's attention until the changed performance starts. There is a case. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the production, the production will be monotonous, but by performing the production using the time lag as described above, variations can be made in the production, and the player You may not be bored.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the time when the first condition is satisfied is at least coincident with the time when the second condition is satisfied. According to the pachinko machine 100, since the establishment time of the first condition and the second condition overlap, there are cases where the effect can be more noticed. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. In addition, there may be a case where a variation can be given to the execution timing of the effect even though the change conditions for the plurality of effects are satisfied at substantially the same timing.

  FIG. 92 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 3 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 92 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 92, t0 to t6 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 92 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A (eg, included in the first effect) or starts effect A from time t0, and the second effect at time t0. It is assumed that the effect means is executing the effect α (for example, included in the second effect) or starts the effect α from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In this embodiment, the production selection is always possible. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B (for example, included in the third effect) from the time t1. Will be started). On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect α ends at the time t3 T seconds after the time t1, and the effect β (for example, included in the fourth effect) is started. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected in the first effect means simultaneously with the selection of the effect by pressing the chance button 136 (first time is zero), and the first effect is changed to the third effect. When a delay time of T seconds (second time T seconds) has passed after selection of the effect by pressing the chance button 136, the selected effect is reflected in the second effect means, and the second effect To the fourth production.

  Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the delay time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect B is ended and the effect C is finished in the first effect means at the time point t2. Be started. On the other hand, the production β is continued in the second production means. At time t4, which is T seconds after time t2, the second effect means ends the effect β and starts the effect γ. In this example, if there is an operation for selecting an effect again during the delay period, the delay periods are overlapped, but after the previously started delay period ends, the next delay period starts. It may be.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t4, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means at the time t5. On the other hand, the production β is continued in the second production means. At time t6 T seconds after time t5, the second effect means ends the effect γ and starts the effect δ.

  In the present embodiment, the first time is zero, which is different from T second of the second time. According to the pachinko machine 100, since the first time and the second time are different, the production may be more noticeable. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. Furthermore, there are cases where variations can be given to the execution timing of effects.

  93 and 94 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the third embodiment. 93 (a) to 93 (d) and FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 93 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 94 (A) to (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 93A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 93 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 93B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 92, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t1 with the intention of changing the production, the character string “M1: May be there ...” is displayed in the selection production display area 800 at the time t1. The effect A to be displayed is finished and the effect B to display the character string “M2: miracle universe” is started. On the other hand, the production α is continued in the second production means.

  FIG. 93 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 92, the time point t2 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t2, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect is immediately changed from effect B to effect C in the first effect means. At the time t2, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” ends, and the effect C displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is not changed because it is during the predetermined delay time. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), at the time point t1, the effect α that the song 810 “may be there” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 93D shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. The time point t3 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t1 when the player first pressed the chance button 136. At the time point t3, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time point t3, the effect C is continued in the selected effect display area 800. At time t3, the production α in which the music piece 810 “M1: It may be there ...” is finished at the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started.

  FIG. 94A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. Time t4 is a time when a predetermined delay time T seconds elapses from time t2 when the player presses the chance button 136 following time t1. At time t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t4, the effect C continues in the selected effect display area 800. Also, at time t4, the stage 120 in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows is finished at the speaker 120, and as shown in FIG. Is started.

  FIG. 94B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t5 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 92, the time point t5 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time point t5, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t5 with the intention of changing the effect, the effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the selected effect display area 800 ends at the time t5. Then, the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. On the other hand, the effect γ is continued in the second effect means.

  FIG. 94C shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t6 shown in FIG. The time point t6 is a time point when a predetermined delay time T seconds has elapsed since the time point t5 when the player pressed the chance button 136. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t6, the effect D continues in the selected effect display area 800. Further, at time t6, the production γ in which the song “810 of yours” is played on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. 94C, the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” The flowing effect δ is started.

  It should be noted that while the special figure variable game is stopped, the presentation may not be changed even if the chance button 136 is pressed. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed until the special figure variable game is finished and the next special figure variable game is started, the selection operation may be accepted, and the result of the selection operation is not accepted. You may do it. Even when the demonstration screen is being executed, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted. In addition, when the state until the special figure variable game is stopped is included in the period until the selection result is reflected, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted. Also, the result of the selection operation may not be accepted only when there is a hold until the next special figure variable game is started after the special figure variable game is ended.

  Further, even during the special figure change, the selection operation may not be accepted during a specific period (for example, when one of a plurality of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed).

  Further, the delay in this embodiment may include a time from when the operating means is operated until it is received. For example, the time from when the sensor is detected until the control command is sent to the sub-control unit 400 may be included.

  Note that the modification examples regarding the reception of the result of the selection operation can be applied to other examples.

  FIG. 95 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis in FIG. 95 represents a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 95, t0 to t5 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 95 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A or the effect A is started from time t0, and at time t0, the second effect means is the effect α (for example, included in the first effect). It is assumed that the production α is started or the production α is started from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In this embodiment, the production selection is always possible during a predetermined period. For example, in the first round in the big hit game, the effect selection by the operation means may be always possible. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A ends and the effect B starts at the first effect means from the time t1. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, the production α is continued at time t1.

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t2 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time T, the production α is continued without changing the production at the second production means at the time t2.

  Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the T second standby time in the second effect means, the effect C ends and the effect D starts in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time T, the production α is continued without changing the production at the second production means at the time t3.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t3.

  At time t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from time t3, the second effect means ends the effect α and starts the effect δ (for example, included in the second effect). On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect means reflects the selected effect immediately, and the second effect means does not reflect unless the standby time elapses after selection. In other words, if the predetermined time period T seconds has not passed since the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, thereby preventing the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately. There are cases where it is possible.

  Time t5 indicates the end time of the selectable period in which the effect can be selected by the operation means. For example, the case where the first round of the jackpot game is a selectable period but the second round is a nonselectable period is included. Hereinafter, the case where the time t5 is the start time of the second round of the jackpot game will be described. When the time T3 from the time t3 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is longer than the waiting time T from the time t3, the second effect means produces the effect δ at the time t4. To time t5, and further in the second round from time t5. In the first effect means, a new effect D ′ is executed from time t5. When the time T3 from the time t3 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is shorter than the waiting time T from the time t3, the effect in the second effect means is not changed.

  96 and 97 show the selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the fourth embodiment. 96 (a) to 96 (d) and FIGS. 97 (a) to (d) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 96 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 97 (A) to (D) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 96A shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the time t0 shown in FIG. Before the time t0, the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, and the start effect of the big hit game is executed. As shown in FIG. 96 (A), before the time point t0, an effect in which a song 810 of big hit start BGM (background music) flows from the speaker 120 is executed.

  FIG. 96 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At time t0, for example, an effect at 1R (first round) where a 15R big hit game is started is shown. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a selection effect is executed. A selection screen for selecting an effect is displayed, and an effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. “M3: Kimi no Kakera” indicating the song title, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Indicating the song code and song title as production 4, and “M5: Onsen” showing the song code and song title as production 5 "Hormones" are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Further, an explanation screen to the player with an image imitating the chance button 136 in the lower left and a message “Please select a song” (may be a notification prompting selection of an effect (for example, a song)) and a downward arrow. Is displayed. The selection screen and the explanation screen are displayed as the 1R effect. In addition, the selection screen and the explanation screen are in the state shown in FIG. 96 (a) or during the big hit round (between the 1R effect and the end of the final round (in this example, 15R, 16R, 8R, 2R)) For example, it may be displayed when the player presses the chance button 136.

  In this state, the currently selected effect on the selection screen is displayed with a thick frame. As shown in FIG. 96 (b), the production 1 is selected on the selection screen at time t0. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one. In this example, on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0, the effect frame that displays the character string “M1: May be there ...” is displayed in bold, and the other effect frames are usually displayed. An effect A to be displayed is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), at time t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120. That is, the production α is executed simultaneously with the production A. The effect α may be executed after the effect A is executed, or may be executed before the effect A is executed.

  FIG. 96 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 95, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, 1R of the jackpot game is continuing. In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t1 with the intention of changing the production, the character string “M2: miracle space” is displayed on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t1. An effect B is executed in which the frame is displayed thick and the other effect frames are normally displayed. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operating means, so the effect is not changed until the waiting time has elapsed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the production α is continued at the time point t1.

  FIG. 96 (d) shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the T second waiting time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t2 displays “M3: Your The effect frame that displays the character string “Kakera” is displayed in bold, and the effect C in which the other effect frames are normally displayed is executed. On the other hand, the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time T (for example, T = 1 second), so as shown in FIG. At time t2, the production is not changed at the speaker 120, and the production α is continued.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t2. .

  FIG. 97A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t3 during the T second standby time on the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3. The effect D in which the effect frame for displaying the character string is displayed thick and the other effect frames are normally displayed is executed. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 (for example, T2 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time T, as shown in FIG. The production α is continued without being performed.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t3. .

  FIG. 97 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At the time t4 when the waiting time T seconds have elapsed from the time t3, the speaker 120 has finished the production α in which the music 810 having the music name “may be there ...” has ended, as shown in FIG. 97 (B). In addition, the production δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows is started. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 97 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. Time t5 indicates the start time of the second round of the jackpot game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a new effect D ′ is executed from time t5. At time t5, on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect frame displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! An effect D ′ in which the display contrast of the other effect frames is reduced with respect to the effect frame is executed. Thereby, the player can know that the production including the performance of “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Has been confirmed.

  When the effect D ′ is executed for a predetermined period from the time point t5, the effect of the image associated with the song “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. Displayed in the area. In this example, since the time T3 from the time t3 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t5 of the second round is longer than the waiting time T from the time t3, the production δ is timed from the time t4. The process is executed until t5, and as shown in FIGS. 97C and 97D, the effect δ is also executed in the second round from time t5. The production δ may be such that the song continues from before the time t5, or may start from the beginning of the song again from the time t5. In addition, the effect D ′ may be a notification (or display) indicating that the execution of the effect D is confirmed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120 as an effect unit capable of executing at least an effect. For example, a chance button 136 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a first design display device 208 that includes a production control process (step S409) and a sound control process (step S415). At least an effect (for example, an effect α) and a second effect (for example, an effect δ) can be executed, and the first sub-control unit 400 changes the first effect from the first effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As change control that can be changed at least to the second effect, for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes and step S1111. The predetermined condition is that the player operates the operating means during the execution of the first presentation, and a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 At least when the second) elapses.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the selected effect is immediately reflected in the first effect means, and the selected effect is not reflected in the second effect means unless T seconds have elapsed after selection. In other words, if the predetermined period does not elapse after the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, so that the annoyance felt by starting the effect immediately selected after selection can be prevented. There is.

  FIG. 98 shows temporal operations of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 98 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 98, t0 to t7 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 98 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A or starting effect A from time t0, and at time t0, the second effect means is executing effect α or from time t0. It is assumed that the production α has started. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β starts.

  The time point t2 indicates a point in time when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1 and the effect L is further started in addition to the effect B in the first effect means. The effect L includes an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means (pressing the chance button 136). The operation means used in the effect L is the same as the operation means used in the effect selection. With the operating means, on the condition that the effect L has been started, the selectable period ends at the time t2, and an unselectable period in which the effect cannot be selected is started. That is, the operation reception valid period of the operation means in the effect L using the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is a selection effect non-selectable period. The non-selectable period here is a regulation period that is performed in order to prioritize the effect L over the selection effect in reflecting the reception result of the operation means. The meaning is different from the non-selectable period in the first embodiment. The non-selectable period is a predetermined T seconds. For example, when the player depresses the chance button 136 at the time t3 during the non-selectable period, the depressing is effective for the effect L and does not select the effect for the first and second effect means. The effects of both the first effect means and the second effect means are not changed. Note that the selectable period may be immediately after the operation means is operated during the operation reception valid period. For example, the selectable period may also be between time t3 and time t4. Further, the second rendering means may reflect the operation result after a certain period as in the second to fourth embodiments when the selection operation is performed during the operation reception valid period.

  When a predetermined T second elapses and the selectable period ends, the operation means enters the selectable period again. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t4 during the selectable period, the first effect means ends the effect B and starts the effect C. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts.

  The production L ends at time t5. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts.

  According to this embodiment, since the operation result of the selection means is not accepted (invalidated) for T seconds after the production L different from the selection production starts, the player can select the production. Can not. There is a case where the player can concentrate on the production L for a certain period of time and can improve the interest.

  99 to 102 show selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the fifth embodiment. (A)-(d) of FIGS. 99-102 has shown the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 contained in a 1st effect means. 99A to 102D schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 99A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is executed, and in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 99 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 99B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time t1, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the selected effect display area 800 at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect A for displaying the character string “M1: Might be there” at the time t1 ends, and “M2: Production B is started to display the character string “Kiseki no Universe”. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at time t1, the production α that the song 810 “may be there” on the speaker 120 is ended, and the song name is “Kiseki no Universe” as shown in FIG. 99 (B). The production β in which the song 810 flows is started.

  FIG. 99 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t2 is a time point when a certain time has elapsed from the time point t1 and the effect L is further started in addition to the effect B on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 99C, in the effect L, for example, an image is displayed so as to partially hide the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. The image includes, for example, a character image 903 indicating a samurai on the left side, and an explanation image 901 imitating a chance button 136 and an indicator indicating an operation reception period of the button on the right side. The display indicating the operation reception period may be other than the gauge, and may be, for example, a numerical display or a display by the number of images such as characters. The chance button 136 is shared by the operation means used for the effect L and the operation means used for the effect selection. As shown in FIG. 99C, the effect β is continued in the speaker 120.

  FIG. 99D illustrates a state in which the effect L is being executed. It is shown that the black bar of the indicator in the explanation image 901 is shortened, and the operation reception period is shortening. The special figure variable game continues, and the effect B continues in the selection effect display area 800. As shown in FIG. 99D, the effect β continues in the speaker 120.

  FIG. 100A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t3 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At the time point t3, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the time t3 is in a period during which selection is impossible, pressing of the chance button 136 is not accepted, and in the selected effect display area 800, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” continues. On the other hand, since the effect L is during the operation acceptance period, pressing of the chance button 136 is accepted, and the effect that the character “chance?” Is displayed in the explanation image 901 is executed. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), in the speaker 120, the effect β in which the song 810 having the song name “Kiseki no Universe” continues.

  FIG. 100B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t4 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the time point t4 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t4, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, and 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the time t4, the operation acceptance period at the effect L has already ended and the selectable period is in effect. Therefore, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect B displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” ends, and “M3 Production C is started to display the character string: Also, at time t4, the effect β in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows on the speaker 120 ends, and as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the effect γ in which the song 810 with the song name “Kimi no Kakera” flows. Is started. On the other hand, for the effect L, an effect of notifying the result of the special figure variable game is performed. The advance notice is given in a manner determined based on a predetermined reliability. In this example, an effect is displayed in which a character image 905 showing a princess on the right side, for example, on the lower side of the description image 901 and the character image 903, and characters “Do your best! The explanation images 901 and 907 and the character images 903 and 905 hide the left middle decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208b and a part of the right decorative symbol display area 208c. On the other hand, the selection effect display area is not hidden. Part or all of the selected effect display area may be hidden by effect L (description images 901 and 907, character images 903 and 905).

  FIG. 100C shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t5 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 98, the effect L ends at the time point t5, the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 disappear from the display area, and the state where the special figure variable game continues is visually recognized. . In the selected effect display area 800, the effect C is continued. Further, the effect γ is continued as shown in FIG.

  If the operating means is not operated for T seconds from the start of execution of the effect L (t2), the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 disappear from the display area as in FIG. You may do it. Further, the character image 903 and the explanation image 901 may be displayed as in FIG. 100A, and the character images 903 and 905 and the explanation images 901 and 907 may be displayed as in FIG. May be.

  The explanatory image may be an effect (notification, display) that suggests the reliability of the change, or may be a prefetch effect (notification, display) that indicates the reliability of the change after the change. Good.

  FIG. 100D shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. At time t6, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right decorative symbol display regions 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left decorative design display area 208a, the design of the decoration 2 is stopped and displayed. As described with reference to FIG. 98, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the time t6, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” at the time t6 in the selection effect display area 800 is completed. Then, the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The production D displays a character string of a song title of a song flowing from the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!”. At time t6, the stage γ in which the song “810 of yours” is played on the speaker 120 is finished, and as shown in FIG. 100D, a song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is created. The flowing effect δ is started.

  FIG. 101A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at time t7 shown in FIG. At time t7, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, the symbol of the decoration 2 is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, the symbol of the decoration 5 is displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b, and the right decorative symbol display region 208c. Is displayed with a decoration 0 symbol, which fluctuates. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect D is continued at time t7. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the effect δ is continued in the speaker 120. It should be noted that the selection / selection may not be changed during fluctuation of the shaking. Further, the selection effect may be changeable. In this case, both may be changed, and one (for example, the effect by the first effect means) can be changed, and the other (the effect by the second effect means) is changed with a delay. May be.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 after time t7 shown in FIG. After time t7, the special symbol variation game symbol variation stop display is performed, the left decorative symbol display area 208a displays the decoration 2 symbol stopped, the middle decorative symbol display region 208b displays the decoration 5 symbol stopped, and the right In the decorative symbol display area 208c, it is informed that the symbol of decoration 0 is stopped and displayed and the game is shifted to the special symbol variable game. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect D is continued after time t7. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the effect δ is continued in the speaker 120. When the symbol is determined, the selected effect may not be performed, for example, a silence state may be set.

  FIG. 101 (c) shows another example of effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. At time t7, the special symbol variation game is continuously executed, the symbol of decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the middle decorative symbol display region 208b is still in a reach state. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect D is continued at time t7. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101C, the speaker 120 starts a reach effect that causes the reach BGM to flow. The reach BGM is started after the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 are stopped and displayed. During the reach, the selection / selection may not be changed. Further, the selection effect may be changeable. Even if it can be changed, one side (for example, the effect by the first effect means) is notified, and the other (the effect by the second effect means) is not notified (for example, the reach BGM is displayed). In order to flow, the changed BGM may not be heard). Further, both may be changed, and one (for example, the effect by the first effect means) can be changed, and the other (the effect by the second effect means) is changed with a delay. Also good. The reach BGM may be started before the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 are stopped and displayed, or the reach BGM is started simultaneously with the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208 being stopped and displayed. Good.

  FIG. 101D shows a super reach effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 after time t7 shown in FIG. 98, following FIG. 101C. In the super reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in a relatively small display area 911 at the upper right of the display area. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. A super reach effect image 913 is displayed in a large area in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101D, in the speaker 120, the effect δ ends and the super reach BGM is started. After the super reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the super reach BGM is started. Note that the selection effect may not be performed during super reach. In this case, the result of the selection operation may be reflected. Note that the same processing as in the reach may be performed. It should be noted that a fourth symbol (not shown) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at least during symbol variation. Note that the super reach BGM may be started before the super reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative design display device, and at the same time the super reach effect image 913 is displayed on the decorative design display device. The reach BGM may be started.

  FIG. 102 (a) shows a reach effect in a special figure variable game or a super reach effect which is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 101 (c) or 101 (d). In the left and right decorative design display areas 208a and 208c, the design of decoration 2 is displayed in a swinging manner, and in the middle decorative design display region 208b, the design of decoration 3 is displayed in a swinging manner. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 102A, in the speaker 120, the reach BGM and the super reach BGM are finished and are in a silent state (indicated as silence 820 in the figure). After the middle decorative symbol display area is swayed and displayed, it is silent. After the middle decorative symbol display area is stopped and displayed, it is silent. It should be noted that the middle decoration symbol display area may be silent before the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed, or may be silenced at the same time as the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed and displayed.

  FIG. 102 (b) shows a state in which the final display is confirmed as a result of the special figure variable game performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 102 (a). The decoration 2 symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the decoration 3 symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 102B, the speaker 120 is silent. After the middle decorative symbol display area is swayed and displayed, it is silent. After the middle decorative symbol display area is stopped and displayed, it is silent. It should be noted that the middle decoration symbol display area may be silent before the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed, or may be silenced at the same time as the middle decoration symbol display area is swayed and displayed.

  FIG. 102 (c) shows a reach effect in the special figure change game or a shake change effect in the super reach effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 101 (c) or 101 (d). In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the symbol of decorative 2 is displayed in a shaking manner. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), in the speaker 120, the reach BGM and the super reach BGM are finished and are in a silent state (indicated as a silent 820 in the figure).

  FIG. 102 (d) shows a state in which the jackpot confirmation display is performed as a result of the special figure variable game performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 102 (c). In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the symbol of decorative 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the selection effect display area 800 disappears and no selection effect is performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 102D, the speaker 120 is silent. Note that the selection effect display area 800 may be displayed even in the states shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 103 shows the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 71 has only one liquid crystal display device, and the liquid crystal display device functions as a decorative symbol display device 208, whereas the game board 200 of this embodiment shown in FIG. It is characterized in that a plurality of liquid crystals are provided. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 103, the first liquid crystal display device (main liquid crystal display device) functions as the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal display device) functions as the effect display device 915. It is supposed to be. The effect display device 915 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the first liquid crystal display device is larger than the second liquid crystal display device, but the size of the liquid crystal display region may be the same or vice versa. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a decorative symbol display, a fourth symbol, various effects including a selection effect, an error display, and the like, and the effect display device 915 performs various effects including a hold display and a selection effect. The decorative symbol display device 208 may perform the hold display, and the effect display device 915 may perform the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, an error display, and the like. Also, the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect on the effect display device 915 may be linked. Further, the effect display device 915 may be provided in the effect movable body 224, and the operation of the effect movable body 224 may be interlocked with the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect on the effect display device 915. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided in the effect movable body 224.

  A lamp 940 shaped like a character string “Yatsushiro” is arranged on the upper right side of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The lamp 940 is included in various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 72, and can change color according to the current background mode, for example, based on control by the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 104 shows the operating means 700 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 104 shows the external appearance of the operating means 700 as viewed from above. The operation unit 700 has an operation unit 702. The operation unit 702 includes a chance button 136, a setting operation unit 139, an operation unit decoration member 720, a chance button lamp 138 (see FIG. 69), a ball extraction button 130, and a chance button detection unit (press detection sensor) 724 (FIG. 72). See).

  The chance button 136 includes a chance button cap 704 and a chance button decoration member 706. The chance button cap 704 is formed of a transparent resin material, for example, and has a hollow cylindrical shape whose upper surface is closed. The upper surface of the chance button 704 is formed in a curved shape that swells upward. Since the chance button cap 704 is formed of a transparent resin material, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the chance button lamp 138 disposed below the chance button cap 704. The chance button decoration member 706 is configured to rotate.

  In the chance button 136, a drive unit (see FIG. 72) 708 of the chance button 136 is arranged. The driving unit 708 controls the vibration motor connected to the second sub control unit 500. Thus, the player can feel that the chance button cap 704 is vibrating.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the chance button 136 is arranged from the left in the operation unit decoration member 720. A setting operation unit 139 is disposed on the right side of the chance button 136. The setting operation unit 139 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the player, and a confirmation (OK) button 139a, an upper button 139b positioned behind the confirmation button 139a, and a lower button positioned in front of the confirmation button 139a. A button 139c, a right button 139d positioned to the right of the confirm button 139a, a left button 139e positioned to the left of the confirm button 139a, and a cancel (clear) button 139f positioned further to the right of the right button 139d. I have. The setting operation unit 136 includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of the buttons 139b to 139f. The setting operation unit 139 of this example has a unit structure in which the buttons 139b to 139f and the operation unit sensor are integrated. The player can input the player's unique identification information by operating the buttons 139b to 139f, and store his / her player information and the like in an external server.

  As shown in FIG. 104, a ball removal button 130 is attached to the right of the setting operation unit 139 of the operation unit base 722. The upper surface of the ball removal button is exposed from an opening of a predetermined shape provided on the operation unit decoration member 720. Thereby, the player can push the ball removal button 130 to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the chance button lamp 138 is in a light emitting state, the chance button 136 is in a light emitting state. In addition, when the change button decoration member 706 is rotated by the operation of an electric motor (not shown), the chance button 136 is rotated. Further, when the chance button cap 704 is vibrated by the operation of the vibration motor of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is vibrated.

  FIG. 105 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 6 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis in FIG. 105 represents a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 105, t0 to t7 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 105 shows the execution state of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 105 shows the execution state of various effects by the third effect means. The third effect means of this example includes an effect display device 915. The second operation means is used to select an effect by the third effect means. The second operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, an effect is selected by the second operation means.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. Further, it is assumed that the first operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start time of the period. In the first operation means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at the time t0 or starts the effect X from the time t0. In addition, at time t0, the second operation means is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the player's setting operation unit 139, or at the start of the period. To do. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β starts. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t5. At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts. At time t6, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is pressed, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so the second operation means No production selection is made. Production Z continues in the third production means.

  The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t5 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so that the effect Z continues in the third effect means from time t7.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected periodically (every T seconds) by the third rendering means corresponding to the second operation means. If there is a selection operation during T seconds, it is reflected at the next stage where the effect can be started.

  106 to 108 show selection effects executed by the first to third effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment. 106 (a) to 107 (c) and FIGS. 108 (a) and 108 (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first rendering means in the lower stage, The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper part. FIGS. 106 and 107 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 108 (A) and (B) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), and (c) and (C) show the effects of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 106A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game ends, and the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, an effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 106 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 106B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t1, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the characters “M1: May be there ...” at the time t1. The effect A for displaying the column is finished, and the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Further, at time t1, the speaker α of the second effect means ends the effect α in which the song 810 “may be there” ends, and the song name is as shown in FIG. 106 (B). The production β in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows is started. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  FIG. 106 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t2, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” at the time point t2. Is finished, and the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t2, the stage β in which the song 810 of “M2: miracle universe” flows in the speaker 120 of the second presentation means is finished, and as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started. At time t2, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  FIG. 107A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t3, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t3. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107A, the performance of the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 107 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t4. Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” flows continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 107 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t5, the special-figure variable game ends, and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, from time t5, the effect Z for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed from the effect display device 915 is the “princess mode” is executed. In this example, the effect Z (“princess mode”) is displayed simultaneously with the start of the change. The production Z may be started before the fluctuation starts. Further, the effect Z may be started simultaneously with the start of fluctuation. It should be noted that the production Z does not have to be started before the change starts. At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Accordingly, the effect C is continued on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120 as shown in FIG. 107 (C).

  FIG. 108A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. At time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t6, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, an effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” at the time t6. Is finished, and the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” In the production D indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. At time t6, the production γ in which the song 810 of “Kimi no Kakera” flows is finished on the speaker 120 of the second production means, and as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the song title is “Mega! Giga! The production δ in which the song 810 "!" At time t6, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but since the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means are not pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect Z (princess mode) is continued.

  FIG. 108 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t5 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The decorative display of the decorative symbols is displayed in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect C for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t7. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so effect Z (princess mode) continues in effect display device 915 from time t7. To do. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the effect δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  FIG. 109 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 7 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 109 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 109, t0 to t10 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of production. The middle part of FIG. 109 shows the execution state of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 109 shows the execution state of various effects by the third effect means. The third effect means of this example includes an effect display device 915. The second operation means is used to select an effect by the third effect means. The second operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, an effect is selected by the second operation means.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. Further, it is assumed that the first operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start time of the period. In the first operation means, the selectable period continues until at least time t10.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operation means, and until the wait time elapses, the effect is changed. No changes are made. Therefore, the production α is continued at time t1. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at the time t0 or starts the effect X from the time t0. Further, it is assumed that the second operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any of the buttons of the player's setting operation unit 139 or at the start time of the period. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t10. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the waiting time of Ta seconds in the second effect means, the effect B ends and the effect C starts in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the second effect means does not change the effect at the time point t2 and the effect α is continued. At time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from time t1, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the T second standby time in the second effect means, the effect C ends and the effect D starts in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the production α is continued without changing the production in the second production means at the time t3. At a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Production X continues in the third production means.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t3.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Thus, the first effect means continues the effect D, and the second effect means continues the effect α.

  At the time t5 when the standby time Ta seconds elapses from the time t3, there is no depression of the chance button 136 within the period from the time t3 to the time t5, and the time T3 (> Ta) from the time t3 to the next depression of the chance button 136. Since the time t8 has elapsed, the second effect means ends the effect α and starts the effect δ. On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t5, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. At time t6, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect D, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  The time point t7 is the time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t7. At time t7, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect D, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  Further, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t8 after the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect D ends and the effect E starts in the first effect means. . On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the wait time elapses. I will not. Therefore, the production δ is continued at time t8. At a time point t8 when a certain time has elapsed from time t7, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Production Z continues in the third production means.

  The time point t9 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t7 is completed and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t7 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is 0, the 0th effect (ie, effect Z) is selected from effect Z using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t9. At time t9, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect E, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  At time t10 when the waiting time Ta seconds elapses from time t8, there is no depression of the chance button 136 within the period from time t8 to time t10, and time T4 (> Ta) from time t8 to the next depression of the chance button 136. Therefore, the second effect means ends the effect δ and starts the effect ε. On the other hand, the production E is continued in the first production means.

  110 to 113 show selection effects executed by the first to third effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. 110 (a) to 112 (c) and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first rendering means in the lower stage, and FIG. The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper part. 110A to 112C and FIGS. 113A and 113B schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), and (c) and (C) show the effects of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 110A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game ends, and the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, an effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 110 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there ...” flows from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 110 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 109, the time point t1 is a time point when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, the special figure variation game is continuing. In the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: may be there” at the time t1 ends, and the characters “M2: miracle universe” are displayed. Production B displaying the columns is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed since the player operated the first operating means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I will not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), at the time t1, the production α in which the song 810 having the song name “May be there ...” continues. At time t1, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  110 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t2 during the Ta second standby time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the time t2 is selected in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” is finished, and the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta = 1 second), so as shown in FIG. At time t2, the effect is not changed on the speaker 120, and the effect α in which the song 810 having the song name “may be there” continues is played. At time t2, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time Ta (= 1 second) is set from time t2. .

  FIG. 111 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t3 during the Ta second standby time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the time t3 is displayed in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” ends, and the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” In the production D indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 (for example, T2 = 0.8 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta = 1 second), so as shown in FIG. At time t3, the presentation is not performed on the speaker 120 and the production α is continued. At the time t3, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Production display device 915 as the third production means continues production X (Yoshimune mode).

  Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time Ta (= 1 second) is set from time t3. .

  FIG. 111 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t4. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “May be there ...” is continued from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 111 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. At a time point t5 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t4, the decorative symbol variation display is continued in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. At the time t5 when the standby time Ta seconds has elapsed from the time t3, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed within the period from the time t3 to the time t5, so the production α is finished in the second directing means. The production δ is started. As shown in FIG. 111 (C), an effect δ in which a song 810 having a song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows from the speaker 120 is started. On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means. Further, in the third effect means, effect X (Yoshimune mode) continues.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t6 shown in FIG. At time t6, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t6, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. At time t6, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, effect D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t6. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112A, an effect δ in which a song 810 having a song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows from the speaker 120 is continued.

  FIG. 112B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at time t7 shown in FIG. The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t7, the special-figure variable game is finished, and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, from time t7, the effect Z for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed from the effect display device 915 is the “princess mode” is executed. In this example, the effect Z (“princess mode”) is displayed simultaneously with the start of the change. The production Z may be started before the fluctuation starts. Further, the effect Z may be started simultaneously with the start of fluctuation. It should be noted that the production Z does not have to be started before the change starts. At time t7, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the effect D is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows continues on the speaker 120 as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t8 shown in FIG. At time t8, the special figure variation game started at time t0 continues. When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at time t8, the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed at time t8 in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. The effect D to be displayed is ended and the effect E to display the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is started. The character string “M5: hot spring hormone” in the production E indicates the name of the music flowing from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed since the player operated the first operation means. I will not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), at the time t8, the effect δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows is continued. At time t8, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect Z (princess mode) is continued.

  FIG. 113A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t9 shown in FIG. The time point t9 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t7 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t9, the special figure variable game is finished, and the decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 8 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. At time t9, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the effect E is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208. From time t7 to time t9, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so effect Z (princess mode) continues in effect display device 915 from time t9. To do. In addition, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the effect δ in which the song 810 with the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  FIG. 113 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t10 shown in FIG. At a time point t10 when a certain time has elapsed from time t9, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. At the time t10 when the waiting time Ta seconds elapses from the time t8, the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed during the period from the time t8 to the time t10, so the effect δ ends in the second directing means. The production ε is started. As shown in FIG. 113 (B), an effect ε in which a song 810 having a song name “hot spring hormone” flows from the speaker 120 is started. On the other hand, the production E is continued in the first production means. Further, in the third effect means, effect Z (princess mode) continues.

  FIG. 114 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 114 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 114, t0 to t7 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of production. The middle part of FIG. 114 shows the execution state of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. The lower part of FIG. 114 shows execution states of various effects by the third effect means and the fourth effect means. The third effect means of this example includes an effect display device 915, and the fourth effect means includes a lamp 940. The second operation means is used to select an effect in the third and fourth effect means. The second operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, an effect is selected by the second operation means.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. Further, it is assumed that the first operation means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start time of the period. In the first operation means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7. It is assumed that the third effect means is executing the effect X at the time t0 or starts the effect X from the time t0. It is assumed that the fourth effect means is executing the effect χ at the time t0 or has started the effect χ from the time t0. In addition, at time t0, the second operation means is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the player's setting operation unit 139, or at the start of the period. To do. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t7.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect B is started. In the second effect means, the effect α ends and the effect β starts. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. The third effect means continues the effect X, and the fourth effect means continues the effect χ.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect β ends and the effect γ starts.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. On the other hand, the fourth effect means ends the effect χ and starts the effect ψ. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the selection provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 Although the value of the effect counter increases by 1, the effect X continues in the third effect means. On the other hand, in the fourth effect means, the effect ψ ends and the effect ω starts. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, the effect Z is executed from the third effect means from the time point t5. On the other hand, in the fourth effect means, the effect ω ends and the effect ω ′ is started. At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect C, and the second effect means continues the effect γ.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at a time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, the effect C is ended and the effect D is started in the first effect means. In the second effect means, the effect γ ends and the effect δ starts. At time t6, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is pressed, but none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is pressed, so the second operation means No production selection is made. Therefore, the third effect means continues the effect Z, and the fourth effect means continues the effect ω ′.

  The time point t7 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t5 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means is not pressed and the value of the selection effect counter is zero. Therefore, the effect Z is continued in the third effect means from time t7, In the fourth effect means, the effect ω ′ is continued.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection result is reflected periodically (every T seconds) by the third rendering means corresponding to the second operation means. If there is a selection operation during T seconds, it is reflected at the next stage where the effect can be started. In the fourth effect means corresponding to the second operation means, the operation result is immediately reflected.

  115 to 117 show selection effects executed by the first to fourth effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. 115 (a) to 116 (c) and FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first rendering means in the lower stage. The display area of the effect display device 915 included in the effect means is shown in the upper part. 115 (A) to 115 (C) and FIGS. 117 (A) and 117 (B) schematically illustrate the speaker 120 included in the second effect unit and the lamp 940 included in the fourth effect unit. It shows. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), and (c) and (C) show the effects of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game ends, and the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect A in this example, the name of a song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. On the effect display device 915 of the third effect means, an effect X for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed is the “Yoshimune mode” is executed. As shown in FIG. 115 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there ...” is executed from the speaker 120 of the second effect means. Further, the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means executes an effect χ in which the LED of the color corresponding to the effect X (Yoshimune mode) emits light and the character “Yatsushiro” is visually recognized.

  FIG. 115B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from time t0, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t1, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the characters “M1: May be there ...” at the time t1. The effect A for displaying the column is finished, and the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle universe” is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. Also, at the time t1, the production α in which the music 810 “may be there” ends on the speaker 120 of the second production means is finished, and as shown in FIG. The production β in which the song 810 of “Kiseki no Universe” flows is started. At time t1, the player is pressing the chance button 136 of the first operating means, but since none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the effect X is continued in the effect display device 915 of the third effect means. As shown in FIG. 115 (B), the fourth effect means continues the effect χ.

  FIG. 115 (c) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At a time point t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time point t2, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect B that displays the character string “M2: miracle universe” at the time point t2. Is finished, and the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. Further, at time t2, the stage β in which the song 810 of “M2: miracle universe” flows is finished on the speaker 120 of the second presentation means, and as shown in FIG. The production [beta] in which the song 810 of "" flows is started. At time t2, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but the second operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect X is continued. In addition, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the fourth effect means continues the effect χ.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. At a time point t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t3, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. The effect display device 915 displays a character image of “爺” along with a display of “from the next variation to a heel mode”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means, the operation at the setting operation unit 139 is immediately reflected, the effect χ ends, and the effect ψ starts. At time t3, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t3. Also, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the performance of the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 116 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c. When the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means at the time t4, the value of the selection effect counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 increases by 1. However, production X (Yoshimune mode) continues in the third production means. The effect display device 915 displays a character image of “Princess” along with the display “Princess mode from next change”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the operation of the setting operation unit 139 is immediately reflected on the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means, the effect ψ is ended, and the effect ω is started. At time t4, the player is pressing one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means, but the first button is not pressed because the chance button 136 of the first operating means is not pressed. Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the selected effect display area 800, the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” continues at time t4. In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” flows on the speaker 120 continues.

  FIG. 116 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. The time point t5 is a time point when the special figure variation game for T seconds started at the time point t0 ends and the next special figure variation game starts. At the time t5, the special-figure variable game ends, and the decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 7 stops in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. It is displayed, and the next special figure variable game starts immediately after this. The number of times pressed by the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means during the special figure variable game started at time t0 is stored in the selection effect counter. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed by the third effect means based on the number of times of pressing. In this example, since the number of times of pressing is two, the second effect Z (princess mode) is selected from the effect X using the effect list arranged in the order of effects X, Y, Z,. Therefore, from time t5, the effect Z for notifying (displaying) that the background mode being executed from the effect display device 915 is the “princess mode” is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the effect ω ends and the effect ω ′ is started in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means. In the effect ω ′, the LED of the color corresponding to the effect “Z” in the “princess mode” emits light and the character “Yatsushiro” is visually recognized. In this example, after the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z is emitted from the lamp 940 (after the light is emitted at a predetermined brightness), the display of the image of the effect Z (“princess mode”) is completed. . At time t5, the chance button 136 of the first operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the first operation means is not performed. Accordingly, the effect C is continued on the decorative symbol display device 208, and as shown in FIG. 116C, the effect γ in which the song 810 having the song name “Your Fragrance” continues on the speaker 120. Note that the light emission of the lamp 940 and the display of the effect Z may be started at the same time, the display of the effect Z may be started after the light emission of the lamp 940 is started, and the lamp after the display of the effect Z is started. The light emission of 940 may be started. In addition, the lamp 940 may emit the LED of the color corresponding to the effect Z, and at the same time, the display of the effect Z (“princess mode”) may be completed, or the display of the effect Z (“princess mode”) is completed. Later, the lamp 940 may emit an LED of a color corresponding to the effect Z.

  117 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at time t6 shown in FIG. At time t6 when a certain time has elapsed from time t5, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t6, in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, an effect C that displays the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” at the time t6. Is finished, and the production D for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started. The character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” In the production D indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. Also, at time t6, the production γ in which the song “810 of yours” flows through the speaker 120 of the second production means is finished, and as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the song name is “Mega! The production δ in which the song 810 of “!” Flows is started. At time t6, the player presses the chance button 136 of the first operation means, but since the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the second operation means are not pressed, the second Production selection by the operating means is not performed. In the effect display device 915 as the third effect means, the effect “Z” of “princess mode” is continued. As shown in FIG. 117 (A), the effect ω ′ is continued in the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means.

  117 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect display device 915 at the time point t7 shown in FIG. At the time t7, after the special figure variation game is finished, the decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 8 is displayed in the left middle right ornamental symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 of the first effect means. The display is stopped, and the next special figure variation game is started immediately after this. In the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect C for displaying the character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Continues at time t7. From time t5 to time t7, the setting operation unit 139 of the second operating means is not pressed and the value of the selected effect counter is zero, so that the effect Z continues in the effect display device 915 from time t7. Also, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), in the speaker 120 of the third effect means, the effect δ in which the song name 810 “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows continues, and the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means. Then, the production ω ′ is continued. Note that the lamp 940 of the fourth effect means may be the one that executes the selected effect when the next special figure variable game is started, similarly to the effect display device 915.

  FIG. 118 shows temporal operations of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 9 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 118 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. 118, t0 to t9 in the upper stage indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 118 shows the execution state of various effects by the first effect means and the second effect means in order from the top. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The first operation means is used to select an effect by the first and second effect means. The first operation means of this example includes a setting operation unit 139 of the operation means 700, for example. By selecting one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, the effect selection by the first operation means is performed. The lower part of FIG. 118 shows execution states of various effects by the first effect means based on the second operation means. The second operation means of this example includes a chance button 136 of the operation means 700, for example. As described above, in this example, the first effect means executes the selection effect by the first operation means and the second operation means, and two kinds of effects proceed simultaneously.

  First, time t0 is the start time of the special figure variable game. Whether the first effect means is executing effect A at time t0 or starting effect A from time t0, and whether the second effect means is executing effect α at time t0, effect α from time t0 Is assumed to have started. At the time t0, the first operation means is during a selectable period in which an effect can be selected by pressing any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 by the player, or at the start of the period. To do. The selectable period of the first operating means continues at least until time t9. Further, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect X or starting effect X from time t0. In addition, it is assumed that the second operating means at the time point t0 is during a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start point of the period. In the second operating means, the selectable period continues at least until time t9.

  When the player depresses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the first effect means ends the effect A and the effect. B is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operation means, and until the wait time elapses, the effect is changed. No changes are made. Therefore, the second effect means continues the effect α at time t1. At time t1, any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation unit is pressed, but the chance button 136 of the second operation unit is not pressed, so the second operation unit No production selection is performed. Accordingly, in the first effect means, the effect B is started and the effect X is continued.

  Further, when the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at the time point t2 during the waiting time of Ta seconds in the second effect means, the first effect means The production B is finished and the production C is started. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the second effect means does not change the effect at the time point t2 and the effect α is continued. At a time t2 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t1, the chance button 136 of the second operating means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operating means is not performed. Therefore, in the first effect means, effect C is started and effect X is continued.

  Furthermore, when any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 is pressed at the time point t2, the waiting time that has been started in the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing any of the previous buttons 139a to 139e is measured. Is reset, and a new waiting time is set from time t2.

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the T second standby time in the second effect means, the effect C ends and the effect D starts in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time Ta, the production α is continued without changing the production in the second production means at the time t3. At a time t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t2, the chance button 136 of the second operation means is not pressed, so that the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. Accordingly, the first effect means starts the effect D and continues the effect X.

  Further, when any one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 at the time point t3 is pressed, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing any one of the previous buttons 139a to 139e is reset, and a new one is started from the time point t3. Is set to the waiting time.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the second operation means at a time t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the first effect means ends the effect X and starts the effect X ′. At time t4, the player presses the chance button 136 of the second operation means, but the first operation means does not press any of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139, so the first Production selection by the operating means is not performed. Therefore, the first effect means continues the effect D with the start of the effect X ′, and the second effect means continues the effect α.

  At time t5 when the standby time Ta seconds has elapsed from time t3, none of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 is pressed during the period from time t3 to time t5, and the setting operation unit 139 is next from time t3. Any one of the buttons 139a to 139e is pressed at time t7 when the time T3 (> Ta) has elapsed, so that the production α is finished and the production δ is started in the second production means. On the other hand, the production D and the production X ′ are continued in the first production means.

  The time point t6 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t0 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. In addition, for the production by the first production means related to the second operation means, the production is changed with a predetermined probability as the special figure variable game is started. In the first effect means, the effect X ′ ends and the effect Y starts at time t6. Accordingly, the first effect means continues the effect D with the start of the effect Y, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  Further, when the player presses one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means at a time point t7 after the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the first effect means Then, the production D is finished and the production E is started. On the other hand, in the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed from the time when the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the effect is not changed until the wait time elapses. I will not. Therefore, the production δ is continued at time t7. At time t7, since the chance button 136 of the second operation means is not pressed, the effect selection by the second operation means is not performed. In the first production means, production Y is continued with the start of production E.

  The time point t8 is a time point when the special figure variation game for Tb seconds started at the time point t6 is finished and the next special figure variation game is started. The production of the first production means related to the second operation means is changed with the start of the special figure variation game with a predetermined probability. The production Y continues without being changed. Accordingly, the first effect means continues the effect E together with the effect Y, and the second effect means continues the effect δ.

  At time t9 when the standby time Ta seconds has elapsed from time t7, there is no depression of each button 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 within the period from time t7 to time t9, and the next setting operation unit 139 from time t7. Since the time T4 (> Ta) has elapsed until any one of the buttons 139a to 139e is pressed, the second effect means ends the effect δ and starts the effect ε. On the other hand, the production E and the production Y are continued in the first production means. As described above, in this embodiment, the third effect means in the seventh embodiment is changed to the first effect means, and an example in which a plurality of selected effects are displayed on the first effect means is shown. Yes. It should be noted that the timing at which the effect is switched may be at the start of fluctuation. In addition, the timing at which the effect changes is when the symbol stops (decoration symbol stops and shakes or when the symbol on the special symbol display device stops), or when a big hit starts (a big hit is displayed in the display area). For example, when the round lamp is lit), when the big hit ends (when the big hit end effect is displayed in the display area, when the round lamp is turned off, etc.) For example, 10 seconds) may have elapsed.

  FIG. 119 shows a selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the ninth embodiment. 119 (a) and 119 (b) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 119 (A) and (B) of FIG. 119 schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. 119 (a) and (A), (b) and (B) in FIG.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 between the time point t3 and the time point t4 shown in FIG. FIG. 119 (A) shows an effect performed by the speaker 120 between time t3 and time t4 shown in FIG. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable game by a special symbol variable game is executed. In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by arrows in the figure). On the lower right side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a selection effect display area 800 is provided. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect of displaying the song code and song name of the song that can be output from the speaker 120 is performed. At a time point between time point t3 and time point t4, an effect D in which a character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 is executed. Below the selected effect display area 800, a character string 955 “Change BGM with direction keys” is displayed to notify that the effect D can be changed to another effect. The direction key is one of the buttons 139a to 139e of the setting operation unit 139 of the first operation means. An effect display area 950 is provided on the lower left side in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 950, an effect X in which a character image of “Yoshimune mode” and a character image of “Tono-sama” are displayed under the character is executed. Below the effect display area 950, a character string “mode change by chance button” is displayed to notify that the effect X can be changed to another effect. FIG. 119 (A) shows that an effect α in which a song 810 with a song name “may be there” is played on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 119 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 between the time point t4 and the time point t5 shown in FIG. FIG. 119 (B) shows an effect performed by the speaker 120 between time t4 and time t5 shown in FIG. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable game by a special symbol variable game is executed. In the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (indicated by arrows in the figure). At a time point between time t4 and time t5, effect D in which a character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed in selected effect display area 800 is executed. Below the selected effect display area 800, a character string 955 “Change BGM with direction keys” is displayed to notify that the effect D can be changed to another effect. In the effect display area 950, an effect X 'in which a character "Yoshimune mode next change to 爺 mode" and a character image of "爺" is displayed below the character is executed. In this example, the characters “Yoshimune mode next change to 爺 mode” and “爺” character image are displayed simultaneously. Note that the character image of “爺” may be displayed after the characters “Yoshimune mode next change to 変 動 mode” are displayed, and vice versa. Below the effect display area 950, a character string “mode change by chance button” is displayed to notify that the effect X ′ can be changed to another effect. FIG. 119 (B) shows that an effect α in which a song 810 with a song name “may be there” is played on the speaker 120.

  FIG. 120 shows temporal operations of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 120 shows a time series, and time passes from left to right. In the upper part of FIG. 120, t0 to t4 indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. The middle part of FIG. 120 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The production means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the operation means includes, for example, a chance button 136.

  First, at time t0, the production means is executing one production (first production) A or starts production A from time t0, and the production means further produces the other production (second production) α. It is assumed that the production α is started from the time point t0. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. In the present embodiment, the effect selection is always possible during a predetermined period (t0 to t4). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect means ends one effect A and starts the effect B at the time t1. The other effect is such that the effect is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operating means, and the effect is not changed until the waiting time elapses. I will not. Therefore, at the time t1, the production α is continued with the start of the production B.

  When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time point t2 during the waiting time of T seconds, one effect B is ended and the effect C is started. Since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the standby time T, the effect α is continued at the time point t2 without changing the other effect.

  Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  At the time point t3 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from the time point t2, the effect means continues one effect C and the other effect α ends and the effect γ starts.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that a plurality of selection effects are performed by one effect means with respect to the selection effects described in the fourth embodiment. Also in the present embodiment, one effect is immediately reflected on the selected effect, and the other effect is not started until the standby time has elapsed after selection. In other words, if the predetermined time period T seconds has not passed since the selection, the selected effect is not started in the other effect, and the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately can be prevented. There is.

  Time t4 indicates the end time of the selectable period during which the effect can be selected by the operation means. For example, the special figure variable game from time t0 to time t4 includes a selectable period, but the special figure variable game from time t4 includes a nonselectable period. Hereinafter, the case where the time point t4 is the start time of the special figure variable game and the special figure variable game is not selectable will be described. If the time T2 from the time t2 to the time t4 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 is longer than the waiting time T from the time t2, the effect means executes the other effect γ from the time t3 to the time t4. Further, the special figure variation game from time t4 is also executed. From time t4, one effect C ′ is started as one effect. If the time T2 from the time t2 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 to the start time t4 of the next special figure variable game is shorter than the waiting time T from the time t2, the other effect is not changed.

  FIG. 121 shows a selection effect executed by the effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the tenth embodiment. 121A to 121D show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the effect means. 121 (a) to 121 (d), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 0 in the left middle right decoration symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c as a result of the special figure variable game. Has been. In this example, at least a selection effect can be executed while the symbol is changing and when the symbol is stopped. It should be noted that the selection effect may be executed only while the symbol is changing, and the selection effect can be executed only when the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t0 and time t1 shown in FIG. Production A is executed as one production. In the production A, the character image 965 of “Tono-sama” is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is executed as the other production. In the effect α, a horizontally-long rectangular mode display area 960 is defined in the upper right corner of the display area, and a character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 121 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t1 and time t2 shown in FIG. Production B is executed as one production. In effect B, the character image 965 of “爺” is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is continued as the other production, and the character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 121 (c) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t2 and time t3 shown in FIG. Production C is executed as one production. In effect C, the “princess” character image 965 is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is continued as the other production, and the character string “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 121 (d) shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 between time t3 and time t4 shown in FIG. As one effect, the effect C continues and the “princess” character image 965 is displayed using the entire background of the display area. In addition, the production α is finished and the production γ is executed as the other production. In the effect γ, a character string “princess mode” is displayed in the mode display area 960.

  FIG. 122 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Modification 1 of Example 4 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 122 shows a time series, and time has passed from left to right. 122, t0 to t5 and tv to ty in the upper part of FIG. 122 indicate various operations or points in time when the production starts or ends. The middle part of FIG. 122 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  First, at time t0, the first effect means is executing effect A or starting effect A from time t0, and at time t0, the second effect means is executing effect α or from time t0. It is assumed that the production α has started. Further, it is assumed that at time t0, the operation means is in a selectable period in which the player can select an effect by pressing the chance button 136 or at the start of the period. Production selection is always possible during a predetermined period. In this example, it is always possible to select effects during the entire period, but for example, it is possible to select effects only in the first round of the big hit game, for example, or it is possible to always select effects only during a predetermined special figure variation game It may be. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time t1 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t0, the effect A ends and the effect B starts at the first effect means from the time t1. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, the production α is continued at time t1.

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t2 during the waiting time of T seconds in the second effect means, the effect B is ended and the effect C is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 is shorter than the waiting time T, the production α is continued without changing the production at the second production means at the time t2.

  Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by the first sub-control unit 400 by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t2. The

  Further, when the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time point t3 during the T second standby time in the second effect means, the effect C ends and the effect D starts in the first effect means. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 is shorter than the standby time T, the production α is continued without changing the production at the second production means at the time t3.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time is set from time t3.

  At time t4 when the waiting time T seconds has elapsed from time t3, the second effect means ends the effect α and starts the effect δ. On the other hand, the production D is continued in the first production means.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect means reflects the selected effect immediately, and the second effect means does not reflect unless the standby time elapses after selection. In other words, if the predetermined time period T seconds has not passed since the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, thereby preventing the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately. There are cases where it is possible.

  The time point tv is the time point when the decorative symbol in the special figure variable game is stopped and displayed. Time t5 is a time when a predetermined Ta seconds have elapsed from time tv. When the time T3 from the time t3 to the time t5 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 is longer than the standby time T from the time t3, the second effect means executes the effect δ from the time t4 to the time t5. Is done. The second production means stops the production for a certain period from time t5. When the second rendering means is the speaker 120, a silent state is entered. In terms of control, a command for making a sound may be output from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control 400. When the time T3 from the time point t3 to the time point t5 when the player last pressed the chance button 136 is shorter than the waiting time T from the time point t3, the effect α in the second effect means is not changed.

  The time point tw is a time point when Tb (> Ta) seconds have elapsed from the time point tv. From the time tw, the first effect means ends the effect D and starts the effect D ′. The effect D ′ is, for example, a demonstration screen (demo screen). When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at a time tx when a certain time has elapsed from the time tw, the effect D ′ is ended and the effect E is started in the first effect means. On the other hand, the stopped state of the effect continues in the second effect means.

  A point in time ty when a certain time has elapsed from the point in time tx is a start point of the special figure variable game. When the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc ≧ T, the effect ε is started from the time point ty by the second effect means. When the period Tc is Tc <T, the production δ starts with the second production means from the time ty.

  123 to 125 show the selection effects executed by the first effect means and the second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the first modification. 123 and 124 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 125 (a) to (c) show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 123 and 124 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 125 (A) to (C) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  FIG. 123A shows an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the time t0 shown in FIG. Before the time point t0, the special figure variation game has been executed. In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 2 is displayed in a swinging manner in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, and the decoration 5 is displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b. Is displayed in a swinging manner, and decoration 0 is displayed in a swinging manner in the right decorative design display area 208c. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 123 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 123B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is in progress, the decoration 2 is displayed in the stopped state in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, the decoration 5 is displayed in the stopped state in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b, and the right decorative symbol is displayed. The decoration 0 is displayed in a stopped state in the display area 208c. In the selected effect display area 800, the effect A is continued. As shown in FIG. 123 (B), the effect α is continued from the speaker 120 at the time point t0.

  FIG. 123 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t1 shown in FIG. At time t1, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player presses the chance button 136 at the time point t1, the effect A ends in the selected effect display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the first effect means, and is referred to as “M2: miracle universe”. Production B for displaying the character string is started. On the other hand, in the second production means, the production is changed on the condition that a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operation means, and the production is performed until the standby time has elapsed. No changes are made. Therefore, at the time t1, as shown in FIG. 123C, the effect α is continued from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 123D shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t2 shown in FIG. At time t2, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time t2 during the T second waiting time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the effect B is displayed in the selected effect display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time t2. At the end, the production C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. On the other hand, the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time T (for example, T = 1 second), so as shown in FIG. At time t2, the production is not changed at the speaker 120, and the production α is continued.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t2, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t2. .

  FIG. 124 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3 shown in FIG. At the time point t3, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the decorative symbol in a stopped state. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the operating means at a time point t3 during the T second standby time on the speaker 120, “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is displayed on the selection screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t3. An effect D for displaying a character string is executed. On the other hand, since the time T2 from the time point t2 to the time point t3 (for example, T2 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the standby time T, as shown in FIG. The production α is continued without being performed.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed at time t3, the measurement of the standby time started by pressing the previous chance button 136 is reset, and a new standby time T (= 1 second) is set from time t3. .

  FIG. 124 (b) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t4 shown in FIG. At the time t0, the special figure variation game is in progress, the decoration 2 is displayed in the stopped state in the left decorative symbol display area 208a, the decoration 5 is displayed in the stopped state in the middle decorative symbol display area 208b, and the right decorative symbol is displayed. The decoration 0 is displayed in a stopped state in the display area 208c. At the time t4 when the waiting time T seconds have elapsed from the time t3, the speaker 120 has finished the production α in which the music 810 whose title is “May be there ...” has ended, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). In addition, the production δ in which the song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows is started. On the other hand, the effect D is continued in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The time tv shown in FIG. 122 is the time when the decorative symbol in the special figure variable game is stopped and displayed. Time t5 is a time when a predetermined Ta seconds have elapsed from time tv. FIG. 124 (c) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t5 shown in FIG. On the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect D is continued. Also, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the effect is stopped at the speaker 120 from the time point t5 and the sound becomes silent. Note that when Ta seconds have elapsed since the special figure fluctuation stop, not only the speaker 12 is silenced, but another BGM may be played. Also, when making silence, the volume may be gradually decreased, or the volume may be decreased at a stroke.

  FIG. 124 (d) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point tw shown in FIG. The time point tw is a time point when Tb (> Ta) seconds have elapsed from the time point tv. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect D is ended and the effect D ′ is started from the time point tw. The effect D ′ includes an effect by a demonstration screen including the characters “Yoshimune”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 124D, the speaker 120 is kept silent at time tw.

  FIG. 125A shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point tx shown in FIG. At the time tx, the effect on the speaker 120 is silent after the time tw. If the player presses the chance button 136 of the operating means while the demo screen is displayed at this time tx, the demo screen disappears, and the decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 208a in the special figure variable game. An image is displayed in which the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and the decoration 0 is stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 208c. In addition, the selection effect display area 800 is displayed again, and the effect E for displaying the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is started. On the other hand, in the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of T seconds has elapsed since the player operated the operating means. No change is made. Therefore, at the time point tx, the speaker 120 maintains a silent state as illustrated in FIG. As described above, in this example, if a selection operation is performed while the demo screen is displayed, the demo display is canceled and the symbol display screen is displayed. However, after the demo screen is displayed for a certain period of time, the symbol display screen is displayed. You may make it do. Further, the selection operation may not be performed while the demonstration screen is displayed.

  FIG. 125B shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time ty shown in FIG. The time point ty is a time point when the special figure variation game is started after a time period of Tc seconds from the time point tx. In the selection effect display area 800, the effect E for displaying the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is continued. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, when the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc ≧ T with respect to the standby time T, as shown in FIG. The production ε in which the song 810 having the song name “hot spring hormone” flows is started.

  FIG. 125 (c) also shows the effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time ty shown in FIG. In the selection effect display area 800, the effect E for displaying the character string “M5: hot spring hormone” is continued. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, when the period Tc from the time point tx to the time point ty is Tc <T with respect to the standby time T, as shown in FIG. A production δ in which a song 810 having the song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is started.

  FIG. 126 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Modification 2 of Example 4 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 126 shows time series, and time has passed from left to right. 126, t0 to t5 in the upper stage indicate various operations, or the start and end times of effects. 126 shows the execution state of various effects by the effect means. The first effect means of this example includes a decorative symbol display device 208, and the second effect means includes a speaker 120. The lower part shows the operating means. The operation means of this example includes a chance button 136, for example.

  This modification is characterized in that, in addition to the operation shown in the fourth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, the first and second rendering means display an error. For this reason, since the time operation shown in FIG. 126 is the same as the time operation shown in FIG. 95 of the fourth embodiment except for the error display, the description of the same operation will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 126, when an error state occurs in the pachinko machine 100 at a certain time between time t0 and time t1, the first effect means displays an error together with the selected effect. The error display is performed until a time after time t5 when the error state disappears. As shown in FIG. 126, the second effect means outputs an error sound together with the selected effect in synchronism with the error display performed by the first effect means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 126, the error display and the output of the error sound are started simultaneously, but the error image may be displayed first and the error sound may be output after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Or vice versa. In addition, an error image is displayed first for an error output pattern that always outputs an error display and an error sound, and if the error state is not resolved even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds from error detection), the error sound is displayed. May be output, or vice versa. That is, an error output pattern that cancels a delayed output when the error state is resolved may be used. Further, the error sound may continuously flow until the error state is canceled, or the output of the error sound may be terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the error state.

  FIG. 127 shows a selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 in the second modification. 127A to 127D show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 127 (A) to (D) schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  127 (a) shows an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. At the time point t0, the special-figure variable game is finished, and in the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 of the first effect means, the decoration 0 to decoration 9 are displayed from the top in the left middle right decorative design display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, respectively. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the images that move sequentially downward (indicated by downward arrows in the figure). In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a selection effect display area 800 is provided in a horizontally-long rectangular frame shape. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect A is displayed in which a character string “M1: Might be there ...” is displayed. In the selection effect in this example, the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120 is displayed in characters. As shown in FIG. 127 (A), at the time point t0, an effect α in which a song 810 having a song name “may be there” is played from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 127 (b) shows the effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from time t1 to time t2 shown in FIG. Time t1 is the time when the player presses the chance button 136. At time t1, the special figure variation game is continuing. In the selected effect display area 800 of the first effect means, the effect A that displays the character string “M1: may be there” at the time t1 ends, and the characters “M2: miracle universe” are displayed. Production B displaying the columns is started. The character string “M2: miracle universe” in the production B indicates the title of the song flowing from the speaker 120. On the other hand, in the speaker 120, the effect is changed on the condition that the waiting time of Ta seconds has elapsed since the player operated the first operation means. I will not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), at the time t1, the production α that the song 810 having the song name “may be there ...” is continued. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state from a certain time point between the time point t0 and the time point t1, and as shown in FIG. 127 (b), in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special image is displayed together with the effect A at the time point t1. An error display in which the character string of “error !!” is displayed with a higher contrast than the effect related to the floating game is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the speaker 120 outputs a sound error sound 830 that notifies “error !!” with a sound larger than the effect α together with the effect α at the time point t1. In this example, the display of “error !!” on the decorative symbol display device and the output of error sound from the speaker are started simultaneously. Note that an error sound may be output from the speaker after “error !!” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device. After the error sound is output from the speaker, “error !!!!” is output on the decorative symbol display device. May be displayed. In addition, while the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, the error sound 830 is output from the speaker 120 together with the output of the production α 810 of the production α as described above, but the output of the music 810 is eliminated and only the error sound 830 is output. You may not hear it. Furthermore, the way of outputting the music 810 and the error sound 830 may be changed depending on the content of the error state. For example, in the case of “ball full tank error of lower plate 128” for mainly informing the player, the error notification can be ended by the player moving the ball from the lower plate to the box. The volume may be lower than the error sound 830 or the same state, and both the music 810 and the error sound 830 may be output, or “door opening error” that needs to be notified to at least the game clerk as well as the player. In the case of “payout error”, “magnet detection error”, etc., it is a serious error that needs to be confirmed by the store clerk, so only an error sound may be output.

  FIG. 127 (c) shows the effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 from time t2 to time t3 shown in FIG. At time t2, the special figure variation game is continuing. When the player depresses the chance button 136 of the first operation means at the time t2 during the Ta second standby time on the speaker 120 of the second effect means, the time t2 is selected in the selection effect display area 800 of the first effect means. Then, the effect B for displaying the character string “M2: miracle of miracle” is finished, and the effect C for displaying the character string “M3: Your Fragrance” is started. The character string “M3: Your Fragrance” in the production C indicates the name of the song that flows from the speaker 120. On the other hand, since the time T1 from the time point t1 to the time point t2 (for example, T1 = 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the waiting time Ta (for example, Ta = 1 second), as shown in FIG. At time t2, the effect is not changed on the speaker 120, and the effect α in which the song 810 having the song name “may be there” continues is played. Further, the error state of the pachinko machine 100 continues, and as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a higher contrast than the effect related to the special figure variable game at the time t2. An error is displayed with a large string of “Error!”. As shown in FIG. 127 (C), at the time point t2, the speaker 120 outputs a sound error sound 830 that informs “error !!” with a sound larger than the effect α.

  FIG. 127 (d) shows the effects performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from time t4 to time t5 shown in FIG. At a time point t4 when a certain time has elapsed from the time t3, the decorative symbol variation display continues in the left middle right decorative symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c. In the selected effect display area 800, an effect D for displaying a character string “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Is performed at time t4. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), an effect δ in which a song 810 having a song name “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows from the speaker 120 is performed. Further, the error state of the pachinko machine 100 continues, and as shown in FIG. 127 (d), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a higher contrast than the effect related to the special figure variable game at the time t4. An error is displayed with a large string of “Error!”. Also, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), at the time t2, the speaker 120 outputs a sound error sound 830 that indicates “error !!” with a sound larger than the effect δ, at the time t2. As described above, the selection effect can be performed even in the error state, but the selection effect may not be performed in the error state. Further, there may be a case where a selection effect can be performed for each error content, and a case where the selection effect display area 800 may not be displayed during the error, and at least a part or all of the selection effect is displayed due to the error display. May be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized).

  128 shows another example of the selection effect executed by the first and second effect means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification. 128 (a) to (d) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 included in the first effect means. 128A to 128D schematically show the speaker 120 included in the second rendering means. In each figure, (a) and (A), (b) and (B), (c) and (C), and (d) and (D) show the production of the same period, respectively.

  128 (a) and (A) show the effects performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time point t0 shown in FIG. 126, and the same effect operations as those shown in FIGS. 127 (a) and (A) are performed. Yes.

  128 (b), (B) to 128 (d), (D), the time points of the production correspond to FIGS. 127 (b), (B) -127 (d), (D), respectively. . In FIGS. 127 (b) to 127 (d), the selection effect display area 800 is displayed even during the error state so that the selection effect can be performed. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 128 (b) to 128 (d), an error display image indicating that an error has occurred in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The selection effect cannot be performed during the error state. Note that even when the selection effect display area is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the selection effect may be performed. In this example, the display of the error display image on the decorative design display device and the output of the error sound from the speaker are started simultaneously. After the error display image is displayed on the decorative design display device, an error sound may be output from the speaker. After the error sound is output from the speaker, the error display image is displayed on the decorative design display device. You may make it do.

  Next, Example 11 to Example 19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 146. First, a configuration that is used in common among the configurations illustrated in the drawings used in the following embodiments will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (g). FIG. 129 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, and a universal map display device that constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 210, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and general figure holding lamp 216 are schematically shown. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are shown below the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 2 display device 214 is shown on the right side of the special figure 1 display device 212, and the universal figure display device 210 is shown on the right side of the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special figure 2 display device 214, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 is shown on the universal map display device 210. Shown on the top. The special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the universal map display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are shown in white. The illuminated portion is shown in black. In addition, since the maximum number of the usual figure hold in this embodiment can be accumulated, four LEDs of the usual figure hold lamp 216 are provided.

  In FIG. 129 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c for performing decorative display variation display and stop display are assigned to the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the predetermined display is executed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, the lower right corner as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t3 for ordinary symbols, the middle side is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special symbols 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display region t2 for special symbols 2. It is. When the special figure 1 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◯” as the special figure 1 fourth symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. While the special figure 2 variable game is not in operation, an image representing “Δ” is displayed in the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area t2 as the special symbol 2 fourth symbol. While the usual figure variable game is not in operation, an image representing “◇” is displayed in the fourth figure display area t3 for ordinary figures as the fourth figure of the ordinary figure. Further, during the execution of the special figure variable game or the normal figure variable game, a white background image is displayed as the fourth symbol in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3.

  A region surrounded by a square frame at the lower center of the effect display region 208d is a variation icon display region C in which variation icons can be displayed. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area C when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variation icon in the variation icon display area C, whether or not the special figure variation game is successful can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notice). The frame image on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area C may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area C). It may be displayed constantly or may not be displayed at all times. Further, only the hold icon may be displayed without displaying the fluctuation icon.

  A horizontally long rectangular figure 1 holding icon display area A is provided adjacent to the change icon display area C on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of holds are displayed. Further, according to the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold is appropriate can be notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the display mode with the lowest reliability. In this embodiment, up to four special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area A. A plurality of special figure 1 hold icons are arranged and displayed in order from right to left in the special figure 1 hold icon display area as the holding order decreases. In this example, only the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed, but the special figure 2 hold icon display area may be displayed together. In that case, for example, a vertically long rectangular special figure 2 reserved icon display area B is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 hold icon display area B is not displayed when there is no special figure 2 hold, and is displayed only when the special figure 2 hold is accumulated, but may be always displayed. Good. During the promiscuous electric power supply support, it is easy for a game ball to enter the special figure 2 start port 232, so that the player can easily visually recognize the special figure 2 hold icon displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area B. As described above, the display position of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the display position of the special figure 2 hold icon display area B are switched.

  In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 indicates that the special figure 1 variable display is being performed (see FIG. 129 (b)). The same applies to the special figure 2 display device 214 and the universal figure display device 210. Further, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the execution of the special symbol variable game is indicated by a downward arrow (see FIG. 129 (f)).

  FIG. 129 (g) shows a state where a button effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means. The display of the button effect includes a display related to the chance button 136 as the first type of display. Among the displays related to the chance button 136, there is a button display. In the button display, an operation request image having a display form imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter may be referred to as “button image”) and a button operation acceptance valid period (hereinafter referred to as “operation valid period”). At least one of an effective period image indicating the remainder of (there is) and a display prompting other button operations is included. In addition, the display of the button effect can include an effect display such as a notice notice executed in conjunction with the button display as the second display. The display of the button effect is performed by any one of still image display and animation display or a combination of them. The effective period image in the present embodiment is an image (for example, a meter (gauge) image) that changes the display mode from the start position to the end position with the passage of time. A countdown display may be used.

  The special figure variable game and jackpot game shown in the following embodiments are executed by the same control operation as described in the above embodiments. In the following embodiments, the effects performed in the special figure variation game and the big hit game will be specifically described, and the control operation will be referred to only when the necessity arises.

(Example 11) A special figure variable game and a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133. First, an example of a flow of a series of effects when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 (a) to FIG. 130 (h) show special figure variable games in this order in this order. In the figure showing the special figure variation game in time series, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the variable games of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are not operating and the normal game is not operating. The special figure 1 display device 212 stops displaying the special figure “Special figure F”. The special figure 2 display unit 214 stops and displays the special symbol “special figure d”. The general-purpose display device 210 stops and displays the symbol “General-purpose B”. Each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the fourth symbol indicating that the game is inactive. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the previous special symbol variable game is wrong has been missed. Yes.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 reports that there are two special figure 1 holds. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that there is no special figure 2 hold. A general hold lamp 216 informs that there is no general hold.

  In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, two special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  FIGS. 129 (b) to (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 variable game is started in the same manner as the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display. The fourth symbol in the region t1 starts to display a variation (see FIG. 129 (b)), and then a special animation 1 holding icon reduction animation is displayed (see FIGS. 129 (c) to (e)). Then, the decorative symbol variation display is started (see FIG. 129 (f)). Note that the order of the start time of these operations may be changed.

  In the display of the special figure 1 hold icon decreasing animation, the displayed special figure 1 hold icons start to move rightward all at once (see FIG. 129 (c)), and the special order 1 with the highest hold order is displayed. The hold icon a1 goes over the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and enters the variable icon display area C, and the remaining hold icons move to the right one position from the original position to raise the hold rank by one respectively. (See FIGS. 129 (c) to (e)). An icon image that has entered the variation icon display area C is referred to as a variation icon.

  FIG. 129 (g) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long button effect area is secured in the center of the effect display area 208d, a character image is displayed in the left quarter of the button effect area, and a button image is displayed in the remaining three quarters. And button display for displaying a valid period image. The validity period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the back side of the button effect area is hidden by the image of the button effect area and cannot be visually recognized. By seeing the image shown in FIG. 129 (g), the player knows that the button effect has started. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, the player cannot enter the button operation. Even if 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 129 (h) shows a button operation acceptance permission state after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 129 (g) started. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation valid period has started at this stage, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 129 (i) shows a state where the button operation acceptance effective period has slightly passed and the bar-shaped portion of the display of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the right direction.

  FIG. 129 (j) illustrates a button effect display performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the press is accepted. The button image and the effective period image are erased, and an image of the character string “Chance!” Is displayed in the right quarter of the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be a notice of the result of the special figure variation game. Further, it may be a notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect ends with the display of the character string image.

  FIG. 129 (k) shows a state in which the button effect area disappears and the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is visible.

  In FIG. 129 (l), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the swinging variation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol variation display is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state where the reach production is started is shown.

  FIG. 129 (m) shows a state where the image display of the reach effect gradually changes to the entire white display by the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area, and the decorative symbol variation is reduced and displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the fluctuation icon display area C, and the fluctuation icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 129 (m) to 130 (h).

  FIG. 129 (n) to FIG. 130 (a) show a state where an SP reach effect with a scene where two samurai fight is executed. FIGS. 130 (b) to 130 (d) are continuations of the SP reach production, in which an effect that one samurai has won has been made, and it is highly probable that the result of the determination of whether or not the change is correct will be a hit. doing. FIG. 130 (d) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in a reduced size.

  FIG. 130 (e) shows a state where the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display by the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 130 (f), the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 130 (g) shows a state in which “Special Figure A” of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 in the image display area, the fourth graphic indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating a hit as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 130 (h) is a big hit start display, and shows a state in which a character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed almost over the entire image display area and it is notified that the 15R special big hit has been won. In this embodiment, if the determination result is special figure A, and the decoration symbol is a combination for probability variation big hit, the big hit start display is displayed as “probability big hit”, and the result is determined as special figure A or special figure. In FIG. B, when the decorative symbol is a combination for big hit, the big hit start display is displayed as “big hit”.

  FIGS. 130 (f ′) to (h ′) are the same as those in FIG. 129 (l), when the reach effect of “decoration 6” is started in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In place of the effects of FIGS. 130 (f) to 130 (h), an effect in the case of winning 15R jackpot is illustrated. FIG. 130 (f ′) continues from FIG. 130 (e). In FIG. 130 (f ′), the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is temporarily displayed as a combination of the ornamental symbols. It shows the state.

  FIG. 130 (g ′) shows a state in which “Special Figure B” of the big hit symbol is stopped on the Special Figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” indicating a winning combination as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 130 (h ′) shows a state in which a “big hit” character string image is displayed on almost the entire image display area, and it is notified that the 15R big hit has been won.

  131 (a) to 131 (b) exemplify the continuation of another SP reach production continued from FIG. 130 (a), where one samurai has lost the production, and whether or not the change is appropriate is determined. A notice is given that the result is likely to be out of sync. The special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the special figure 1 hold icon are not displayed during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (c). FIG. 131 (b) shows a state in which the combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped at “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in a reduced size.

  FIG. 131 (c) shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to a white display by the fade-out process. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 131 (d), the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of ornamental symbols. Indicates the state. In this state, the display of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, the special figure 1 hold icon, the variable icon display area C, and the variable icon is resumed and is displayed until the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 131 (h). The

  FIG. 131 (e) shows a state in which the special symbol “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, the fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is not operating is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” indicating a deviation as a combination of ornamental symbols is stopped and displayed.

  131 (f) to 131 (h) show the display of the fluctuation icon erasing animation. In this example, after the special figure variable game is finished, the display of the change icon deletion animation is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. Note that the display of the animation for deleting the variation icon may be executed at another timing. FIG. 131 (f) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon starts to move downward from the fluctuation icon display area C and the lower third of the circular outline of the fluctuation icon has disappeared outside the image display area. Yes. FIG. 131 (g) shows a state in which the variation icon has moved further downward and the variation icon has disappeared outside the image display area to such an extent that the upper part of the circular outline can be slightly recognized. FIG. 131 (h) shows a state in which the variation icon has completely disappeared from the variation icon display area C and the display of the variation icon erasure animation has been completed. It should be noted that the deletion animation of the variation icon may be performed during symbol variation, for example, at the timing before one decorative symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol) is temporarily displayed. The timing after a temporary stop display of a symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol) may be performed, or may be the timing before or after a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol fluctuates. It may be the timing before or after being displayed.

  Next, an example of the flow of an effect when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit and the big hit game is executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “big hit effect”) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. 132 (a) to 132 (g) show the jackpot effects in this order in chronological order. A speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure of FIG. In the figure showing the big hit effect in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 132 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 130 (h) continued from FIG. 130 (g). Almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the 15R special big hit has been won. ing. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that there is one special figure 1 hold.

  While the character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed in the effect display area 208d, in principle, no sound flows from the speaker 120, but BGM or SE (sound effect: sound effect) for notifying the 15R special big hit, etc. May be output, BGM or SE output during the 15R special jackpot round may be output, or an effect that has been performed before being notified that the 15R special jackpot has been won, such as SP reach The BGM output in the middle big hit finalizing effect may be continuously output.

  FIG. 132 (b) shows a state in which the jackpot effect (the effect including the second effect and the fourth effect described later) in the 15R special jackpot game is started in the first round. On almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a second effect (effect H ') in which a movie in which a princess character appears is displayed from the beginning (first). From the speaker 120, the music of the 4th production (production O ') corresponding to the 2nd production is flowing from the head of music. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. In this embodiment, the character string image “1R” and the symbol combination “decoration 7” constitute a part of the big hit effect. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 132 (c) shows a state in which the big hit effect of the 15R special big hit is continued, the second round to the tenth round have already been completed, and the big hit effect in the eleventh round is being executed. In the effect display area 208d, the last scene of the movie is displayed, and the ending of the song flows from the speaker 120. In addition, a character string image of “11R” is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “11”. In addition, before the eleventh round of big hit game is started, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 has one to four holdings of special figure 1 due to the winning of three balls in the special figure 1 starting port 230. It has been reported that it has increased. Thereafter, the first round of the big hit effect by the movie and the song ends.

  FIG. 132 (d) shows a state in which the first round of the big hit effect is completed and the second round of the big hit effect by the movie and the song is started during the eleventh round. In the effect display area 208d, a movie in which a princess character appears is displayed from the top, and music is played from the top of the speaker 120.

  Effects such as movies and songs may be repeatedly executed. In addition, when the effect is repeatedly executed, control to return from the end point of the effect to the start point of the effect, such as setting a loop in the effect data, or control to return to the middle part of the effect from the end point of the effect It may be. Moreover, you may make it the data in which an effect is repeated be performed.

  FIG. 132 (e) shows a state in which the big hit effect is continuously executed in the fifteenth round which is the final round. Even after the final round is over and the attacker 234 is closed, the big hit effect is executed for a certain period of time. A character string image of “15R” is displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify that the number of rounds is “15”. In addition, due to the passing of four game balls through the general start opening 228 by the time of the big hit game of the 15th round, the general figure 46 hold lamp 216 has changed the normal figure hold from zero to four. An increase is reported.

  In the interval from the end of the final round and the closing of the attacker 234 to the start of the jackpot end effect shown in FIG. 132 (f) described later, the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot round is executed for a certain period. Also good. In this case, the jackpot effect may be continuously executed only on the speaker 120, or the jackpot effect may be continuously executed only on the effect display area 208d. Here, the fixed period may be a period shorter than the interval, a period having the same length as the interval, or a period longer than the interval. Also, the big hit effect may be executed halfway through the big hit end effect, or may be executed until the end of the big hit end effect. In the interval, the big hit effect may be stopped, deleted, interrupted, ended, or stopped.

  FIG. 132 (f) shows a state in which the big hit end effect for notifying that the big hit game has ended is started. A character string image of “probability change entry” is displayed in the left third area of the effect display area 208d, a samurai character image is displayed in the remaining one third area, and the jackpot ends from the speaker 120. It is notified that the BGM for production flows and shifts to the probability fluctuation state.

  The effect display area 208d and the speaker 120 of the decorative symbol display device 208 may continue to execute the same effect as the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot round during the jackpot end effect, or may be executed during the jackpot round. An effect different from the big hit effect may be executed. Further, only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 may continuously execute the same effect as the big hit effect executed during the big hit round.

  FIG. 132 (g) shows a state during a waiting time for starting to display a special figure to be described later. For a period before a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) elapses after the condition device activation signal described later is turned off, the “decoration 7” displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c before the start of the big hit game is displayed. The combination of the decoration symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed again. A character string image “probably changing” is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. In addition, a fourth symbol indicating that the game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. Since the probability change is in progress, the display positions of the special figure 1 hold icon display area A and the special figure 2 hold icon display area B are switched. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area A, four special figure 1 hold icons are displayed in a white circular display mode. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area B, no special figure 2 hold icon is displayed. Also, the next special figure variation game has not started.

  A jackpot production with a promising jackpot (playing when the game state after the jackpot is a special figure high-predictive figure and a high-promise) and other big jackpot effects (the game state after the big jackpot is special Alternatively, for the special drawing high-probability normal drawing high-definition, different effects may be performed, or the same effects may be performed. In addition, even if the gaming state after the big hit ends in a special figure high-precision ordinary figure high-predictive state, the jackpot big hit effect and a part or all of the gaming state after the big hit ends in a special figure low-predictive normal figure high-precision It may be the same. Further, the effect may be continuously executed during the interval.

  Next, in order to determine the execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect shown using FIGS. 132 (b) to 132 (e), FIG. 132 (a) and FIG. 132 (b). The jackpot effect performed in the interval will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (h) are selected in this order from the first effect and the third effect, and the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as the fourth effect). , Sometimes referred to as “effect selection effect”). Moreover, FIG. 133 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  A speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure of FIG. In FIGS. 134 to 136, 138 to 144, and 146 thereafter, the speaker 120 is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment and the subsequent embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 that is a display means is used as an example of the first effect means, and the speaker 120 that is a sound output means is used as an example of the second effect means. is there.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. Nearly the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect display area 208d, and a horizontally-long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. Almost the entire area of the frame image is a display area for movie playback. In addition, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The effect title indicates the movie name of the movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the song name of the song that can be selected as the third effect executed by the speaker 120. As will be described later, the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In the effect selection effect in the present embodiment, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. Further, the third effect is selected and executed during the third period. In both of the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 133 (h) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 133 (a) is started. This is a period from the completion of the fade-out process shown until the end of the effect selection effect.

  In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select an effect” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, a character string image of “Select” is displayed, and it is informed that an effect executed as a selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. . In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second image executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It informs that it is possible to determine the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In the frame image, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. Production H is being executed. At the beginning of production H, the beginning (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to the present embodiment. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started. Thereafter, in this example, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started. However, the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. Moreover, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the music may be started at the same time.

  FIG. 133 (b) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed, and the player has operated the first direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O. FIG. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. It should be noted that an effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process, and an effect next to effect H (for example, effect I) may be executed immediately. The same applies to the examples of effects in which the subsequent fade-out process is executed, and the effect executed next to the effect that is being executed may be executed immediately without executing the fade-out process. .

  In the present embodiment, the movie production by the movie and the song are synchronized and finished at the same time. However, the movie production may be erased first, and the song may be erased thereafter, and vice versa. Also good. Moreover, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the music may be started at the same time. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  In the present embodiment, display (or display between effects and effects) by the fade-out process in FIG. 133B is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). Here, when the operation of the direction key 139 is further performed (for example, 0.02 seconds after the start of the display) during the display by the fade-out process of FIG. After the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133 (b) is completed (that is, after 0.1 seconds elapses), an effect selection effect of FIG. 133 (g) described later may be executed, and the fade-out of FIG. 133 (b) is performed. The display by the process is terminated in the middle (for example, the display by the fade-out process in FIG. 133 (b) is completed in 0.02 seconds), and the display by the fade-out process in FIG. 133 (f) is performed for the remaining time (for example, The display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133 (b) may be terminated in the middle (for example, the display by the fade-out process of FIG. 133 (b) may be performed. It ends at .02 sec), the predetermined time period the display by fade-out process in Fig. 133 (f) (e.g., may be 0.1 seconds) performed as. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 133 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process has been executed. The execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, execution of an effect I that displays a movie in which a character with the name of the movie “Kiseki no Universe” appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period Is started. At the beginning of the production I, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, a song with the title “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of productions displayed during the third period. Production P is started. The movie is started from the beginning of the production I (the start timing of the first period), and the production P is started from the speaker 120 after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the production I (for example, 0.5 seconds later). On the contrary, the output of the music by the speaker 120 is started from the beginning of the production P, and the production I is started after a predetermined period from the start of the production P (for example, 0.5 seconds later). The production I and the production P may be started in synchronization with the start timing of the first period.

  In the present embodiment, the production of the movie effect by the moving image is started, and the music is started after a lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the movie effect, but the reverse may be possible. Moreover, the movie production by the moving image and the song may be started in synchronism, or the movie production by the moving image and the song may be started at the same time. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  133 (d) to (e) show a state in which an effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is being executed following FIG. 133 (c). In this example, the player then operates the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

  FIG. 133 (f) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed, and the player has operated the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect I and effect P. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 133 (g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. The execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, an effect that displays a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period H is executed. At the beginning of the production H, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started.

  In this example, the player then presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect H started in FIG. 133 (g) is determined as the first effect, and the effect O started in FIG. 133 (g) is determined as the third effect. The title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. Further, by pressing the chance button 136, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 133 (i) is determined, and executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 133 (i). A fourth performance is determined. If the effect is determined, the effect that is being executed is stopped, the movie displays the first still image displayed, and the BGM or sound for determination may be output. And / or the movie being executed may be executed as it is. The timing at which the effect is stopped may be the timing at which the effect is determined (for example, FIG. 133 (g)), but the timing at which display by the fade-out process is being performed (for example, FIG. 133 (h)). It may be the timing when the display by the fade-out process ends. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 133 (h) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is ended by pressing the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. As a result of the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible and enters a stopped state. In synchronism with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 becomes gradually smaller and becomes silent (stopped), making it impossible to hear the performance O. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the third effect, and the first period and the third period are also ended.

  With the end of the effect selection effect, the movie image display, the character string image of “Please select effect”, the direction key image, and the button image are not displayed, but the character image of “1R” and “decoration 7” The big hit effect by the display of “” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 133 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (c). It shows the same state. In the second period starting from FIG. 133 (i), a movie in which the princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears from the top (first) on almost the entire display area 208d. The second effect (effect H ′) is executed. Thus, since the effect H is the same movie as the effect H ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Further, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 133 (i), the fourth production in which the song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120, corresponding to the second production. (Production O ′) is executed. As described above, the effect O is the same song as the effect O ′, and therefore the third effect is an effect included in a part of the fourth effect. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described in a control manner as follows. The decorative symbol display device 208 executes, for example, a plurality of effects such as effects H and effects I in the first period in which the effect selection effect is executed (the period shown in FIGS. 133A to 133H). One of the effects H and I is the first effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed in the first period, the first sub control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed in the second period (a period starting from FIG. 133 (i)). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the first effect in the first case (when the chance button 136 is pressed during the first period in which the first effect is being executed), and the second effect is displayed. In this period, the effect executed in the second period is executed from the beginning.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect (effect H ′) executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect H ′ is the head. Since the game table is started again from the above, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, since the production H ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first performance (production H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 has been accepted. .

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the fourth effect (effect O ′) executed in the fourth period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect O ′ is the head. Since the game is started again from the above, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature of the speaker 120. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the fourth period has started. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the third effect (production O) being executed is stopped, so that it may be easy for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 is accepted. .

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect (effect H ′) in the effect display area 208d from the top. May be able to be easily recognized. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the first effect (production H) being executed is stopped, so that it is easy for the player to visually confirm that the press of the chance button 136 is accepted. There is a case.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player recognizes audibly that the fourth period has started by starting the production O ′ executed in the fourth period from the beginning. May be easier to do. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the third performance (production O) being executed is stopped, so that it is easy for the player to aurally confirm that the press of the chance button 136 is accepted. There is a case.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect executed in the second period and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period are determined at the same time. During the period until the chance button 136 is pressed in the third period, at least a part of the first effect (effect H) by the effect display area 208d is executed and the third effect (effect O) by the speaker 120 is executed. In some cases, the player can be more entertained by executing at least a part of. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect being executed in both the speaker 120 and the effect display area 208d stops halfway, so that the player is more aware that the chance button 136 has been pressed. It may be easier to recognize.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third effect can be determined from a plurality of effects such as the effect O and the effect P, so that the player may be entertained.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by the plurality of production means of the speaker 120 and the decorative symbol display device 208 (production display area 208d).

  In the present embodiment, the effect selection effect is executed in the first round (1R) in the big hit, but may be executed in other rounds (2R, 3R,..., The final round). In the following embodiments, the effect selection effect may be executed in other rounds.

  In the present embodiment, one production selection effect is executed by one big hit production, but a plurality of production selection productions may be executed by one big hit production. In the following embodiments, a plurality of effect selection effects may be executed in one big hit effect.

  In the present embodiment, the once determined effect cannot be changed again, but the once determined effect may be changed again. It should be noted that, even in the following embodiments, the once determined effect may be changed again.

  In this embodiment, after a still image is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the movie effect is selected, the selected effect movie is displayed. The display may be executed, or may be executed after (or immediately after) the production is selected. Also in the following embodiments, the movie effect may be displayed as described above.

  In this embodiment, the selected effect is executed when a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the effect in which the music flows is selected, but may be executed simultaneously with the selection of the effect. , It may be executed after (or immediately after) the production is selected. Also in the following embodiments, the effect that the music flows as described above may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, even when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect (second effect or fourth effect) is determined when the specific round (1R in this example) is completed. To be. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection period (first period or third period) may not be terminated until the big hit ends. That is, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, an effect selection screen (effect selection effect) may be displayed at all times until the end of the big hit.

  The jackpot effect selected in the present embodiment may be continuously executed from the first round to the fifteenth round, or the above-mentioned effect selection effect is executed every round and the jackpot executed every round. An effect may be selected.

  It should be noted that the production data such as a song or a movie executed in the production selection production may be the same data as the production data executed as the selected jackpot production, or different data may be used. . If the same data is used, the part to be executed during the production selection effect may be specified.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed before the end of the first round after the first round is started as in this example, the effect selection effect may be ended even before the end of the first round. Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 136, the effect selection effect may be executed continuously during the period from the start of the first round to the end.

  In addition, in the case where an effect that can be selected in the effect selection effect is one effect (for example, the movie α and the song A corresponding to the movie α), if the selection operation with the direction key is performed, the display by the fade-out process is performed. After the execution, the one effect (for example, movie α and song A corresponding to movie α) may be started again from the beginning, and the subsequent effect before the display by the fade-out process is executed. You may be made to do.

  Note that when the effect that can be selected in the effect selection effect is one effect (for example, the movie α and the song A corresponding to the movie α), the selection operation by the direction key may not be performed. In this case, the direction key image displayed in the effect display area 208d and the character string image of “Select” are displayed differently from the state in which the selection operation can be performed (for example, different colors and transparency from when the “Select” character can be selected). Display the directional key image in a different color or transparency than when it is selectable, or erase one of the directional key image and the “Select” character string image and display the other. The direction key image and the character string image of “Select” may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the effect that can be selected in the effect selection effect is one effect (hereinafter referred to as effect X. For example, movie α and song A corresponding to movie α), an effect that can be selected in the future (hereinafter referred to as effect Y). ) Is displayed (for example, the area of the frame image), and the cursor is moved from the effect X to the region where the effect Y is displayed by operating the direction key, and only the determination operation is restricted. You may make it do. Here, in the area where the effect Y is displayed, the display related to the effect Y (for example, the display of a still image such as a song title or a movie) is different from the case where the effect Y can be selected (for example, a frame image). The background is gray, the still image is displayed in black and white), but the effect Y is displayed in the same manner as when the effect Y can be selected. Also good. In addition, a display (for example, a display in which “??????” is described in the frame image) is displayed in a region where the effect Y is displayed, so that the fact that the effect Y can be selected is not displayed. Also good.

  The first period is ended when the chance button 136 is operated, and the display by the fade-out process in FIG. 133 (h) may be executed in the second period. In addition, the first period is ended after the display by the fade-out process is completed (immediately) or simultaneously with the end, and the second period is started after the first round of FIG. 133 (i) is started (immediately) or simultaneously. It may be.

  Next, Modification 1 of the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (h) are time series showing the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. FIG. 134 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Moreover, since the effect display mode in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present modification is the same as the effect display mode of the eleventh embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 134 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. The effect H is executed in the frame image, and the title of the effect “may be there” is displayed below the effect H. The effect title indicates the movie name of a movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At the beginning of production H, the beginning (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, BGM for effect selection flows from the speaker 120. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification. The production selection BGM may start from the prelude. In the following embodiments, the production selection BGM may be started from the prelude or may not be started.

  FIG. 134B shows a state in which the effect H has shifted from still image display to moving image display after a predetermined time has elapsed. A BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 134 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is executed, the movie effect by the moving image is continuously executed in the frame image, and the effect selecting BGM continues to flow from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 134D shows a state in which a fade-out process has been performed in the frame image after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the effect H has started. In the present modification, when the player does not operate the direction key 139 until a predetermined time elapses, a fade-out process for interrupting a movie effect by a moving image is executed. When the fade-out process is started, the frame image gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible during the movie effect. On the other hand, BGM for effect selection flows from the speaker 120 continuously.

  FIG. 134 (e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. The frame image is a default effect mode in which the top image of the movie of effect H is displayed as a still image. Further, a BGM for selecting an effect continues to flow from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 134 (f) shows a state in which the effect H has shifted from still image display to moving image display after a predetermined time has elapsed. A BGM for effect selection continues to flow from the speaker 120. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect H started from FIG. 134 (e) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 134 (i) is determined.

  FIG. 134 (g) shows the state of the effect selection effect after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the movie production by the moving image is interrupted, and the top image of the movie is displayed in a still image state. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is also displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. Thereby, it is notified that the production H is determined as the first production. Further, a BGM for selecting an effect continues to flow from the speaker 120. The production H may be still image display or may be shifted to video display.

  FIG. 134 (h) shows a state in which the fade-out process is executed following the notification that the effect H is determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136. As a result of the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible and enters a stopped state. In synchronism with this, the BGM flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent (stopped), making it impossible to hear the performance O. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are completed.

  FIG. 134 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 134 (i), the second effect (effect H ′) is executed on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d. Thus, since the effect H is the same movie as the effect H ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Also, from the speaker 120, a song corresponding to the second effect (song name “may be there”) flows from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect H ′ that is executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect is restarted from the top, so It is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the symbol display device 208. In addition, since the production H ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first performance (production H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 has been accepted. .

  Next, a second variation of the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (h) show the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. FIG. 135 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the eleventh example in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present modification will be omitted.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is the name of the song. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area, and in the center of the music display area, the name of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area is “Kiseki no Universe” A character string image is displayed.

  In this modification, the outer periphery of the selectable area of the music is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the names of the songs that can be selected, and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed larger. ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that by pressing the chance button 136, the music as the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 135 (i) described later can be determined. ing.

  As described above, in this example, the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139 by the player. However, regardless of whether or not the player operates the direction key 139, a certain period (for example, 5 Each time (second), the song name displayed in the song selection display area and the song name displayed in the song display area may be automatically switched. In the following embodiments, song names may be automatically replaced every time a certain period elapses.

  In this modification, the music that can be selected by the operation of the direction key 139 can be changed, and the music performed in the big hit effect can be determined by pressing the chance button 136 thereafter. By changing the music that can be selected by long-pressing the chance button 136 or scrolling the touch panel (not shown), and then pressing the chance button 136 once or tapping the touch panel, the second You may make it determine the music performed in a period. In the following embodiments, the above operation may be performed.

  FIG. 135 (b) shows that a song whose title is “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. A state in which the execution of the effect O flowing from the top is started is shown. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139. The selectable music is changed by the operation.

  FIG. 135 (c) shows a state immediately after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139. The song name “may be there” displayed in the song selection display area is moved and displayed in the song display area, and the song name “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song display area is displayed in the song selection display area. Is moved and displayed. Until a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses immediately after selection, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound.

  In FIG. 135 (d), a song with the title “Kiseki no Universe” from the speaker 120 is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. The state where the execution of the flowing effect P is started is shown. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 135 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed in the music selectable area, and a character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed in the music display area. No music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound.

  FIG. 135 (f) shows a song whose title is “may be there” from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. Shows a state in which the execution of the production O flowing from the top is started. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 135 (f) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 135 (i) is determined.

  FIG. 135 (g) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes (stops) the execution of the effect O, and a decision sound that informs the player that the second effect has been determined flows. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the music selectable area changes to black, and the character string image “may be there” changes to a white display, thereby giving the player a second indication. It is notified that the production O ′ has been determined as the production.

  FIG. 135 (h) shows a state in which the fade-out process is executed following the notification that the effect O is determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136 and the effect O ′ is determined as the second effect. ing. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first period ends.

  At the end of the production selection production, the character string image of “Please select a song”, the direction key image, and the button image will be hidden, but the “1R” character string image and “decoration 7” display will be a big hit The production continues to be executed.

  FIG. 135 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 135 (i), the speaker 120 executes the second effect (effect O ′) from the beginning of the song. Thus, since the effect O is the same music as the effect O ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O ′ to be executed in the second period is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the speaker A gaming table with 120 features can be realized. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first performance (production H) being executed is stopped when the chance button 136 is pressed, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the press of the chance button 136 has been accepted. .

  In addition, in a state where the production O is being executed, the player selects the production P by performing the first operation of the direction key 139, and immediately after that, the second operation of the direction key 139 is performed again quickly. When selected, the song of the selected effect O may be started from the continuation of the song of the effect O that was executed immediately before, or may be started from the beginning. In this case, the music of the effect P selected by the first operation may or may not flow.

(Example 12) FIG. 129 to FIG. 132 regarding the special figure variable game and jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment (provided that FIG. 132 (b) is the second round) This will be described with reference to FIG. Since FIGS. 129 to 132 have been described in the eleventh embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted here.

  The jackpot effect performed in the period between FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b) in order to determine the execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect will be described using FIG. . The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (i) are selected in this order from the first effect and the third effect, and the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game are selected. Are shown in time series. FIG. 136 (j) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  136 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect has been started. As an example of the first effect means, almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which is a display means is an effect display area 208d, and a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. ing. Almost the entire area of the frame image is a display area for movie playback. In addition, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The title of the effect is a movie name of a movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and a third that is executed by the speaker 120 that is a sound output means as an example of the second effect means. The song names of songs that can be selected as production are shown. As will be described later, the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In the effect selection effect in the present embodiment, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. Further, the third effect is selected and executed during the third period. In both the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 136 (i) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 136 (a) is started (effect display area). 208d completely changes to white) and the effect selection effect ends.

  In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select an effect” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, a character string image of “Select” is displayed, and it is informed that an effect executed as a selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. . In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second image executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It informs that it is possible to determine the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In the frame image, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. Production H is being executed. At the beginning of production H, the beginning (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to the present embodiment. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started. However, the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized.

  136 (b) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139 while the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O is being executed. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 136 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is executed. The execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, execution of an effect I that displays a movie in which a character with the name of the movie “Kiseki no Universe” appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period Is started. At the beginning of the production I, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, a song with the title “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of productions displayed during the third period. Production P is started.

  136 (d) to 136 (e) show a state in which an effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is being executed following FIG. 136 (c). In this example, the player then operates the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

  FIG. 136 (f) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect I and effect P. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 136 (g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. The execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, an effect that displays a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period H is executed. At the beginning of the production H, the first (first) image of the movie is displayed in a paused state (still image state). At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 starts the song with the song name “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. The execution of the production O flowing from is started.

  In this example, thereafter, the first round ends without the chance button 136 being pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect H started in FIG. 136 (g) is determined as the first effect at the end of the first round, and the effect O started in FIG. 136 (g) is the third effect. It is determined as a production. As described above, the title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, the second presentation to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 136 (j) is determined by the end of the first round, and is executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 136 (j). A fourth performance is determined.

  FIG. 136 (h) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed. A period between FIG. 136 (h) and the next FIG. 136 (i) is called an inter-round interval. The character string image “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds. Here, the interval between rounds will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 (a) is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the jackpot game. In FIG. 137 (a), in order from the top, the special symbol changing signal, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special electric accessory releasing signal, the special electric accessory operating signal, the attacker 234, An attacker solenoid signal is shown.

  Special symbol changing signal, condition device activation signal, accessory continuous activation device activation signal, special electric accessory release signal, special electric accessory activation signal are signals as seen from the game rules. If it is on, the special symbol display device is in operation, and if it is off, it is inactive (stopped). If the condition device activation signal is on, the attacker 234 is operating (opening operation, maintaining the open state, closing operation, maintaining the closed state), and if off, it is not operating (closing). . In addition, if the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is ON, the special electric accessory has been activated a plurality of times. The special electric accessory release signal is a signal that maintains the open state of the special electric accessory. If the special electric accessory operating signal is on, the attacker 234 is in the opening operation, maintaining the open state, or in the closing operation, and if off, the attacker 234 is in the closing state. The special symbol fluctuation signal, the condition device activation signal, the accessory continuous activation device activation signal, the special electric accessory release signal, and the special electric accessory activation signal are signals output to an external device (for example, a hall computer). It is.

  The “open” of the attacker 234 shown in FIG. 137 (a) corresponds to the opening operation or maintaining the open state, and the “closed” of the attacker 234 corresponds to the closing operation or maintaining the closed state. Also, the attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 137 (a) is a signal for maintaining the open state, which is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the attacker 234. An arrow A in FIG. 137 (a) corresponds to a fixed display time of a special symbol stop symbol. The arrow B corresponds to a jackpot game start effect time (a jackpot start display time). Arrow C corresponds to the closing operation time of the attacker 234. The arrow D corresponds to a jackpot game end effect time (a jackpot end display time). The arrow E corresponds to the special display fluctuation display waiting time, and when there is a special figure 1 or special figure 2 suspension, the special symbol fluctuation starts after the fluctuation display start waiting time elapses. (See the dotted line portion of the signal).

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure changing signal is turned off, the timing when the condition device activation signal is turned on, or the accessory continuous actuation device activation signal is It may be the timing when the special electric accessory release signal is first turned on, or the timing when the special electric accessory operating signal is first turned on. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the attacker 234 starts the first opening, or the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the jackpot game may be the timing when the condition device operation signal is turned off, the timing when the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off, or the condition device operation signal. And / or when the accessory continuous actuating device activation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the special electric accessory release signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the instrument continuous signal When the actuator activation signal is on, it may be the timing when the special electric instrument operating signal is finally turned off from the on state, or the condition apparatus activation signal and / or the accessory continuous actuator activation signal may be In the case of being on, it may be the timing when the attacker 234 last changed from “open” to “close”, the condition device activation signal and / or the service item. When the continuous operation device operation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the attacker solenoid signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device operation signal and / or the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off. May be the timing at which the variable waiting time has elapsed.

  FIG. 137 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. Even if the special electric accessory release signal is turned off, the special electric accessory operating signal remains on for a while (here, the period of arrow a). During the period indicated by the arrow a, the attacker 234 performs a closing operation and an opening end effect (for example, a display effect) of the attacker 234 is executed. Note that the period indicated by the arrow a may be only the period during which the attacker 234 performs the closing operation. The period of the arrow b elapses from when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off to when it is turned on. The interval between rounds corresponding to the interval between rounds may be a period indicated by an arrow b shown in FIG. 137 (b) or a period obtained by combining the arrows a and b shown in FIG. May be.

  The opening period of the attacker 234 (open state maintaining period) shown in FIG. 137 corresponds to a period (long period) in which the game ball can easily enter, and hereinafter, the opening of the attacker 234 during this period will be referred to as a packer. is there. On the other hand, there are cases where the opening period of the attacker 234 is a period (short period) in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Hereinafter, the opening of the attacker 234 during this period may be referred to as a paca.

  The start timing of one round may be when the special electric accessory release signal is turned on or when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned on, and the attacker 234 is released. The case may be a case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned on.

  The end timing of one round may be when the special electric accessory release signal is turned off or when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off, and the attacker 234 is closed. The case may be the case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 136 (h), the round display such as “1R” is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the round interval. During the interval between rounds, the round display of “finished round” may be continuously displayed, and when the next round is started, the round display of “next round” may be displayed. In this case, the round display of “finished round” may be deleted, and the next round display may be displayed during the interval between rounds. It should be noted that in the embodiments before and after this, the same display as described above may be displayed for the round display in the interval between rounds.

  The timing at which the presentation in the present embodiment is determined is after the attacker 234 is closed, but may be the same as the timing when the attacker 234 is closed, from when the attacker 234 is closed until the attacker 234 is opened again. It may be determined between the time when the attacker 234 is reopened and the time when the attacker 234 is opened again.

  In the present embodiment, after the next round (2R) of the specific round is started, the effect selected in the specific round (1R) is started, but the effect selected simultaneously with the end of the specific round. May be started, may be started after (or immediately after) a particular round, or may be started during an inter-round interval.

  When an effect is selected just before the end of the effect selection period (the period from the start to the end of 1R), the effect may not be executed, or the effect may be executed. For example, it may be 0.4 seconds before the end of the round.

  In this embodiment, when it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) has entered the attacker 234, or when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the attacker 234 was opened, Is terminated (the attacker 234 is closed). In this case, the rendering means may end the execution of the selected rendering before a certain period of time has elapsed since the attacker 234 was opened (for example, 28 seconds have passed since the attacker 234 was opened).

  As shown in FIG. 136 (h), when the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed, the movie effect by the moving image is interrupted and stopped, and the first image of the movie is displayed as a still image. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is also displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. Thereby, it is notified that the production H is determined as the first production. In addition, no music flows from the speaker 120, and the speaker 120 is silent (stopped). The production H may be still image display or may be shifted to video display. In addition, when the production H shifts to the moving image display, the execution of the production O in which a song having a song name “may be there” flows from the head may be started from the speaker 120.

  In this example, after the first round is finished, the effect H is determined as the first effect, and the effect O is determined as the third effect. As described above, the title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, when the first round is completed, the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 136 (j) is determined, and in the fourth period starting from FIG. 136 (j). A fourth performance to be executed is determined.

  FIG. 136 (i) shows a state in which the first round has ended and the second round has started, and the effect selection effects by effects H and effects O have ended. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round is finished, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first period and the third period are ended.

  With the end of the effect selection effect, the movie image display, the character string image of “Please select effect”, the direction key image, and the button image are not displayed, but the character image of “2R” and “decoration 7” The big hit effect by the display of “” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 136 (j) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started after the attacker 234 is released in the second round, and FIG. The same state as FIG. 132 (b) following c) is shown. In the second period starting from FIG. 136 (j), the movie in which the princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears from the top (first) on almost the entire display area 208d. The second effect (effect H ′) is executed. Thus, since the effect H is the same movie as the effect H ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. Further, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 136 (j), the fourth effect in which the song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120, corresponding to the second effect. (Production O ′) is executed. As described above, the effect O is the same song as the effect O ′, and therefore the third effect is an effect included in a part of the fourth effect. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described in a control manner as follows. The decorative symbol display device 208 executes a plurality of effects such as effects H and effects I, for example. One of the effects H and I is the first effect. The first effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot period (the period shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to (i)). The jackpot is composed of, for example, a plurality of rounds from the first round to the fifteenth round, and one of the plurality of rounds is the first round. The first sub-control unit 400 performs in the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 136 (j)) in the first period (the period shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to (i)). It is a means to determine. The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends. The first sub-control unit 400 determines an effect to be executed in the second period when the first round is completed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 ends the first presentation in the first case (when the first round is finished during the first period in which the first presentation is executed), and the second period. Then, the effect to be executed in the second period is executed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect H ′ to be executed in the second period is determined when the first round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the decorative design A game stand having the characteristics of the display device 208 can be realized. In addition, since the production H ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Further, since the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped when the first round ends, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round has ended.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O ′ to be executed in the fourth period is determined when the first round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the speaker 120 It is possible to realize a game stand with features. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the fourth period has started. Furthermore, since the third performance (production O) being executed is stopped when the first round is ended, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round has ended.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect (effect H ′) in the effect display area 208d from the top. May be able to be easily recognized. In addition, when the first round ends, the first effect (effect H) being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to visually confirm that the first round has ended.

  Also, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player recognizes audibly that the fourth period has started by starting the production O ′ executed in the fourth period from the beginning. May be easier to do. In addition, when the first round is completed, the third performance (production O) that is being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to visually confirm that the first round has ended.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second effect executed in the second period and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period are determined at the same time. During the period until the first round ends in the third period, at least a part of the first effect (effect H) by the effect display area 208d is executed and the third effect (effect O) by the speaker 120 is executed. The player may be more entertained by executing at least a part. In addition, when the first round is finished, the effect being executed in both the speaker 120 and the effect display area 208d stops halfway, so that it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the first round has ended. There is.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third effect can be determined from a plurality of effects such as the effect O and the effect P, so that the player may be entertained.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by the plurality of production means of the speaker 120 and the decorative symbol display device 208 (production display area 208d).

  In the present embodiment, even when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect (second effect or fourth effect) is determined when the specific round (1R in this example) is completed. To be. If the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect selection period (first period or third period) may not be terminated until the big hit ends. That is, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, an effect selection screen (effect selection effect) may be displayed at all times until the end of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the effect is determined when the chance button 136 is pressed or a specific round is completed, but the effect may be determined only when the chance button 136 is pressed. Further, the effect may be determined only when a specific round is completed.

  The jackpot effect selected in the present embodiment may be continuously executed from the first round to the fifteenth round, or the above-mentioned effect selection effect is executed every round and the jackpot executed every round. An effect may be selected.

  It should be noted that the production data such as a song or a movie executed in the production selection production may be the same data as the production data executed as the selected jackpot production, or different data may be used. . If the same data is used, the part to be executed during the production selection effect may be specified.

  As described in FIG. 133, when the chance button 136 is pressed before the end of the first round, the stage selection effect is ended even before the end of the first round. Good. Further, as in this example, when the chance button 136 is not pressed during the period from the start of the first round to the end, the effect selection effect is continuously executed until the end of the first round. May be. The effect selection effect may be ended only in one of the cases described above.

  Next, a variation of the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 138 (a) to 138 (i) show in time series the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. FIG. 138 (j) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the twelfth embodiment in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modification will be omitted.

  FIG. 138 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is the name of the song. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area, and in the center of the music display area, the name of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area is “Kiseki no Universe” A character string image is displayed.

  In this modification, the outer periphery of the selectable area of the music is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the names of the songs that can be selected, and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed larger. ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that by pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to determine the music as the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 138 (j) described later. ing.

  In this modification, the music to be executed in the jackpot effect is determined by the end of the first round. Instead, for example, the music to be executed in the jackpot effect is determined by pressing the chance button 136. May be. Further, by changing the music that can be selected by long-pressing the chance button 136 or scrolling the touch panel (not shown), and then pressing the chance button 136 once or tapping the touch panel, You may make it determine the music performed in a period. In the following embodiments, the above operation may be performed.

  FIG. 138 (b) shows that a song whose title is “may be there” is output from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. A state in which the execution of the effect O flowing from the top is started is shown. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139. The selectable music is changed by the operation.

  FIG. 138 (c) shows a state immediately after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139. The song name “may be there” displayed in the song selection display area is moved and displayed in the song display area, and the song name “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song display area is displayed in the song selection display area. Is moved and displayed. Until a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses immediately after selection, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound.

  FIG. 138 (d) shows that a song whose title is “Kiseki no Universe” from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period has elapsed from the beginning. The state where the execution of the flowing effect P is started is shown. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 138 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed in the music selectable area, and a character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed in the music display area. No music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound.

  FIG. 138 (f) shows that the song title “may be there” from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. The state where the execution of the production O in which the music flows from the top is started is shown.

  FIG. 138 (g) shows a state where an effect selection effect by effect O is being executed. In this example, the first round ends without the chance button 136 being pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O. When the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effect O is stopped by the end of the first round, and the effect O that starts in FIG. 138 (f) and ends in FIG. 138 (g) is determined as the first effect. . Moreover, the 2nd effect performed in the 2nd period started from FIG.138 (j) is determined by completion | finish of a 1st round.

  FIG. 138 (h) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is finished. A period between FIG. 138 (h) and the next FIG. 138 (i) is called an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the character string image “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds. When the first round is ended, the execution of the effect O is ended (stopped) in the speaker 120, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the second effect has been determined flows. In addition, the inside of the music selectable area is changed to black, and the character string image “may be there” is changed to a white display, so that the effect O ′ is determined as the second effect for the player. Inform you.

  FIG. 138 (i) shows a state in which the first round is finished, the second round is started, and the effect selection effect is finished. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round is finished, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed and the first period ends.

  At the end of the production selection production, the character string image of “Please select a song”, the direction key image, and the button image will be hidden, but the “2R” character string image and “decoration 7” display will be a big hit The production continues to be executed.

  FIG. 138 (j) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and FIG. 132 (b) (however, FIG. 132 (2) following FIG. 132 (c). b) shows the same state as in the second round). In the second period starting from FIG. 138 (j), the speaker 120 executes the second effect (effect O ′) from the beginning of the song. Thus, since the effect O is the same music as the effect O ′, the first effect is an effect included in a part of the second effect. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect O ′ to be executed in the second period is determined when the first round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the decorative design A game stand having the characteristics of the display device 208 can be realized. In addition, since the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may easily recognize that the second period has started. Furthermore, since the first effect (effect O) being executed is stopped when the first round is ended, it may be easier for the player to confirm that the first round has ended.

  In addition, in a state where the production O is being executed, the player selects the production P by performing the first operation of the direction key 139, and immediately after that, the second operation of the direction key 139 is performed again quickly. When selected, the song of the selected effect O may be started from the continuation of the song of the effect O that was executed immediately before, or may be started from the beginning. In this case, the music of the effect P selected by the first operation may or may not flow.

(Example 13) FIGS. 129 to 132 (FIG. 132 (b) is assumed to be the second round) regarding the special figure variable game and jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIG. Since FIGS. 129 to 132 have been described in the eleventh embodiment, description thereof will be omitted here.

  With reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot effect performed in the period between FIG. 132 (a) and FIG. 132 (b) in order to determine execution of the jackpot effect including the second effect and the fourth effect will be described. . The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (h) are the effect selection effects in which the first effect and the third effect are selected in this order, and the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game are selected. Are shown in time series. Further, FIG. 139 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures.

  FIG. 139 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. As an example of the first effect means, almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which is a display means is an effect display area 208d, and a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. ing. Almost the entire area of the frame image is a display area for movie playback. In addition, a character string image indicating the title of the effect is displayed below the display area. The title of the effect is a movie name of a movie that can be selected as the first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208, and a third that is executed by the speaker 120 that is a sound output means as an example of the second effect means. The song names of songs that can be selected as production are shown. As will be described later, the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. Further, the third effect is selected and executed during the third period. In both the first period and the third period in this embodiment, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 139 (h) from the point in time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 139 (a) is started (effect display area). 208d completely changes to white) and the effect selection effect ends.

  In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select an effect” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. Below the direction key image, a character string image of “Select” is displayed, and it is informed that an effect executed as a selectable effect can be changed to another effect by operating the direction key 139. . In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second image executed in the second period started after the end of the first period. It informs that it is possible to determine the effect and the fourth effect executed in the fourth period started after the end of the third period. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  Corresponding to the movie in which the princess character with the movie name “may be there” appeared as one of the multiple effects displayed during the first period in the frame image An effect H for displaying a still image is executed. The effect H in this example is a still image for effect selection effect, and is an image that is not displayed in the movie. At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, a song whose song name may be there flows from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of productions displayed during the third period. Although the execution of the production O is started, the production O in the present example is an production mode in which the rust portion in the middle of the song is flowed from the top. In this example, thereafter, the player operates the first (first) direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect H and the effect O. In this example, the operation of the direction key 139 is performed after the movie effect by the moving image is started. However, the operation of the direction key 139 may be performed before the movie effect by the moving image is started. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. The effect H and / or the effect I may be displayed in a state where an image in the middle of the movie is paused. Alternatively, one of the songs or movies may be started from the middle and the other may be started from the beginning.

  FIG. 139 (b) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139 while the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O is being executed. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect H becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent and the performance of the effect O is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 139 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process has been executed. The execution of the effect I is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect P is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect H to the effect I and from the effect O to the effect P in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, a still image corresponding to the movie in which the character with the movie name “Kieki no Universe” appears is displayed as one of the multiple effects displayed during the first period. The execution of the production I is started. The effect I in this example is a still image for effect selection effect, and is an image that is not displayed in the movie. At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie effect, the speaker 120 produces an effect P in which a song with the song name “Kiseki no Universe” flows as one effect among the plurality of effects displayed during the third period. In this example, it is executed from the chorus part in the middle of the song.

  FIG. 139 (d) shows a state where an effect selection effect by effect I and effect P is being executed following FIG. 139 (c). The rust portion continues to flow from the speaker 120, and an effect corresponding to the song is displayed in the frame image. In this example, the player then operates the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect I and the effect P.

  FIG. 139 (e) shows a state after an effect selection effect has been executed, and the player has operated the second direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect I and effect P. FIG. ing. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the frame image gradually changes to white and the display of the effect I becomes invisible, and in synchronization with this, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually decreases and becomes silent, and the performance of the effect P is performed. It becomes impossible to listen. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 139 (f) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the fade-out process is being executed. The execution of the effect H is started in the frame image, and the execution of the effect O is started in the speaker 120. As a result of the operation of the direction key 139, the effect is switched from the effect I to the effect H and from the effect P to the effect O in this way. A character string image showing the title of the effect is displayed below the display area for movie playback in the frame image.

  In the frame image, a movie in which a princess character whose movie name may be there appears is displayed as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period. Production H is being executed. In the effect H in this example, an image in the middle of the movie is displayed in a paused state. At this time, no music is flowing from the speaker 120 and there is no sound. Next, the temporary stop of the image is canceled after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, 0.5 seconds later), and a movie effect using a moving image is started in the frame image. In synchronism with the start of the movie production, the speaker 120 sends a song whose title is “may be there” as one of the multiple productions displayed during the third period. Has been run from the rust portion. In this example, the start of the movie production by the moving image and the start of the song are synchronized, but they may not be synchronized. In this example, after that, the first round ends during the execution of the effect selection effect by effect H and effect O.

  FIG. 139 (g) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed. A period between FIG. 139 (g) and the next FIG. 139 (h) is referred to as an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the character string image “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (g), when the attacker 234 is closed without pressing the chance button 136 and the first round is completed, the movie production by the movie is interrupted and stopped, and an image in the middle of the movie is displayed. Displayed as a still image. Also, the music flowing from the speaker 120 is interrupted and is stopped. When the chance button 136 is not pressed, at the end of the first round, the effect H started in FIG. 139 (f) is determined as the first effect, and the effect O started in FIG. 139 (f) is the third effect. As determined. The title of the third effect is the same as the movie name of the first effect, and the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect. In addition, the second presentation to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 139 (i) is determined by the end of the first round, and is executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 139 (i). A fourth performance is determined. Further, the width of the frame portion of the frame image is also displayed thick so that the player's attention is directed to the movie display in the frame image. Thereby, it is notified that the production H is determined as the first production. The production H may be still image display (stop state) or may be shifted to video display again. Further, when the production H shifts to the moving image display, the execution of the production O flowing from the rust portion in the middle of the song whose title is “may be there” from the speaker 120 may be started.

  FIG. 139 (h) shows a state in which the first round has ended and the second round has started, and the effect selection effects by effects H and effects O have ended. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. When the first round is finished, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect H becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first period and the third period are ended.

  With the end of the effect selection effect, the movie image display, the character string image of “Please select effect”, the direction key image, and the button image are not displayed, but the character image of “2R” and “decoration 7” The big hit effect by the display of “” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 139 (i) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started after the attacker 234 is released in the second round. The same state as FIG. 132 (b) following c) is shown. In the second period starting from FIG. 139 (i), a movie in which a princess character whose movie name is “may be there” appears from the top (first) on almost the entire display area 208d. The second effect (effect H ′) is executed. Also, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 139 (i), the fourth production in which the song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120, corresponding to the second production. (Production O ′) is executed. A character string image “may be there” is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d. The character string image indicates the movie name of the displayed movie and the song name of the current song.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is described in a control manner as follows. The speaker 120 executes a plurality of effects such as an effect O and an effect P, for example. One of the effects O and P is the first effect. The first sub-control unit 400 executes in the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 139 (i)) in the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (h)). It is means that can determine the production to be performed. The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends. The first sub-control unit 400 is a means for determining an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied. The case where the first condition is satisfied is a case where the first round is completed. The speaker 120 is a means for executing only a part of the first effect during the first period. In the first case (the first sub-control unit 400 performs the first operation during the first period). When the first effect is executed and the first round is completed), the first effect is ended, and in the second period, the effect that is executed in the second period can be executed from the top.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only a part of the production O is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic of the speaker 120. In addition, when the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started. Further, only part of the effect O is executed in the first period, so that it may be possible for the player not to get bored even when the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning in the second period. .

  Next, a variation of the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This modification is characterized by an effect selection effect in the jackpot effect. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (e) show in time series the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. FIG. 140 (f) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. In addition, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the thirteenth embodiment in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of this modification will be omitted.

  FIG. 140 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 132 (a), and shows a state in which an effect selection effect is started. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is a song name of a simple song (effect O). In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area. In the center of the music display area, “Kiseki” is the name of the music (production P) that can be displayed in the music selectable area. The character string image of “The Universe” is displayed. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in this example, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 140 (e) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 140 (a) is started (the effect display area 208d turns completely white). It is a period until the time when the production selection production is finished.

  In this modification, the outer periphery of the selectable area of the music is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the names of the songs that can be selected, and the character string image of “may be there” is displayed larger. ing. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this modification.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that by pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to determine the music as the second effect executed in the second period starting from FIG. 140 (f) described later. ing.

  FIG. 140B shows an effect in which the song title is “may be there” from the speaker 120 as one of a plurality of effects displayed during the first period after a predetermined time has elapsed. This shows a state in which the production of flowing the chorus part in the middle of the O song from the beginning has been started.

  FIG. 140 (c) shows a state where the effect of flowing the rust portion is continued. Thereafter, fade-out processing is executed, and as the process proceeds to the end of the chorus, the music flowing from the speaker 120 gradually becomes smaller and becomes silent, and the performance O cannot be heard. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  In FIG. 140 (d), the fade-in process is executed after the fade-out process is executed, and the chorus portion of the effect O is first as one effect among the plurality of effects displayed during the first period. This shows a state in which the production starting from is started. In this example, after that, the player presses the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 140D is determined as the first effect. In FIGS. 140 (b) and 140 (d), the same production is performed from the beginning of the chorus part in the middle of the production O in which the song title is “may be there” from the speaker 120. However, each is a separate production.

  FIG. 140 (e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is ended by pressing the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the music selectable area and the music display area becomes invisible. In addition, the music flowing from the speaker 120 becomes gradually smaller and becomes silent (stopped), and the performance of the production O cannot be heard. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are ended.

  At the end of the production selection production, the character string image of “Please select a song”, the direction key image, and the button image will be hidden, but the “1R” character string image and “decoration 7” display will be a big hit The production continues to be executed.

  FIG. 140 (f) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 140 (f), a second effect (effect O ′) in which a song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120 from the beginning. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top.

  During production selection production, when playing BGM instead of production O performed in FIGS. 140 (c) and 140 (d), during the performance of one of a plurality of songs constituting the BGM. A fade-in process may be performed, and a fade-out process may be performed when other music is played. When there is a single piece of music constituting the BGM, control for setting the output volume of the BGM and control for designating the range of effects to be executed may be executed for the music.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, only a part of the production O is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic of the speaker 120. In addition, when the production O ′ is started from the top, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started. Further, only part of the effect O is executed in the first period, so that it may be possible for the player not to get bored even when the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning in the second period. .

(Example 14) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The present embodiment is characterized in that an effect selection effect is executed over a plurality of rounds unless the chance button 136 is pressed. In the present embodiment, a case where the chance button 136 is not pressed in the first round and the chance button 136 is pressed in the second round will be described.

  In this example, the outer periphery of the song selectable area is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the song names of the selectable songs, and is the song name of the song (effect O) that can be selected as the first effect. The character string image “may be there” is displayed larger. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. From the speaker 120, the middle of the song of the production O whose title is “may be there” is flowing. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period of the present embodiment, the effect selection effect ends after the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 141 (e) is pressed from the time when the previous effect selection effect shown in FIG. 141 (a) is started. This is the period until

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed as a song selection display. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that, by pressing the chance button 136, the music as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined.

  141A to 141B show a state in which an effect selection effect by effect O is being executed. In this example, the first round ends without the chance button 136 being pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O.

  FIG. 141 (c) shows the state of the effect selection effect immediately after the attacker 234 is closed and the first round is completed. A period between FIG. 141 (c) and the next FIG. 141 (d) is an inter-round interval. As described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the character string image “1R” informing that the number of rounds is “1” is deleted in the interval between rounds. Even after the first round is finished, the execution of the effect O is continued in the speaker 120.

  FIG. 141 (d) shows a state where the first round has ended and the second round has started, and the effect selection effect has continued. The execution of the production O is continued in the speaker 120. In the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of the number of rounds “2R” of the rounds in which the big hit effect is executed is displayed. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect by the effect O. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O being executed at the time of FIG. 141 (d) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect (effect O ′) to be executed in the second period starting after FIG. 141 (e) is determined.

  FIG. 141 (e) shows a state in which the effect selection effect after the start of the second round is continued. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes the execution of the effect O, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the second effect has been determined flows. Also, the music selectable area changes to black, and the character string image of “may be there” changes to a white display, thereby notifying the player that the second effect has been determined. .

  In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed in the middle of the second round. However, when the chance button 136 is not pressed, the round is completed (in this example, the first button is the same as described in the twelfth embodiment). The production O may be determined as the first production at the end of the second round, and the production O ′ may be decided as the second production. As long as the chance button 136 is not pressed, the first effect and the second effect are not determined, and the effect selection effect may be continuously executed until the end of the fifteenth round.

(Example 15) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 15 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (h) are time series showing the effect selection effects for selecting the first effect and selecting the second effect to be executed in the jackpot game in this order. Moreover, FIG. 142 (i) has shown the state by which the big hit effect including the 2nd effect selected by the effect selection effect was started. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 142 (a) shows a state in which execution of the effect selection effect is started in the first round. The effect selection effect is started from the start time of the first round. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a story” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, two horizontally long story name display areas are displayed vertically below the character string image. A character string image indicating a story name is displayed in each of the upper and lower two story name display areas. When a story is selected, a movie corresponding to the story can be selected as a first effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper story name display area, a character string image of “[First episode] happening in castle town (hereinafter referred to as“ first episode ””) is displayed, and in the lower story name display area, “[ Second episode] A character string image of “Reunion with Echigoya (hereinafter abbreviated as“ second episode ”)” is displayed. In addition, on the right side of the story name display area, an area for displaying a still image in which a movie corresponding to the selected story is paused at a predetermined position, an area for displaying a synopsis corresponding to the selected story, A square synopsis display area having a line is displayed. In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in the present embodiment, the chance button 136 is pressed as described later and the fade-out process shown in FIG. 142 (h) is completed from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 142 (a) is started. This is the period up to the point when the production selection production ends.

  In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area where the selected story name is displayed is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily see the story name of the selected story. The outer periphery of the displayed story name display area is displayed with a thin line. In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area in which “first story” is displayed is displayed with a bold line. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the story name display area where “second story” is displayed is displayed with a thin line. Also, in the synopsis display area, the display of the movie and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story has not started, and a BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this example.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable story can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In this example, the outer periphery of the story name display area that is selected each time the player operates the direction key 139 is displayed with a bold line. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The character string image “determine” informs that the movie as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined by pressing the chance button 136. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In FIG. 142 (b), an effect selection effect is executed, a still image of a movie corresponding to “first story” is displayed in the synopsis display area, and an effect (an outline corresponding to the selected story is displayed). Hereinafter, there is a case where “production J” may be executed. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139.

  FIG. 142 (c) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the first time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the lower story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “second story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 142 (d) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed, a still image of a movie corresponding to “second story” is displayed in the synopsis display area, and an outline corresponding to the selected story is displayed. Is shown. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 142 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the upper story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “first story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 142 (f) shows a state in which the effect selection effect is being executed and the effect J is being executed. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 142 (g) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect J started from FIG. 142 (f) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 142 (i) is determined. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes executing the BGM effect for selecting a story, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the second effect has been determined flows.

  In FIG. 142 (h), when the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect J is determined as the first effect, and the effect that is a movie including an image in which Yoshimune is reading the newspaper is determined as the second effect. Indicates the executed state. By the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the display of the effect selection effect becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are completed.

  When the effect selection effect ends, the synopsis display area display, the story name display area, the character string image of “Please select a story.”, The direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the “1R” The big hit effect by the display of the character string image and “decoration 7” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 142 (i) shows a state in which the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In the second period starting from FIG. 142 (i), the effect J ′, which is a movie including an image of Yoshimune reading a newspaper, is executed from the beginning, and the speaker 120 corresponds to the second effect in synchronization therewith. BGM is executed from the beginning of the song. In this example, in the second period, the production J ′ is started from the top, but a still image may be started.

  In this embodiment, the story outline is displayed in the synopsis display area, but a part of the story (for example, a part of the sentence) displayed after the story is determined may be displayed. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  In the present embodiment, the still image of the movie displayed after the story is determined is displayed in the synopsis display area, but a part of the movie may be displayed. Still images that are not displayed in the story may be displayed. The same applies to the following embodiments.

(Example 16) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The present embodiment is characterized in that the synopsis corresponding to the selected story displayed in the synopsis display area is displayed as an animation. FIGS. 143 (a) to (i) show the effect selection effects according to the present embodiment in time series. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Further, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the fifteenth embodiment in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which execution of the effect selection effect is started in the first round. The effect selection effect is started from the start time of the first round. The outer periphery of the story name display area in which “first story” is displayed is displayed with a bold line. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the story name display area where “second story” is displayed is displayed with a thin line. Also, in the synopsis display area, the display of the movie and the synopsis corresponding to the selected story has not started, and a BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect according to this example.

  FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the effect selection effect has been executed, and the animation display in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “first story” is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area is started. . About one-third of the outline is animated. In addition, the still image of the movie corresponding to “First episode” is not displayed.

  75 (c) shows a state in which the effect selection effect has been executed, the synopsis animation display has ended, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “first story” is displayed in the synopsis display area. Yes.

  In FIG. 143 (d), the effect selection effect is executed, the still image of the movie corresponding to “first story” is displayed in the synopsis display area, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed. It shows the state. Also, the still image of the movie may be switched, and the outline display may be switched correspondingly. In this example, after that, during the execution of the effect selection effect, the player performs the first operation of the direction key 139.

  FIG. 143 (e) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the first direction key 139. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the lower story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “second story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 143 (f) shows a state in which an effect selection effect has been executed, and an animation display in which the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “second story” is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area is started. . About one-third of the outline is animated. In addition, the still image of the movie corresponding to “second episode” is not displayed.

  FIG. 143 (g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect has been executed, the synopsis animation display has been completed, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story “second story” has been displayed in the synopsis display area. ing. In this example, the player then performs the second operation of the direction key 139 during execution of the effect selection effect.

  FIG. 143 (h) shows a state after the effect selection effect has been executed and the player has operated the direction key 139 for the second time. By operating the direction key 139, the outer periphery of the upper story name display area is displayed with a bold line, and the selected story is changed to “first story”. When the direction key 139 is operated, the fade-out process is started. By the fade-out process, the outline display area gradually changes to white, and the still image and the outline display become invisible. An effect for switching may be executed instead of the fade-out process.

  FIG. 143 (i) shows a state in which an effect display effect has been executed, and an animation display in which an outline corresponding to the selected story “first story” is gradually displayed in the synopsis display area is started. Yes. About one-third of the outline is animated. In addition, the still image of the movie corresponding to “First episode” is not displayed. In this way, even if the summary animation is displayed once, it may be executed again from the beginning.

  FIG. 143 (i ′) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed instead of FIG. 143 (i) after the fade-out process in FIG. 143 (h) is performed. In the synopsis display area, a still image of a movie corresponding to “first story” is displayed, and the full text of the synopsis corresponding to the selected story is displayed. As described above, when the still image of the movie once displayed and the outline are displayed again, the movie may be displayed all at once. In this embodiment, the animation that displays the same synopsis is executed only for the first time in one production selection period, and when it is selected again, the animation is canceled and all the animation is displayed. Here, if the story is changed to the next story in the middle of the first animation, and if a story that has been animated halfway is selected again, cancel the animation and display all the outlines. Alternatively, it may be executed from the middle of the animation executed before the change, or may be executed again from the beginning.

(Example 17) A jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the first effect selected during the first period and the third effect selected during the third period are separately selected, and the second effect executed in the second period. And the fourth effect executed in the fourth period is selected (determined) separately. The jackpot effects shown in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (e) are the effect selection effects in which the first effect and the third effect are selected in this order, and the second effect and the fourth effect to be executed in the jackpot game are selected. Are shown in time series. 144 (f) to 144 (g) show a state in which a big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started and executed. In these figures, the passage of time between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. Also, in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect of the present embodiment, the description of the same effect display mode as that of the fifteenth embodiment in FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (b) is omitted, and FIG. Description of the same effect display mode as in the fourteenth embodiment in (c) to (e) will be omitted.

  In FIG. 144 (a), when the effect J is executed in the effect display area 208d and the BGM for story selection is flowing from the speaker 120, the effect selection effect immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed is executed. Indicates the state. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect J shown in FIG. 144 (a) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 144 (f) is determined. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the speaker 120 finishes executing the BGM for selecting a story, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the effect J ′ has been determined as the second effect flows. The first period in this embodiment is a period from the time when the previous effect selection effect shown in FIG. 144 (a) is started to the time when the fade-out process shown in FIG. 144 (b) is completed.

  FIG. 144 (b) shows a state in which the fade-out process has been executed following the notification that the effect J is determined as the first effect by pressing the chance button 136 and the effect J ′ is determined as the second effect. ing. Due to the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually turns white and the display of the effect J becomes invisible. The fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are completed.

  At the end of production J, the display of the synopsis display area, the story name display area, the character string image of “Please select a story.”, The direction key image, and the button image are hidden, but the character “1R” is displayed. The big hit effect by the display of the row image and “decoration 7” continues to be executed.

  FIG. 144 (c) shows that an effect selection effect is being executed, the third period is started, and a song (effect O) that can be selected as the third effect executed by the speaker 120 is displayed in the music selectable area. This shows a state in which a character string image of “may be there” is displayed as a song title. In the song display area, a character string image of “Kiseki no Universe”, which is the song name of the song (effect P) that can be displayed in the song selectable area, is displayed. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound.

  FIG. 144 (d) shows a state in which the execution of the production O in which a song whose title is “may be there” starts flowing from the head after a predetermined time has elapsed. In this example, the player then presses the chance button 136 during the execution of the effect O. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 144 (c) is determined as the third effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the fourth effect to be executed in the fourth period starting from FIG. 144 (f) is determined.

  FIG. 144 (e) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is executed immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the execution of the effect O (third effect) is ended (stopped) on the speaker 120, and a decision sound for notifying the player that the fourth effect has been determined flows. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the music selectable area changes to black, and the character string image of “may be there” changes to a white display, thereby giving the player a fourth color. It is notified that the production O ′ has been determined as the production. In this example, the third period ends thereafter.

  FIG. 144 (f) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is started. In the second period starting from FIG. 144 (f), the second effect (effect J ′) is executed from the beginning. Further, in the fourth period starting from FIG. 144 (f), the fourth effect (effect O ′) is executed from the speaker 120. In addition, a character string image of “may be there” is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208 d, and indicates the name of the song flowing from the speaker 120.

  FIG. 144 (g) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect and the fourth effect selected in the effect selection effect is being executed, which is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. The display of the character string image “may be there” has disappeared.

  In the present embodiment, once selected story and music cannot be changed, either one of the story and music cannot be changed, and the other is a period in which the production can be changed (for example, the timing of FIG. 144 (f)). To the end of 15R) may be changed to any timing. Further, both the story and the music may be changeable at any timing in a period during which the effect can be changed (for example, a period from the timing of FIG. 144 (f) to the end of 15R).

(Example 18) A special figure variable game and a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 (a) shows a state where the same special figure 1 variable game as that in FIG. 129 (f) is being executed. FIG. 145 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the image display area is used for the effect display area 208d. Is shown. FIG. 145 (c) shows a state in which the character image “Yoshimune roulette!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the pre-reach effect is started.

  In FIG. 145 (d), a horizontally-long rectangular image display area I is defined in the upper left quarter of the effect display area 208d, and a movie a ′ that can be selected as the first effect in the image display area I is shown. The display is started, and the effect selection effect is started. Movie a ′ suggests an SP reach production with a scene where two samurai fight, starting from FIG. 129 (n). In the effect selection effect, the first effect is selected and executed during the first period. In the first period in the present embodiment, the fade-out process is completed as shown in FIG. 145 (o) from the time when the effect selection effect shown in FIG. 145 (d) is started (the effect display area 208d is completely white). It is a period until the time when the production selection production is finished.

  FIG. 145 (e) shows a state in which the movie a ′ is being displayed in the image display area I. FIG. 145 (f) shows a state in which the display of the movie a ′ is executed in the image display area I, and a horizontally long rectangular image display area II is defined in the upper right quarter of the effect display area 208d. This shows a state in which the display of the movie b ′ is started in the image display area II. FIG. 145 (g) shows a state in which the display of the movie a ′ is executed in the image display area I and the display of the movie b ′ is executed in the image display area II.

  FIG. 145 (h) shows that the movie a ′ is displayed in the image display area I and the movie b ′ is displayed in the image display area II, and the lower right quadrant of the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular image display area III is defined in one area, a still image c is displayed in the image display area III, and then a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed in the lower left quarter of the effect display area 208d. The display area IV is demarcated and the display of the movie d ′ is started in the image display area IV. Thereafter, in the image display area I, the moving image display of the movie a ′ is completed and the still image a is displayed.

  In FIG. 145 (i), the still image a is displayed in the image display area I, and the movie b ′ is displayed in the image display area II. Thereafter, the movie b ′ in the image display area II is displayed. Indicates a state in which the moving image display is completed and the still image b is displayed. A still image c is displayed in the image display area III, and a movie d ′ is displayed in the image display area IV.

  In FIG. 145 (j), a still image a is displayed in the image display area I, a still image b is displayed in the image display area II, and a still image c is displayed in the image display area III. A state in which the display of the movie d ′ is being executed in the area IV is shown. Thereafter, the moving image display of the movie d ′ is completed in the image display area IV, and the still image d is displayed. Next, in a state where still images a to d are displayed in all of the image display areas I to IV, the brightness of the image display area I becomes high, and the brightness of the other three image display areas II to IV is relatively low. The production is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (k), an effect is executed in which the brightness of the image display area II is increased and the brightness of the other three image display areas I, III, and IV is relatively decreased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (l), an effect is performed in which the brightness of the image display area III is increased and the brightness of the other three image display areas I, II, and IV is relatively decreased. In addition, a button effect is started, a button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, and an effective period image is displayed below the button image to prompt the player to press the chance button 136.

  Next, in FIG. 145 (m), an effect in which the brightness of the image display area IV is increased and the brightness of the other three image display areas I to III is relatively decreased is executed. In addition, the button operation acceptance valid period has slightly elapsed, and the bar-shaped portion of the valid period image display is slightly shortened to the right. By repeating the states of FIGS. 145 (j) to (m) in this order, the order in which one of the image display areas I to IV becomes brighter than the other three is in the order of I to IV. The luminance region is visually recognized as rotating. Thereby, the player can obtain a feeling that the roulette is rotating in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 145 (n), the states of FIGS. 145 (j) to (m) are repeated several times in this order. As a result of the player pressing the chance button 136 in the button operation acceptance permission state, the image display area I is This shows a state in which the rotation of the high luminance area is stopped in the high luminance state. The still image a displayed in the image display area I at this time is determined as the first effect. In addition, after the chance button 136 is pressed, the effects of the movies a ′, b ′, and d ′ may be executed again in the image display areas I, II, and IV.

  FIG. 145 (o) is the same as FIG. 129 (m) subsequent to FIG. 129 (n), and shows a state in which the effect selection effect is ended by pressing the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the fade-out process is started. Due to the fade-out process, the effect display area 208d gradually changes to white, and the image display areas I to IV and the still images a to d become invisible. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are also ended. Thereafter, in the second period starting from FIG. 129 (n), the SP reach effect, which is the second effect with a scene where two samurai fight, is executed. The effect selection effect may be executed not only during the big hit game, but also during the special figure variable game as in this example, or may be executed on the customer waiting screen.

(Example 19) A special figure variable game and a jackpot game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Since FIGS. 129 to 132 have been described in the eleventh embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted here. FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (j) show the jackpot effects in this order in chronological order. In the figure showing the big hit effect in time series, the time lapse between one figure and the next figure does not necessarily match between the figures. FIG. 146 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 130 (h) continued from FIG. 130 (g). Almost the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “probable big hit” is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d to notify that the 15R special big hit has been won. ing. In this example, the first period starts thereafter.

  FIG. 146 (b) shows a state in which an effect selection effect is being executed. In the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “Please select a song” is displayed in order to prompt the player to select a jackpot effect to be executed in the jackpot game. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music selectable area is displayed at the lower right of the character string image, and can be selected as a first effect executed by the speaker 120 serving as an effect means in the center of the music selectable area. A character string image of “May be there” is displayed, which is the name of the song. In addition, a horizontally-long rectangular music display area is displayed at the lower right of the music selectable area, and in the center of the music display area, the name of the music that can be displayed in the music selectable area is “Kiseki no Universe” A character string image is displayed. In addition, the number of rounds in which the effect selection effect is executed is shown in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d. In this example, a character string image of “1R” is displayed, and it is notified that the number of rounds is “1”. “Decoration 7” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and it is confirmed that the big hit has been stopped and displayed with the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”.

  In FIG. 146 (b), the outer periphery of the music selectable area is displayed with a thick line so that the player can easily recognize the names of the selectable music, and the character string image of “may be there” is enlarged. It is displayed. On the other hand, the outer periphery of the music display area is displayed with a thin line so that it is less conspicuous than the music selectable area, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed smaller. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the first jackpot effect selection effect.

  A direction key image simulating the direction key 139 is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display area 208d, and a button image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the right side thereof. A character string image of “Select” is displayed below the direction key image. The character string image of “Select” notifies that the selectable music piece can be changed by operating the direction key 139. In FIG. 146 (b), each time the player operates the direction key 139, the song name displayed in the song selection display area is moved to the song display area and displayed, and the song name displayed in the song display area is displayed. The music that can be selected can be changed by moving to the music selection display area and displaying it. In addition, a character string image of “OK” is displayed below the button image. The “determined” character string image informs that, by pressing the chance button 136, the music as the second effect executed in the second period can be determined.

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 146 (b), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect in which a song whose title is “may be there” flows from the speaker 120 from the beginning. The execution of O is started. In the production O, a chorus part in the middle of a song may be produced from the beginning. Thereafter, in this example, the player presses the chance button 136 during execution of the effect selection effect. By pressing the chance button 136, the effect O started in FIG. 146 (b) is determined as the first effect. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the second effect to be executed in the second period starting from FIG. 146 (c) is determined.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the execution of the effect selection effect, the fade-out process is started, and the performance of the effect O cannot be heard. The fade-out process is completed and the effect selection effect ends. Further, the fade-out process is completed, and the first effect and the first period are ended.

  FIG. 146 (c) shows a state where the big hit effect including the second effect selected in the effect selection effect is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (c). ing. In the second period starting from FIG. 146 (c), a second effect (effect O ′) in which a song whose title is “may be there” is played from the speaker 120 from the beginning. In addition, on almost the entire surface of the effect display area 208d, a movie effect corresponding to the second effect (movie name “may be there”) is displayed from the top. In the production O ′, the chorus part in the middle of the song may be played from the beginning, and the movie production may be an production mode corresponding to this.

  FIG. 146 (d) shows a state in which a jackpot end effect for notifying that the jackpot game has ended is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 132 (f) following FIG. 132 (g). A character string image of “probability change entry” is displayed in the left third area of the effect display area 208d, a samurai character image is displayed in the remaining one third area, and the jackpot ends from the speaker 120. It is notified that the BGM for production flows and shifts to the probability fluctuation state.

  FIG. 146 (e) shows a state in which the production selection effect is started by winning the second 15R special jackpot in the special figure variation game executed several times from FIG. 132 (g). Yes. Description of the same aspect as the effect display mode shown in FIG. 146 (b) in the effect display area 208d in the effect selection effect in FIG. 146 (e) will be omitted. The “second” character string image is displayed below the “1R” character string image in the effect display area 208d, and it is informed that the two consecutive villas are in operation. In the effect display area 208d, a character string image of “may be there” is displayed in the music selectable area, and a music display area below the music selectable area (hereinafter, “music display area 1”). The character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed. Further, in the second row, a second music display area (hereinafter referred to as “music display area 2”) is displayed below the music display area 1, and the third music “ A character string image of “Your Fragrance” is displayed. Also, no music is flowing from the speaker 120, and there is no sound. This state is the default effect mode of the effect selection effect after 2 consecutive resorts. In this example, in the default effect mode, the oldest song name is displayed in the song selectable area, but a newly added song may be displayed. In this example, the number of songs that can be displayed in the song selectable area is increased by one every time one reed is added. Thus, there are cases where the player can be entertained by increasing the types of effects executed in the second period that can be confirmed in the first period.

  Although not shown in FIG. 146 (e), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the production selection effect of the second hit of the jackpot game, the song title “may be there” is displayed from the speaker 120. The execution of the production O in which the music flows from the beginning is started. In the production O, a chorus part in the middle of a song may be produced from the beginning.

  FIG. 146 (f) shows a state after the player operates the right direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect for the second consecutive game of the big hit game. When the right direction key 139 is operated once, the character string image “may be there” displayed in the music selectable area is moved to the music display area 2 and displayed in the music display area 1. The character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” that has been moved to the song selectable area is displayed, and the character image of “Your Fragrance” that was displayed in the song display area 2 is moved to the song display area 1 Displayed. Conversely, when the left direction key 139 is operated once, the song name displayed in the song selectable area is moved and displayed in the song display area 1, and the song name displayed in the song display area 1 is displayed in the song display area 2. The music title displayed in the music display area 2 is displayed in the music selectable area. When the player continues to operate the right direction key 139 a plurality of times, for example, the character string image “may be there” displayed in the music selectable area is displayed in the music display area 2. -> Music display area 1-> Music selectable area-> Music display area 2 Move in a rotary manner. The same applies when the left direction key 139 is continuously operated a plurality of times.

  Although not shown in FIG. 146 (f), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose title is “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the head. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  FIG. 146 (g) shows a state in which the effect selection effect of the third consecutive resort and the fourth consecutive resort of the big hit game is finished and the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive resort is started. A character string image of “fifth” is displayed below the character string image of “1R” in the effect display area 208d to notify that five consecutive villas are being operated. In the fifth series, there are six songs that can be displayed in the song selectable area. Although not shown in FIG. 146 (g), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive resort, the song whose title is “may be there” is started from the speaker 120. The execution of the flowing effect O is started. In the production O, a chorus part in the middle of a song may be produced from the beginning.

  FIG. 146 (h) shows a state after the player has operated the right direction key 139 once during the execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character string image of “May be there” displayed in the song selectable area is deleted, and the character image of “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song display area 1 moves to the song selectable area The character string image of “Kimi no Kakera” displayed in the music display area 2 is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and “Mega! Giga! Summer! Is displayed in the music display area 2. As described above, a new music is displayed in the music display area 2 by operating the button on the right side of the direction key 139.

  Although not shown in FIG. 146 (h), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose song name is “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the head. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  FIG. 146 (i) shows a state after the player further operates the right direction key 139 during the execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character image of “Kiseki no Universe” displayed in the song selectable area is deleted, and the character image of “Your Fragrance” displayed in the song display area 1 is moved to the song selectable area and displayed. Then, the character string image of “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Displayed in the music display area 2 is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and the character string of “hot spring hormone” added to the fourth row An image is displayed in the music display area 2.

  Although not shown in FIG. 146 (i), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose title is “Your Fragrance” flows from the speaker 120. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  FIG. 146 (j) shows a state after the player has operated the left directional key 139 once during the execution of the effect selection effect of the fifth consecutive game of the big hit game. The character string image of “Your Fragrance” displayed in the music selectable area is moved to the music display area 1 and displayed, and the character string “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Displayed in the music display area 1 is displayed. The image is moved to the music display area 2 and displayed, and the character string image of “Kiseki no Universe” is displayed in the music selectable area. Thus, when the player operates the left direction key 139 once, it is possible to return to the effect mode shown immediately before.

  Although not shown in FIG. 146 (j), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect selection effect, an effect is started in which a song whose song name is “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the head. Moreover, in the said production | presentation, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect which flows the chorus part in the middle of a music from the head.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 147, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  FIG. 148 (a) shows a game table according to the present invention. “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 148 again.
(A1) The game stand according to this embodiment is
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);

  A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

  The rendering means starts with a first rendering (for example, a period that starts when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 133 (a) and is pressed after FIG. 133 (g)). For example, it is means for executing at least a part of the effect H or effect O) shown in FIG.

  The production means has at least a second production (for example, production H ′ or production O ′ shown in FIG. 133 (i)) in the second period (for example, the period after the chance button 136 is pressed). A viable means,

  The first effect is at least part of the second effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 133 (g) is included in part of the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 133 (i)). And

  When the operation means is operated (for example, pressing the chance button 136) during the first period, the effect means stops at least the first effect (for example, fade-out shown in FIG. 133 (h)). Processing) possible means,

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133 (i)),

  The first period is a period that ends at least when the operation unit is operated (for example, a period that ends in FIG. 133 (h)),

  In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (i), the effect H ′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O ′ is It is executed from the beginning).

  According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operating means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the game characterized by the effect means A stand can be realized. Moreover, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Furthermore, when the operation means is operated, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to confirm that the operation means is accepted.

  The production means may be a means for executing only a part of the first production during the first period, or may be a means for executing all of the first production. Good. Further, the effect means may be means for executing one or more effects different from the first effect during the first period. Further, when the operation means is operated during the first period, the effect means may be a means that only the first effect being executed is stopped, or the first effect being executed is displayed. A plurality of effects including it may be stopped, or all effects including the first effect being executed may be stopped.

  Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “can be ended” or may be “can be ended”. Further, it may indicate that “it may not be terminated”. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “must be stopped” or “may not be stopped”. In addition, “stop” indicates “stopping temporarily in the middle of the production”, but “stopping at the end of the production” may also be included. Further, “stopping at the end of the production” may not be included. The stop may be “interruption”, “cancel”, or “end”.

  Further, the first period may be a period that is ended only when the operation means is operated. Further, the first period may be a period that ends when a certain period of time has elapsed since the first period was started, even when the operation means was not operated. Moreover, when the first period is included in the period of the big hit effect, the first period may be a period that is ended when a specific round is ended, even when the operation means is not operated.

  Further, the case where the operation means is operated may be a case where the operation means is operated by the player, and a case where the operation means is operated and detected by the detection means (sensor). Alternatively, the effect control means may receive the command that the operation means has been operated.

  Further, the second period may be a period that starts immediately after the end of the first period, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. In addition, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period.

Further, the effect means may be a means that the second effect is always executed during the second period, or may be a means that the second effect may not be executed. For example, when the island simultaneous effect is started before the second period is started after the first period is started, the second effect may not be executed. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the second effect may be used, or a means for executing only the second effect may be used.
(A2) The game stand according to (A1),

  The first effect includes a plurality of effects (for example, an effect H shown in FIGS. 133 (a) and (g), an effect I shown in FIGS. 133 (c) to 133 (e), or a diagram in the first period. A game stand characterized by being one of effects determined from effects O shown in 133 (a) and (g) and effects P shown in FIGS. 133 (c) to 133 (e).

  According to the above gaming machine, the player may be entertained by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects. The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. If there is only one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the second period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive villas has reached a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive villas, three consecutive villas, or when the mission of the opening condition of the presentation is achieved during the user mode setting, When is established, the effects that can be executed during the second period may be increased.

  The operation means is a first operation means (chance button 136), and includes a second operation means (direction key 139), and the rendering means performs the second operation during the first period. When there is an operation of the means, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. In this way, “change of production” and “decision of production” may be executed by operation of different operation means, and “change of production” and “decision of production” depend on the operation direction of one operation means. Either of these may be executed.

In addition, the effect executed in the second period may be changed at a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling at a period of 5 seconds. In addition, the fact that the effect is selected may indicate that “the effect is determined”, may include “change of the effect”, or may not include it. Further, it may indicate only that “the production is changed”.
(A3) The game stand according to (A1) or (A2),

  The game stand, wherein the effect means is display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

According to the above gaming machine, the player may be able to visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the display unit from the top. Further, when the operation means is operated, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that it may be easy for the player to visually confirm that the operation means is accepted. .
(A4) The gaming machine according to (A1) or (A2),

  The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible for the player to make it easier for the player to audibly recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. In addition, when the operation means is operated, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that it may be easier for the player to aurally confirm that the operation means is accepted. .
(A5) The game stand according to (A1) or (A2),
A plurality of production means are provided,

At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first effect means is the effect means,

  At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by a plurality of production means. In addition, three or more effect means may be provided.
(A6) The game stand according to (A5),

  In the third period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 133 (a) and ending when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 133 (g)), the second rendering means is in the third period. Means for executing at least a part of the production (eg, production O shown in FIG. 133 (g)),

  The second effect means executes at least the fourth effect (for example, the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 133 (i)) in the fourth period (for example, the period after the chance button 136 is pressed). Possible means,

  The third effect is at least a part of the fourth effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 133 (g) is included in a part of the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 133 (i)). And

  The second effect means stops at least the third effect (for example, FIG. 133 (h)) when the operation means is operated (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) in the third period. The fade-out process shown in FIG.

  The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133 (i)),

  The third period is a period that ends at least when the operation means is operated (for example, a period that ends in FIG. 133 (h)),

  In the fourth period, the fourth effect starts from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (i), the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning of the song), Stand.

  According to the gaming table, when the operation means is operated, the third performance being executed stops, so that the player can easily confirm that the operation means is accepted. There is.

  The second effect means may be a means for executing only a part of the third effect during the third period, or a means for executing all of the third effect. May be. The effect means may be a means for executing one or more effects different from the third effect during the third period. Further, the effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect when the operation means is operated during the third period, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

  Further, the third period may be a period that is ended only when the operation means is operated. Further, the third period may be a period that ends when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the third period, even when the operation means is not operated. Further, when the third period is included in the period of the big hit effect, the third period may be a period that is ended when the specific round is ended, even when the operation means is not operated.

  The third period may be a period that starts before the first period, may be a period that starts after the first period, or starts at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. The third period may be a period that ends before the first period, may be a period that ends after the first period, and ends at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time.

  For example, the first effect such as a movie may not be linked to the third effect, or may be linked. Also, the second effect such as a movie may or may not be linked to the fourth effect.

  The second effect means may be a means that the fourth effect is necessarily executed during the fourth period, or may be a means that the fourth effect may not be executed. . For example, the fourth effect may not be executed when the island simultaneous effect is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect may be used, or a means for executing only the fourth effect may be used.

In addition, when the second effect is not executed during the second period in the first effect means, the second effect means does not execute the fourth effect during the period of the fourth period. It may be a means or a means for executing the fourth effect.
(A7) The game stand according to (A6),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,

  The third effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 133 (g)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 133 (g)),

  The fourth effect (for example, the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 133 (i)) is an effect corresponding to the second effect (for example, the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 133 (i)). A game table.

According to the above gaming machine, since the effects executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, during the period until the operation means is operated in the first period, In some cases, the player can be more entertained by executing at least a part of the first effect by the second effect means and also executing at least a part of the third effect by the second effect means. is there. Moreover, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the operation of the operation means has been received by stopping both the first effect means and the second effect means in the middle. Note that “the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect” means that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect such as execution of a movie corresponding to the song. It may be.
(A8) The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A7),

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the pachinko that has the characteristics of the effect means. Machine or slot machine can be realized.
(A9) effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);

  Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the production means;

  A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

  The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, an effect H shown in FIGS. 133 (a) and (g), an effect I shown in FIGS. 133 (c) to (e), or FIGS. 133 (a) and (g)). Is a means capable of executing at least the effect O shown and the effect P) shown in FIGS. 133 (c) to 133 (e),

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect H or effect O shown in FIG. 133 (g)),

  In the first period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 133 (a) and ending when the chance button 136 is pressed after FIG. 133 (g)), the effect control means is a second period. (For example, a period after the chance button 136 is pressed)

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 133 (i)),

  The effect control means is a means for executing control for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

  The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136),

In the first case, the effect means ends the first effect, and in the second period, the effect that is executed in the second period can be executed from the beginning (for example, in FIG. 133 (i)). As shown, the production H ′ can be executed from the beginning of the movie, or the production O ′ can be executed from the beginning of the song).
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.

  Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,

  The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the above gaming machine, the player recognizes that the second period has started by executing the control that starts the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning in the second period. May be easier to do. Also, when the operation means is operated, the control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and the control is executed from the beginning (first) of the second effect after the second period is started. Is executed, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing notifications other than the plurality of effects (injustice notification, notification of gaming state, notification of how to hit, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect executed in the second period, and as an effect of executing a plurality of effects including the first effect in the second period. Control to determine may be sufficient. The requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operating means has been operated, but (1) that the operating means has been operated, and (2) that a certain period has elapsed since the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the jackpot presentation period and the specific round has ended. The effect determination control may be executed only when any one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when the two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, another requirement that does not include all the requirements (1) to (3) may be used.
(A10) The game stand according to (A9),

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect H ′ or an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 133 (i)),

The stage control means is a means for executing control for determining at least the second stage as an stage for performing the second stage (hereinafter referred to as “stage determination control”). .
(A11) The gaming machine according to (A9) or (A10),

  The production control means is a means for executing control (hereinafter referred to as “production change control”) for changing from the production being performed to another production when the second condition is satisfied,

  The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least during the first period,

  The production control means is a means capable of executing the production change control one or more times when the production period is in the first period,

  One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, the game stand.

According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. . The requirement that the second condition is satisfied may be a condition that may be satisfied only during the period of the first period, and may be satisfied in one or more periods other than the first period. It may be a certain condition. Further, when there is no changeable effect other than the effect that is being executed (when there is one selectable effect), the effect change control may not be executed even during the first period. Moreover, you may make it perform control which performs production | presentation change control and selects the production in execution again. In addition, the number of times that the effect control unit can execute the effect change control in the first period may be limited (for example, 10 times). Further, the production control means may be able to execute the production change control as many times as possible during the first period.
(A12) The gaming machine according to (A10) or (A11),

  The first period is a period that is ended at least when the third condition is satisfied,

  The gaming machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the execution determination control being executed.

Note that the first period may be a period that ends only when the third condition is satisfied. In addition, for example, a condition other than the third condition such as an effect selection effect during a big hit where the effect is not determined until the operation means is operated, or a case where the big hit effect is ended (for example, the end of 15R) is satisfied. In some cases, the period may be terminated. In addition, the requirement that the third condition is satisfied may be that the effect determination control is executed. In addition, the requirement that the third condition is satisfied may be that different control other than the effect determination control (for example, start control of island simultaneous effect, end control of jackpot effect, etc.) is executed.
(B1) The game stand according to this embodiment is
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);

  A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

  The effect means is means for executing at least a big hit effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to (j)) when the big hit (for example, the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 73).

  The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds (for example, the first round to the 15th round),

  At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round (eg, a first round),

  The effect means is at least one of the first effects (for example, the effect H or the effect O shown in FIG. 136 (g)) during the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to (i)). Is a means of executing

  The production means executes at least a second production (for example, production H ′ or production O ′ shown in FIG. 136 (j)) in a second period (for example, a period starting from FIG. 136 (j)). Possible means,

  The first effect is at least a part of the second effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 136 (g) is included in part of the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 136 (j)). And

  The first period is a part of a period during which the jackpot effect is executed (for example, a period shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to (j)),

  The production means is means capable of stopping at least the first production (for example, production H shown in FIG. 136 (h)) when the first round is completed in the first period.

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 136 (j)),

  The first period is at least a period that ends when the first round ends (for example, a period that ends in FIG. 136 (i)),

  In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 136 (j), the effect H ′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O ′ is It is executed from the beginning).

  According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when a specific round is completed, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so that the game characterized by the effect means A stand can be realized. Moreover, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Further, when the first round is finished, the first performance being executed stops, so that the player may easily recognize that the first round is finished.

  The effect means may be a means that at least the big hit effect is executed only in the case of the big hit, and in the case of the small hit, the same effect as the big hit such as a hidden probability change may be executed. . Further, there may be a big hit without a first period, for example, a big hit without appearing balls such as hidden probability change or sudden probability change, or a big hit in which the game state after the big hit is a special low probability state. The jackpot may be composed of two or more rounds, or may be composed of one round.

  Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a part of the first effect during the first period, or a means for executing all of the first effect. . Further, the effect means may be means for executing one or more effects different from the first effect during the first period. Further, the first period may be a period shorter than the period in which the big hit effect is executed, may be a longer period, or may be the same period.

  The effect means may be a means for stopping only the first effect when the first round ends during the first period, and a plurality of effects including the first effect are stopped. Alternatively, all effects including the first effect may be stopped.

  Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “can be ended”, may indicate “to be ended”, and may indicate “may not be ended”. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “must be stopped” or “may not be stopped”. “Stop” means “stop once in the middle of the production”, but “stop at the end of the production” may be included, and “stop at the end of the production” may not be included. May be. The “stop” may be “interrupt”, “stop”, or “end”.

Further, the second period may be a period that starts immediately after the first period ends, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. In addition, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period. The first period may be a period that ends after the first round ends, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first round.
(B2) The game stand according to (B1),

  The first effect includes a plurality of effects (for example, an effect H shown in FIGS. 136 (a) and (g), an effect I shown in FIGS. 136 (c) to 136 (e), or a diagram in the first period. A game stand characterized by being one of effects determined from effects O shown in 136 (a) and (g) and effects P shown in FIGS. 136 (c) to 136 (e).

  According to the above gaming machine, the player may be entertained by determining the first effect from the plurality of effects. The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. If there is only one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the second period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive villas has reached a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive villas, three consecutive villas, or when the mission of the opening condition of the presentation is achieved during the user mode setting, When is established, the effects that can be executed during the second period may be increased.

  The operation means is a first operation means (chance button 136), and includes a second operation means (direction key 139), and the rendering means performs the second operation during the first period. When there is an operation of the means, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. In this way, “change of production” and “decision of production” may be executed by operation of different operation means, and “change of production” and “decision of production” depend on the operation direction of one operation means. Either of these may be executed.

In addition, the effect executed in the second period may be changed at a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling at a period of 5 seconds. In addition, the fact that the effect is selected may indicate that “the effect is determined”, may include “change of the effect”, or may not include it. Further, it may indicate only that “the production is changed”.
(B3) The game stand according to (B1) or (B2),

At least one of the plurality of rounds is a second round (eg, a second round starting from FIG. 136 (i)),
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;

  The gaming table, wherein the second period is a period at least started (for example, a period starting from FIG. 136 (j)) when the second round starts.

According to the above gaming machine, when the first round is finished, the first production being executed is stopped, and when the next second round is started, the second production is started from the top. The player may be able to easily recognize that the second round has started. The first period may be a period that ends between the end of the first round and the start of the second round, or a period that ends after the second round starts. It may be. The second period may be a period that is started only when the second round is started, or may be started in a round other than the second round. Further, there may be a case where the second round is started at a timing other than the start of the second round.
(B4) The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3),

  The game stand, wherein the effect means is display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  According to the above gaming machine, the player may be able to visually recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the display unit from the top.

Further, when the first round is finished, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that the player may easily visually recognize that the first round is finished.
(B5) The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3),

  The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible for the player to make it easier for the player to audibly recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Also, when the first round is completed, the first performance being executed is stopped, so that the player may be audibly aware that the first round has ended.
(B6) The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
A plurality of production means are provided,

At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first effect means is the effect means,

  At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by a plurality of production means. In addition, three or more effect means may be provided.
(B7) The game stand according to (B6),

  In the third period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (i)), the second effect means has at least one of the third effects (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 136 (g)). Is a means of executing

  The second effect means can execute at least a fourth effect (for example, an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 136 (j)) in a fourth period (for example, a period starting from FIG. 136 (j)). Means,

  The third effect is an effect that is at least a part of the fourth effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 136 (g) is included in a part of the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 136 (j)). And

  One of the plurality of rounds is a third round (eg, the first round),

  The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 136 (j)),

  The third period is a period that ends at least when the third round (for example, the round that starts in FIG. 136 (a) and ends in FIG. 136 (g)) ends.

  In the fourth period, the fourth effect starts from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 136 (j), the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning of the song), Stand.

  According to the above game console, when the third round is finished, the third performance being executed stops, so that the player may easily recognize that the third round is finished. The effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect when the third round ends during the third period, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

  The third period may be a period that starts before the first period, may be a period that starts after the first period, or starts at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. The third period may be a period that ends before the first period, may be a period that ends after the first period, and ends at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time.

  The first effect may not be linked to the third effect. In addition, for example, the first production such as a movie may be linked with the third production. The third round may be a round before the first round, and a back round. It may be. In addition, the second effect may not be linked to the fourth effect. For example, the second effect such as a movie may be linked to the fourth effect.

  The second effect means may be a means that the fourth effect is necessarily executed during the fourth period, or may be a means that the fourth effect may not be executed. . For example, the fourth effect may not be executed when the island simultaneous effect is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period. A means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect may be used, or a means for executing only the fourth effect may be used.

Further, when the second effect is not executed during the second period in the first effect means, the second effect is not executed during the period of the fourth period. Means may be used, and means for executing the fourth effect may be used.
(B8) The game stand according to (B7),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third round is the first round,

  The third effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 136 (g)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 136 (g)),

  The fourth effect (for example, the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 136 (j)) is an effect corresponding to the second effect (for example, the effect H ′ shown in FIG. 136 (j)). A game table.

According to the above gaming machine, since the effects executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, in the period until the first round in the first period ends, When at least a part of the first effect by the first effect means is executed and at least a part of the third effect by the second effect means is also executed, so that the player can be more entertained There is. Note that “the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect” means that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect such as execution of a movie corresponding to the song. It may be.
(B9) The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B8),

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the pachinko that has the characteristics of the effect means. Machine or slot machine can be realized.
(B10) effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);

  Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the production means;

  A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

  The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effects H shown in FIGS. 136 (a) and (g), effects I shown in FIGS. 136 (c) to (e), or FIGS. 136 (a) and (g)). Is a means capable of executing at least the production O shown in FIG. 136 and the production P) shown in FIGS.

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect H shown in FIG. 136 (g) or an effect O shown in FIG. 136 (g)),

  The first effect is an effect that is executed at least during the jackpot period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to (j)),

  The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds (for example, the first round to the 15th round),

  At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round (eg, a first round),

  In the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 136 (a) to (i)), the effect control means performs the effect performed in the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 136 (j)). Is a determinable means,

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 136 (j)),

  The effect control means is a means for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

  The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the end of the first round,

In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.

  Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,

  The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is determined that the second period has started by executing the control that starts the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning (first) in the second period. May be easier for a person to recognize. Also, when the operation means is operated, the control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and the control is executed from the beginning (first) of the second effect after the second period is started. Is executed, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing notifications other than the plurality of effects (injustice notification, notification of gaming state, notification of how to hit, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect executed in the second period, and as an effect of executing a plurality of effects including the first effect in the second period. Control to determine may be sufficient. The requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operating means has been operated, but (1) that the operating means has been operated, and (2) that a certain period has elapsed since the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the jackpot presentation period and the specific round has ended. The effect determination control may be executed only when any one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when the two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, another requirement that does not include all the requirements (1) to (3) may be used.
(B11) The game table according to (B10),

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, the effect H ′ or the effect O ′ shown in FIG. 136 (j)),

The stage control means is a means for executing control for determining at least the second stage as an stage for performing the second stage (hereinafter referred to as “stage determination control”). .
(B12) The game stand according to (B10) or (B11),

  The production control means is a means for executing control (hereinafter referred to as “production change control”) for changing from the production being performed to another production when the second condition is satisfied,

  The requirement that the second condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the period of the first period,

  The production control means is a means capable of executing the production change control one or more times when the production period is in the first period,

  One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, the game stand.

According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. .
(B13) The game table according to (B11) or (B12),

  The first period is a period that is ended at least when the third condition is satisfied,

The gaming machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the execution determination control being executed.
(C1) The game stand according to this embodiment is
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);

  A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

  The effect means is a part of the first effect (for example, the effect H or the effect O shown in FIG. 139 (g)) in the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (h)). Is a means to perform only

  The production means executes at least a second production (for example, production H ′ or production O ′ shown in FIG. 139 (i)) in a second period (for example, a period starting from FIG. 139 (i)). Possible means,

  The production means is a means capable of at least stopping the first production (for example, production H shown in FIG. 139 (g)) when the first period ends.

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 139 (i)),

  In the second period, the second effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (i), the effect H ′ is executed from the beginning of the movie, or the effect O ′ is It is executed from the beginning).

  According to the above gaming machine, only a part of the first performance is executed in the first period, so that it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by the production means. Moreover, the player may be able to easily recognize that the second period has started by starting the second effect from the beginning. Furthermore, only a part of the first effect is executed in the first period, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored even when the second effect is executed from the beginning in the second period. There is a case.

  The production means may be a means for stopping only the first production when the first period ends, or a plurality of productions including the first production may be stopped. You may make it stop all the productions including this production. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “can be ended” or may be “can be ended”. Further, it may indicate that “it may not be terminated”. Further, “can be stopped” may indicate “must be stopped” or “may not be stopped”.

  In addition, “stop” indicates “stopping temporarily in the middle of the production”, but “stopping at the end of the production” may also be included. Further, “stopping at the end of the production” may not be included. The “stop” may be “interrupt”, “stop”, or “end”.

  Further, the second period may be a period that starts immediately after the end of the first period, or may be a period that ends at the same time as the end of the first period. In addition, there may be one or a plurality of periods different from the first period and the second period between the first period and the second period. Further, there may be no other period between the first period and the second period.

Further, the effect means may be a means that the second effect is always executed during the second period, or may be a means that the second effect may not be executed. For example, when the island simultaneous effect is started before the second period is started after the first period is started, the second effect may not be executed. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the second effect may be used, or a means for executing only the second effect may be used.
(C2) The game stand according to (C1),

  The production means executes the first production from the middle during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (g), the production H is executed from the middle of the movie, or the production O is performed. A game table characterized by being a means (executed from the middle of a song).

According to the above gaming machine, since the first production executed during the first period starts from the middle of the production, the entire first production is not understood until the second period is started, It may be possible to entertain the player. The directing means may be a means in which the first effect is executed in the middle only during the first period, and the first effect is also in the middle in other periods other than the first period. It may be a means that may be executed.
(C3) The gaming machine according to (C1) or (C2),

  The production means executes the first production halfway during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (f), production H is executed halfway through the movie, or production O is performed. A game stand characterized by being a means to be executed halfway through a song.

  According to the above gaming machine, the first performance executed during the first period ends in the middle of the production, so that the entire first production is not understood until the second period is started. May be entertained. The directing means may be a means in which the first effect is executed halfway only during the first period, and the first effect is also halfway in other periods other than the first period. It may be a means that may be executed.

Further, the directing means is a means in which only a part of the first directing is executed during the period of the first period. It may be “an effect that starts in the middle and ends in the middle of the first effect”, and “an effect that starts in the middle of the first effect and runs to the end of the first effect” It may also be “an effect that starts from the beginning of the first effect and is executed halfway through the first effect”.
(C4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3),

  In the first period, the first effect includes a plurality of effects (for example, the effect H shown in FIGS. 139 (a) and (f), the effect I shown in FIGS. 139 (c) to (d)), or the diagram. 139 (a) or (f) or a stage determined from the effects P shown in FIGS. 139 (c) to 139 (d).

  According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. .

  The effect means may be an effect determined from two or more effects included in the plurality of effects during the first period. If there is only one effect that can be executed in the second period, only the one effect may be executed in the first period, and the second period is not executed. Only the period may be executed. In addition, for example, when the number of consecutive villas has reached a predetermined number of times such as two consecutive villas, three consecutive villas, or when the mission of the opening condition of the presentation is achieved during the user mode setting, When is established, the effects that can be executed during the second period may be increased.

  The operation means is a first operation means (chance button 136), and includes a second operation means (direction key 139), and the rendering means performs the second operation during the first period. When there is an operation of the means, the first effect may be determined from a plurality of effects. In this way, “change of production” and “decision of production” may be executed by operation of different operation means, and “change of production” and “decision of production” depend on the operation direction of one operation means. Either of these may be executed.

In addition, the effect executed in the second period may be changed at a constant period during the period of the first period, for example, scrolling at a period of 5 seconds. In addition, the fact that the effect is selected may indicate that “the effect is determined”, may include “change of the effect”, or may not include it. Further, it may indicate only that “the production is changed”.
(C5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C4),
A plurality of production means are provided,

At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first effect means is the effect means,

  At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a speaker 120).

According to the above-mentioned game stand, there are cases where the player can be entertained with the production by a plurality of production means. In addition, three or more effect means may be provided.
(C6) The game stand according to (C5),

  In the third period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (g)), the second effect means is at least one of the third effects (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 139 (f)). Is a means of executing

  The second effect means can execute at least a fourth effect (for example, an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 139 (h)) in a fourth period (for example, a period starting from FIG. 139 (h)). Means,

  The second effect means is a means capable of stopping at least the third effect (for example, the fade-out process shown in FIG. 139 (g)) when the third period ends.

  The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends (for example, a period that starts from FIG. 139 (h)),

  In the fourth period, the fourth effect is started from the beginning (for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (h), the effect O ′ is executed from the beginning of the song). Stand.

  According to the above game console, only a part of the third effect is executed in the third period, so that the player will not get bored even if the fourth effect is executed from the beginning in the fourth period. You may be able to The second effect means may be a means for executing only a part of the third effect during the third period, or a means for executing all of the third effect. May be. The effect means may be a means for executing one or more effects different from the third effect during the third period. The second effect means may be a means for stopping only the third effect being executed when the third period ends, and a plurality of effects including the third effect are stopped. Alternatively, all the effects including the third effect may be stopped.

  The third period may be a period that starts before the first period, may be a period that starts after the first period, or starts at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. The third period may be a period that ends before the first period, may be a period that ends after the first period, and ends at the same time as the first period. It may be a period of time. Further, for example, the first effect such as a movie may not be linked to the third effect, or may be linked to the third effect. Also, for example, the second effect such as a movie may not be linked to the fourth effect, or may be linked to the fourth effect.

The second effect means may be a means that the fourth effect is necessarily executed during the fourth period, or may be a means that the fourth effect may not be executed. . For example, the fourth effect may not be executed when the island simultaneous effect is started between the start of the third period and the start of the fourth period. Further, a means for executing a plurality of effects including the fourth effect may be used, or a means for executing only the fourth effect may be used. In addition, when the second effect is not executed during the second period in the first effect means, the second effect means does not execute the fourth effect during the period of the fourth period. It may be a means or a means for executing the fourth effect.
(C7) The game stand according to (C6),

  The second effect means executes the third effect in the middle of the third period (for example, the effect O is executed in the middle of the music as shown in FIG. 139 (f)). A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, since the third performance that is executed during the third period starts from the middle of the production, the third production is not understood until the fourth period starts, It may be possible to entertain the player. The second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway only during the period of the third period, and the third effect is also performed in other periods other than the third period. May be a means that may be executed in the middle.

Further, in the first effect means, when the first effect is being executed from the middle, the second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is being executed from the middle. The means for starting the production may be started from the top.
(C8) The game stand according to (C6) or (C7),

  The second presentation means executes the third presentation halfway during the third period (for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (f), stage O is executed halfway through the music). A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the above gaming machine, the third performance that is executed during the third period ends in the middle of the production, so that the entire third production is not understood until the fourth period is started. May be entertained. The second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway only during the period of the third period, and the third effect is also performed in other periods other than the third period. May be a means that may be executed halfway.

  Further, in the first effect means, when the first effect is executed halfway, the second effect means may be a means in which the third effect is executed halfway. It may be a means executed until the end of the production.

In addition, the production means is a means in which only a part of the third production is executed during the period of the third period. It may be “an effect that starts in the middle and ends in the middle of the third effect”, and “an effect that starts from the middle of the third effect and runs to the end of the third effect” It may also be “an effect that starts from the beginning of the third effect and is executed halfway through the third effect”.
(C9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C6) to (C8),
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,

  The third effect (for example, the effect O shown in FIG. 139 (f)) is an effect corresponding to the first effect (for example, the effect H shown in FIG. 139 (f)). Amusement stand.

According to the above gaming machine, since the effects executed by each of the first effect means and the second effect means are determined at the same time, in the period until the first round in the first period ends, When at least a part of the first effect by the first effect means is executed and at least a part of the third effect by the second effect means is also executed, so that the player can be more entertained There is. Note that “the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect” means that the effect is composed of the first effect and the third effect such as execution of a movie corresponding to the song. It may be.
(C10) The gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C9),

  The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

According to the above gaming machine, the effect executed in the second period is determined when the operation means is operated, and the determined effect is restarted from the beginning, so the pachinko that has the characteristics of the effect means. Machine or slot machine can be realized.
(C11) effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120);

  A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling at least the production means,

  The effect means includes a plurality of effects (for example, effects H shown in FIGS. 139 (a) and (f), effects I shown in FIGS. 139 (c) to (d), or FIGS. 139 (a) and (f). Is a means capable of executing at least the effect O shown and the effect P) shown in FIGS.

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, effect H or effect O shown in FIG. 139 (f)),

  In the first period (for example, the period shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (g)), the effect control means performs the effect performed in the second period (for example, the period starting from FIG. 139 (h)). Is a determinable means,

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

  When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed or when the first round is completed), the effect control means performs an effect to be executed in the second period. At least a means of determining,

  The directing means is means for executing only a part of the first directing when the first period is in progress.

In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.

  Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,

  The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is determined that the second period has started by executing the control that starts the first effect determined in the first period from the beginning (first) in the second period. May be easier for a person to recognize. Also, when the operation means is operated, the control for temporarily ending the first effect being executed is executed, and the control is executed from the beginning (first) of the second effect after the second period is started. Is executed, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the second effect has been determined.

The effect control means may be a means for controlling only one effect means, or a means for controlling a plurality of effect means. Further, the effect means may be a means for executing only a plurality of effects, or may be a means for executing notifications other than the plurality of effects (injustice notification, notification of gaming state, notification of how to hit, etc.). Good. Further, the effect determination control may be a control for determining only the first effect as an effect executed in the second period, and as an effect of executing a plurality of effects including the first effect in the second period. Control to determine may be sufficient. The requirements for the first condition to be satisfied are not only that the operating means has been operated, but (1) that the operating means has been operated, and (2) that a certain period has elapsed since the start of the first period. The requirement may include any one, two, or all of (3) the case where the first period is included in the jackpot presentation period and the specific round has ended. The effect determination control may be executed only when any one of the requirements (1) to (3) is satisfied, or when the two requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. May be executed when all the above requirements (1) to (3) are satisfied. Further, another requirement that does not include all the requirements (1) to (3) may be used.
(C12) The game stand according to (C11),

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect H ′ or an effect O ′ shown in FIG. 139 (h)),

The stage control means is a means for executing control for determining at least the second stage as an stage for performing the second stage (hereinafter referred to as “stage determination control”). .
(C13) The gaming machine according to (C11) or (C12),

  The production control means is a means for executing control (hereinafter referred to as “production change control”) for changing from the production being performed to another production when the second condition is satisfied,

  The requirement that the second condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the period of the first period,

  The production control means is a means capable of executing the production change control one or more times when the production period is in the first period,

  One of the other effects to be changed is the first effect, the game stand.

According to the above game console, by determining the first effect from a plurality of effects, the player may be able to increase the variations of effects that can be confirmed in the second period and entertain the player. .
(C14) The gaming table according to (C12) or (C13),

  The first period is a period that is ended at least when the third condition is satisfied,

The gaming machine characterized in that the requirement that the third condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the execution determination control being executed.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Production means (for example, second production means (speaker 120), see FIGS. 95 to 97 (hereinafter the same)),

  A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) including operating means (for example, a chance button 136),

  The effect means is a means capable of executing at least one effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect” (for example, effect α)) of a plurality of effects,

  In the first case (for example, when a waiting time of T seconds has elapsed from time t3 when the chance button 136 was pressed during the selectable period (time t4)), the plurality of the production means Is a means to be changed to another effect (hereinafter referred to as “second effect” (for example, effect δ)),

  Said 1st case is a case where it is a 1st period (for example, selectable period (time t0-t5)),

  The first case is a case where a first time (for example, T seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136 (time t3)) (for example, time t4). And

  The production means is executed by the production means in the second period (for example, the period after the end of the first period) in the second case (for example, when the selectable period ends (time t5)). Is a means for determining at least an effect (hereinafter referred to as “third effect” (for example, effect δ)),

  The second case is a case where an effect determining condition (for example, the end of the selectable period (time t5)) is established,

  The second period is a period that starts after the end of the first period,

  The effect means is means for starting the third effect from the beginning in the third case (for example, when the second period is started (time t5)),

  Said 3rd case is a case where said 2nd period is started, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. (2) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The first period is a period that is at least ended when an end condition (for example, end of a selectable period) is satisfied,

The requirement that the end condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least that a second time (for example, a time from time t0 to t5) has elapsed since the start of the first period (for example, time t0). Features. (3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first period is an effect change period (for example, a selectable period),

  The production change period is a change from the first production to the second production one or more times (for example, time (T3-T) in FIG. 95 = time t4 to t5 is time T The longer period is a period in which a change can be made a plurality of times by pressing the chance button 136 during the period from the time t4 to the time t5. (4) In the pachinko machine 100,

The first period is a period that is executed at least in the jackpot (see, for example, FIG. 95). (5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,

The game machine characterized in that the first period is a period that is executed at least during one round of the plurality of rounds (see, for example, FIG. 95).
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
Display means (for example, first effect means (decorative symbol display device 208));
Sound output means (for example, second rendering means (speaker 120));
Production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least controlling the production;

  A game table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) provided with operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position at which the player can operate at least;

  The sound output means is means capable of outputting at least a first song (for example, production α (see FIG. 95; the same applies hereinafter)),

  The sound output means is means capable of outputting at least a second song (for example, production δ),

  The display means is a means capable of executing at least title display (for example, production A) of the first song,

  The display means is means capable of at least executing title display (for example, effect D) of the second song,

  The production control means is a means capable of executing at least first control (for example, title display change control) when a first condition (for example, detection of pressing of the chance button 136) is established. ,

  The production control means is means capable of executing second control (for example, song change control) when the first condition is established,

  The production control means can at least start the second control after the second condition (for example, the start of the production changeable period (start of the selectable period (paragraph “0242”)) is established. Means,

  The effect control means is a means for ending at least the second control before the establishment of the third condition (for example, the end of the changeable period of the effect (end of the selectable period (paragraph “0249”)). And

  The production control means is a means capable of executing third control (for example, song determination control) when the third condition is established,

  The requirement for satisfying the first condition is a requirement including at least that an operation of the operation means (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) is detected,

  The first control is a control that can be changed at least from the title display of the first song to the title display of the second song,

The second control is a control that can be changed at least from the first song to the second song,
The second control is a control executed at least after the first control,

  The second control is a control executed after a first time (for example, T seconds) has elapsed since the establishment of the first condition,

  The third control is a control for determining at least a song output by the sound output means after the third condition is satisfied,

  The production control means is a means capable of changing at least from the first music to the second music by the second control in the first case (for example, when a waiting time of T seconds elapses). And

  The production control means is a means that does not change at least from the first music to the second music by the second control in the second case (for example, when the waiting time of T seconds does not elapse). Yes,

  The first case is a case where the first time has passed since the first condition was finally satisfied,

  The second case is a case where the first condition is satisfied again before the first time elapses after the first condition is satisfied.

  The sound output means is means capable of outputting at least a song changed by the effect control means (hereinafter referred to as “third song” (for example, effect δ)) in the first case,

  The production control means is means for performing control to end the output of the third song when the third condition is satisfied,

  The production control means is means for performing a fourth control (for example, a control that starts from the beginning of a song) when the third condition is established,

  The fourth control is characterized in that the music determined by the third control is started from the beginning. (2) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The effect control means is a means capable of executing the first control one or more times in an effect change period (for example, a selectable period),

The production control means is a means capable of executing the second control one or more times during the production change period.
The production change period is a period in which the production can be changed at least,

  The effect change period is a period that is performed at least for a second time. (3) In the pachinko machine 100,

The effect change period is a period that is executed at least in the big hit. (4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,

  The effect change period is a period that is executed at least during one round of the plurality of rounds. (5) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The operation means is a means provided with a first operation section (for example, a chance button 136),

  The operation means is a means provided with a second operation unit (for example, a direction key of the setting operation unit 139),

  The requirement for establishing the first condition is a requirement including at least that an operation of one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is detected. It is characterized by that. (6) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Production means (for example, second production means (speaker 120), see FIGS. 95 to 97 (hereinafter the same)),

A game machine comprising at least an effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the effect means;
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,

  At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect α),

  The effect control means can determine an effect to be executed in a second period (for example, a period after the end of the first period) in a first period (for example, a selectable period (time t0 to t5)). And

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

When the first effect is executed by the effect means, and the effect control means determines that the first effect is to be executed in the second period, the effect means It is good also as the game stand characterized by being a means which can be executed from the beginning in the second period after the first effect is finished once.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;

  A game machine comprising at least an effect changing means capable of changing the effect (for example, an effect control process (step S409) and a sound control process (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),

  The effect means is capable of executing at least a first effect (for example, effect A), and the effect means is capable of executing at least a second effect (for example, effect α). The means is capable of executing at least a third effect (for example, effect B), and the effecting means is capable of executing at least a fourth effect (for example, effect β),

  When the first condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operating unit), the effect changing unit determines that the first change control (for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes and step S1111). At least)

  When the second condition is satisfied (for example, an operation by the operation unit), the effect changing unit determines that the second change control (for example, step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes and step S1111). At least)

  The first change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the third effect,

  The second change control is at least changeable from the second effect to the fourth effect,

  The first change control is a control executed after a first time has elapsed since the first condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds),

  The second change control is a control executed after a second time has elapsed since the second condition is satisfied (for example, after T seconds).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the first effect is changed to the third effect after the first time has elapsed, and the second effect is the fourth effect after the second time has elapsed. Since it is possible to perform a variety of performances, the player's interest may be improved.

More specifically, the result of the change after a certain amount of time is reflected to give the player a sense of incongruity and can attract the player's attention until the changed performance starts. There is a case. If the changed result is immediately reflected in the production, the production will be monotonous, but by performing the production using the time lag as described above, variations can be made in the production, and the player You may not be bored.
(2) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The time when the first condition is satisfied is at least coincident with the time when the second condition is satisfied.

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the establishment time of the first condition and the second condition overlap, there are cases where the effect can be more noticed. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. In addition, there may be a case where a variation can be given to the execution timing of the effect even though the change conditions for the plurality of effects are satisfied at substantially the same timing.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first time is different from the second time.

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the first time and the second time are different, the production may be more noticeable. In addition, there may be cases where variations in production can be increased. Furthermore, there are cases where variations can be given to the execution timing of effects.
(4) In the pachinko machine 100,

  The directing means is capable of executing at least a plurality of selection effects that can be selected by the player.

The first selection effect of the plurality of selection effects is at least capable of executing the first effect,
The first selection effect is at least capable of executing the third effect,

  The second selection effect among the plurality of selection effects is capable of executing at least the second effect,

  The second selection effect is characterized in that at least the fourth effect can be executed.

According to the pachinko machine 100, the directing means can execute a selection effect that allows the player to select an effect, so that the player feels uncomfortable and has not been reflected immediately even though it has been selected. In some cases, the production can be made more noticeable. In addition, the player may be able to be surely notified of what the currently selected effect is from among the selected effects.
(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The production means is a plurality of production means,

A first effect unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) of the plurality of effect units is capable of at least executing the first effect,
The first effect means is capable of executing at least the third effect,

  A second rendering means (for example, the speaker 120) of the plurality of rendering means is capable of executing at least the second rendering,

  The second effect means is characterized in that it can execute at least the fourth effect.

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the first effect means can execute the first effect and the second effect means can execute the second effect, the player feels uncomfortable and pays attention to the changed effect. There is a case that can be made.
(6) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;

  Production changing means capable of changing at least the production (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),

  A game table provided with operation means (for example, a chance button 136) that can be operated by a player,

  The production means can execute at least a first production (for example, production A),

  The production means can execute at least a second production (for example, production B),

  When the change condition is satisfied, the effect changing means performs change control (for example, the effect selected in step S1111 when step S1107 of the selection effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes),

  The change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the second effect,

  The change condition is satisfied at least by the player operating the operation means during the execution of the first effect,

  The effect changing means is characterized in that an operation of the operating means by a player is not accepted during a predetermined period after the change condition is satisfied.

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the selection of the effect is not accepted (disabled) by the operating means for a predetermined period after the selected effect is started, the player cannot select the effect. Thereby, since the player always views the selected effect for a certain period, it may be possible to prevent an unintended change of the effect due to an erroneous operation.
(7) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment

  Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least producing the production;

  Production changing means capable of changing at least the production (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),

  A game table provided with operation means (for example, a chance button 136) that can be operated by a player,

  The production means is capable of executing at least a first production (for example, production α),

  The production means can execute at least a second production (for example, production δ),

  The effect changing means is capable of executing at least change control (for example, the effect selected in step S1111 when step S1107 of the selected effect control process shown in FIG. 85 is Yes) when the change condition is satisfied. Yes,

  The change control is at least changeable from the first effect to the second effect,

  The change condition is satisfied at least when a player operates the operation means during execution of the first effect and a predetermined period has elapsed since the operation has been performed. Features.

According to the pachinko machine 100, the first effect means is immediately reflected on the selected effect, and the second effect means is not reflected unless T seconds elapse after selection. In other words, if the predetermined period does not elapse after the selection, the second effect means does not start the selected effect, so that it is possible to prevent the annoyance felt by starting the effect that changes immediately. There is.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.

  For example, in the configuration described in the above embodiment, the configuration described as “at least ... possible” can be interpreted by replacing the part with “only possible ...”. For example, the display means described as “at least the first effect can be stopped” can be interpreted as replacing the effect means “only the first effect can be stopped”. In addition, the configuration described as “means for executing at least a part of the first effect” may be that only a part of the first effect may be executed, It can also be interpreted as “means for performing all of the production”.

  In addition, the configuration described as “... possible” in the above-described embodiment is interpreted by replacing the part with “... may not be included, or necessarily includes ...” You can also For example, the configuration described as “means capable of executing at least the second effect” is replaced with “means that may not execute the second effect or includes a configuration that is always executed”. Can also be interpreted.

  Further, for example, the first condition may be satisfied at a timing different from the second condition. As a specific example, for example, the operation effect of the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player operates the chance button 136 (satisfaction of the first condition). Next, one minute later, the speaker 120 instructs “Press the chance button!” And the player operates the chance button 136 again (the second condition is satisfied). The same chance button 136 may not be used. A combination of the chance button 136 and other operation means (direction key, trigger, first chance button, second chance button) is also possible. By doing so, there may be cases where variations in performance can be increased.

  For example, the first condition may be the same condition as the second condition. As a specific example, for example, one operation means performs a predetermined operation (depressing a predetermined number of times (one or more times) (continuous hitting), long pressing, sliding, a predetermined key operation (for example, a direction key is “up / down / left / right”) Or the like) may be used as the condition (condition (1)). Alternatively, the condition (condition (2)) may be a case where the number of games digested from a certain point in time (or the number of special figure fluctuations) exceeds a predetermined number. In the case of a pachinko machine, for example, at the time of probability change state, at the start of a short time, at the start of a specific performance mode (a mode for sudden probability change or small hits, a mode in which only the performance changes without changing the game state) This corresponds to the start of the change from the electric support to the non-electric support state. In the case of a slot machine, this applies to the start of ART, RT, and AT. In addition, it corresponds to the case when the power is turned on in common with both the pachinko machine slot machines. Further, the condition (condition (3)) may be a case where a predetermined number of game media (game balls, medals, etc.) acquired at the time of hitting are exceeded. By doing this, although the change can be made under the same condition, the reflected time of the changed effect is different, so that the player may be given a sense of discomfort.

  For example, the first condition may be different from the second condition. As a specific example, the first condition may be when the first operating means is operated, and the second condition may be when the second operating means is operated. That is, a difference in operation means may be used as a condition. Alternatively, the first condition is when the operating means is operated for the first number of times (for example, once), and the second condition is when the operating means is operated for the second number of times (for example, 5 times). Also good. That is, the difference in operation may be a condition. In addition, a difference in operation such as long press, slide, and predetermined key operation may be used as a condition. Furthermore, the first condition may be when the operating means is operated, and the second condition may be the above condition (2). The first condition may be when the operating means is operated, and the second condition may be the above condition (3). Further, the first condition and the second condition may be different patterns when the condition (2) is present. Moreover, the pattern in which the predetermined number of said conditions (3) differs by the 1st condition and the 2nd condition may be sufficient. The first condition may be the condition (2), and the second condition may be the condition (3). In the above description, the first condition and the second condition can be applied in reverse. By doing so, since the start time of the effect varies depending on the conditions, there may be cases where the variation of the effect can be increased.

  Further, for example, the first time and the second time may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to a delay in reflecting the selected performance.

  Further, for example, one effect may be a selection effect and the other effect may be a change effect. The first effect means (second effect means) can execute the selection effect, and the second effect means (first effect means) may not perform at least the selection effect. As a specific example, the effect performed by the second effect means (first effect means) is an effect that is changed by the operation of the operation means in any of the above conditions (1), (2), or (3). There may be. By doing so, there may be cases where variations in performance can be increased.

  Further, for example, the presentation may be changed by a method other than the operation means. It is not necessarily changed by the operation by the operation means, and it is of course possible to change the production in a control manner when a certain condition is satisfied. For example, a predetermined effect or a randomly selected effect may be performed when the condition is satisfied. By doing so, there may be cases where variations in performance can be increased.

  For example, a single operating means may be used. A selection effect of at least the first effect means and the second effect means may be selectable with one operation means. For example, it may be possible to select the output of the music on the speaker 120 and the selection of the music name on the decorative symbol display device 208 with a single operation means. By doing so, there are cases where attention can be paid to the reflection of the selection result.

  Further, for example, the first operation means may correspond to the first effect means, and the second operation means may correspond to the second effect means. For this purpose, a plurality of operation means are provided. The operation of the first operation means corresponds to the first effect means, and the operation of the second operation means corresponds to the second effect means. For example, the chance button 136 may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the direction key 139 may correspond to the effect display device 915. By doing so, there are cases where attention can be paid to the reflection of the selection result.

  Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be performed by the first effect means (or the second effect means). For example, as shown in the embodiment, the first selection effect and the third selection effect may be executable by the first effect means. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be performed by the first rendering means (or the second rendering means), a plurality of operation means may be used, and the same operation means may be used by the same rendering means. For example, the first selection effect of the first effect means corresponds to the first operation means, and the second selection effect of the second effect means corresponds to the second operation means. The third selection effect of the first (second) effect means corresponds to the first (second) operation means. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, for example, a plurality of selection effects may be provided by the first effect means (or the second effect means), and a plurality of operation means may be used, and the same effect means may be used as different operation means. . For example, the first selection effect of the first effect means corresponds to the first operation means, and the second selection effect of the second effect means corresponds to the second operation means. The third selection effect of the first (second) effect means corresponds to the second (first) operation means. During execution of the third selection effect, at least the fourth effect can be selected. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

For example, the first time and the second time may be limited as follows. (A) After selecting an effect, the first effect means cannot accept the operation of the operation means only for the first time and the second effect means only for the second time. (B) After the effect is selected, the execution of the effect of the first effect means is delayed by the first time, and the execution of the effect of the second effect means is executed with a delay of the second time. (C) Execution of the first effect means (second effect means) is delayed for the first time (second time) after the effect is selected. The production of the second production means (first production means) is delayed for a second time (first time) shorter than the first time (second time). The shorter time may not be delayed (that is, reflected immediately). (D) After the effect is selected, the first effect means (second effect means) is not executed unless the first time (second time) has elapsed. For the second effect means (first effect means), it is possible to apply a modification such as delaying the second time (first time), not accepting the operation, or reflecting immediately without delay. is there.
By doing so, the following effects can be obtained.

  In (a) above, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the selection of an unintended effect due to an erroneous operation.

  In the case of the delay from the operation to the end of the change in (b) and (c) above, there are cases where the selection result can be reflected without a sense of incongruity while preventing other effects from being obstructed.

  In the case of the specific time delay in the above (b) and (c), a sense of incongruity is given and the player can be noticed.

  In (d) above, it may be possible to prevent the player from performing an effect that is not desired. In some cases, the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome.

  Further, for example, the production may be changed by operating the operation means. Even if it is possible to change the first effect to the third effect by providing an operation means that can be operated by the player and operating the operation means during the execution of the first effect (satisfaction of the first condition) Good. Further, the second effect may be changed to the third effect by operating the operation means (satisfaction of the second condition) during execution of the second effect. Note that “by operating the operating means” is precisely “by detecting that the operating means has been operated”. Even if operated by the player, the effect cannot be changed unless detected by the sensor.

  Further, for example, the third rendering means and one operation means may be combined. Three rendering means may correspond to one operation means. The third effect means may be capable of executing the fourth selection effect. In addition, during execution of the fourth selection effect, at least the fifth effect may be selectable. In this way, even if a plurality of effects are selected by one operation means, there is a difference in the reflection of the effects by the operation means, which may give the player a sense of incongruity and allow the selection results to be reflected. is there.

  Further, for example, the third rendering means and a plurality of operation means may be combined. The first effect means and the second effect means may correspond to the first operation means, and the third effect means may correspond to the second operation means. By doing so, there are cases where variations can be given to the game method of the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The first condition is established when a selection operation by the player is detected during the effective period, and the second condition is when the selection operation by the player is detected during the effective period. It may be established.

  The first condition may be satisfied when the execution requirement is satisfied, and the second condition may be satisfied when the execution requirement is satisfied. The execution requirement may be satisfied when a selection operation by the player is detected during the effective period. The first condition is established when any one of the plurality of first requirements is satisfied, and one of the plurality of first requirements is the execution It may be a requirement. The second condition is established when any one of the plurality of second requirements is satisfied, and one of the plurality of second requirements is: It may be the execution requirement.

  Further, in the above embodiment, for example, when the player presses the chance button 136 of the operation means at the time t1, for example, the effect A is ended and the effect B is started, for example. The production A may be gradually started and the production B may be gradually started over a predetermined time from the time point t1. In this case, when the effects A and B include images, the effect A image fades out and the effect B image fades in. When the productions A and B include music, voice, etc., the volume of the production A gradually decreases and the volume of the production B gradually increases.

Further, the second gaming state of the plurality of gaming states may be a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state of the plurality of gaming states.
The second gaming state may be a big hit.

  In addition, the first gaming state is a win-winning win with a first probability by lottery (for example, a special figure low-probability low-probability state), and the second gaming state is determined by the lottery. Winning a big hit with a probability of two (for example, a special figure high-precision normal figure high-precision state, a special figure low-precision normal figure high-precision (electric support) state), the first probability is the second probability It may be lower than the probability. Note that the probability indicates the probability that a special figure or ordinary figure will be a big hit.

  Further, the first gaming state may be a small hit and the second gaming state may be a big hit.

  The first gaming state is a first jackpot (for example, special figure B and special figure c in FIG. 73A), and the second gaming state is a second jackpot (for example, FIG. 73 ( Special figure A, special figure a, special figure b) of a) may be used.

  Further, the first gaming state is a first jackpot (for example, special figure C, special figure D, special figure b, special figure c in FIG. 73 (a)), and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. It may be a big hit (for example, special figure A, special figure B, special figure a in FIG. 73A).

  The first gaming state is a first jackpot (for example, special figure C and special figure D in FIG. 73A), and the second gaming state is a second jackpot (for example, FIG. 73 ( Special figure A, special figure B, special figure a, special figure b, special figure c) of a) may be used.

  In addition, the selection effect may vary the display mode (shape, image, character string, color, size, transparency, sound, etc.) depending on the gaming state.

  In addition, the selection effect may be such that the display mode in the first gaming state and the display mode in the second gaming state are different.

  Further, for example, the size of the selection effect in the second gaming state (the area of the display region, the image, etc.) is larger than the size of the selection effect in the first gaming state (the area of the display region, the image, etc., the volume, etc.). , Volume, etc.) may be large. The reverse is also possible. Further, the transparency of the selection effect (display mode) in the second gaming state may be higher than the transparency of the selection effect (display mode) in the first gaming state. The reverse is also possible. The color of the selection effect in the first gaming state (for example, the character string, the image, or the color of the background of the display area) may be different from the color of the selection effect in the second gaming state.

  In addition, the selection effect may not be displayed depending on the gaming state.

  Further, the selection effect may not be executed when the game state is the first game state, but may be executed only when the game state is the second game state.

  In addition, the selection effect may be executed at least in the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, the selection effect may be executed only in the first game state and the second game state.
The selection effect may be executable in any gaming state.

It should be noted that at least the selection effect may not be performed during the sudden success of the odd change.
Note that at least the selection effect need not be performed during the big hit effect of the latent probability change.
During the small hit effect, at least the selection effect may not be performed.
It should be noted that the effect during the change of the latent probability and the effect during the small hit may be the same.
Note that selection and selection may be performed at least suddenly.
It should be noted that at least the selection effect may be performed during the sudden success of the odd change.
Note that at least the selection effect may be performed during the big hit effect of the latent probability change.
Note that at least the selection effect may be performed during the small hit effect.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp so far is an example of a light emission means, and a lamp | ramp can be substituted if it emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube.

  In the above embodiment, the first period is a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted. Here, in the first period, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on, and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the chance button 136 is operated or after the first period ends (immediately) or simultaneously. The first period and the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may coincide with each other, but the first period may include the chance button reception period or vice versa. The “when the chance button 136 is operated” may be “when the chance button 136 is pressed” or “when the chance button 136 is pressed and then released”. Here, “when the chance button 136 is pressed” means that the command is detected when the sensor that detects the operation of the chance button 136 changes from OFF (non-operation state (OFF)) to ON (operation state (ON)). It may indicate that it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, “when the chance button 136 is pressed and then released” means that the command is the first sub-control when the sensor that detects the operation of the chance button 136 changes from ON (operation state) to OFF (non-operation state). It may indicate that the data is transmitted to unit 400. In the first period, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off regardless of the operable state or the impossible state, or may be always turned on.

  In the above embodiment, the direction key (setting operation unit) 139 is not provided with a lamp, but the direction key 139 may be provided with a lamp (hereinafter referred to as “direction key lamp”). Here, when the direction key lamp is provided, the description regarding the chance button lamp 138 may be replaced with the direction key lamp. The direction key lamp may be configured to light up the entire direction key 139, but may be provided in each of the operable direction keys (buttons) 139b to 139e. For example, the up key 139b and the down key When the key 139c is operable, the lamp of the upper key 139b and the lamp of the lower key 139c may be turned on. In the first period, the direction key lamp is lit even when it is operated, but may be turned off during the operation, or may be turned on again when it is not operated. May be.

  In addition, the embodiment described above and the embodiments described below can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

Note that the items described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular, the items described in the embodiments and the modifications can be combined.
The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix a1) Production means,
A game machine comprising operating means,

The effect means is means for executing at least a part of the first effect in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a second production in the second period,
The first effect is an effect that is at least part of the second effect,

The production means is means capable of stopping at least the first production when the operation means is operated in the first period,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

  The first period is a period that is at least ended when the operation means is operated.

The game table, wherein the second presentation is started from the top during the second period.
(Appendix a2) The game stand according to appendix a1,

The gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is one of effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.
(Supplementary note a3) The game stand according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is a display means.
(Supplementary note a4) The game stand according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means.
(Supplementary note a5) The game stand according to supplementary note a1 or a2,
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
The first effect means is the effect means,

At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means.
(Supplementary note a6) The game stand according to supplementary note a5,

  The second effect means is means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,

The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a fourth effect in a fourth period,
The third effect is an effect that is at least part of the fourth effect,

The second effect means is a means capable of at least stopping the third effect when the operation means is operated in the third period.
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,

  The third period is a period that is at least ended when the operation means is operated.

In the fourth period, the fourth stage starts from the top, and the game table is characterized in that
(Supplementary note a7) The game stand according to supplementary note a6,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect,

The game machine characterized in that the fourth effect is an effect corresponding to the second effect.
(Supplementary note a8) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a7,

The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Appendix a9) Production means,
Production control means capable of controlling at least the production means;
A game machine comprising operating means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,

  The effect control means is means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

  The effect control means is a means for executing control for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

  The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least that the operation means has been operated,

In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.

  Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.
(Appendix b1) Production means,
A game machine comprising operating means,

The effect means is a means for executing at least a jackpot effect when it is a jackpot,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round;

The effect means is means for executing at least a part of the first effect in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a second production in the second period,
The first effect is an effect that is at least part of the second effect,

  The first period is a part of a period in which the jackpot effect is executed,

The production means is means capable of stopping at least the first production when the first round is completed in the first period;
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

  The first period is a period that is at least ended when the first round is ended;

The game table, wherein the second presentation is started from the top during the second period.
(Appendix b2) The game stand according to appendix b1,

The gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is one of effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.
(Appendix b3) The game stand according to appendix b1 or b2,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a second round;
The second round is a round that starts after the first round;

The gaming table according to claim 2, wherein the second period is a period at least started when the second round is started.
(Appendix b4) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is a display means.
(Appendix b5) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
The game stand characterized in that the effect means is sound output means.
(Appendix b6) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
The first effect means is the effect means,

At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means.
(Appendix b7) The game stand according to appendix b6,

  The second effect means is means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,

The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a fourth effect in a fourth period,
The third effect is an effect that is at least part of the fourth effect,
One of the plurality of rounds is a third round;
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,

  The third period is a period that is at least ended when the third round is ended,

In the fourth period, the fourth stage starts from the top, and the game table is characterized in that
(Supplementary note b8) The game stand according to Supplementary note b7,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,
The third round is the first round,
The third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect,

The game machine characterized in that the fourth effect is an effect corresponding to the second effect.
(Appendix b9) The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,

The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Appendix b10) Production means;
Production control means capable of controlling at least the production means;
A game machine comprising operating means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect executed at least during the jackpot period,
The jackpot is composed of at least a plurality of rounds,
At least one of the plurality of rounds is a first round;

  The effect control means is means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

  The effect control means is a means for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

  The requirement that the first condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes at least the end of the first round,

In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.

  Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,

The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.
(Appendix c1) Production means,
A game machine comprising operating means,
The production means is means for executing only a part of the first production in the first period,
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a second production in the second period,

The production means is a means capable of stopping at least the first production when the first period ends,
The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

The game table, wherein the second presentation is started from the top during the second period.
(Appendix c2) The game stand according to Appendix c1,

The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the effect means is means for executing the first effect from the middle during the first period.
(Appendix c3) The gaming table according to appendix c1 or c2,

The game stand according to claim 1, wherein the presentation means is means for executing the first presentation partway during the first period.
(Appendix c4) The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c3,

The gaming machine characterized in that the first effect is one of effects determined from a plurality of effects in the first period.
(Appendix c5) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices c1 to c4,
A plurality of production means are provided,
At least one of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
The first effect means is the effect means,

At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means.
(Appendix c6) The game stand according to appendix c5,

  The second effect means is means for executing at least a part of the third effect in the third period,

  The second effect means is a means capable of executing at least a fourth effect in a fourth period,

The second effect means is a means capable of stopping at least the third effect when the third period ends,
The fourth period is a period that starts after the third period ends,

In the fourth period, the fourth stage starts from the top, and the game table is characterized in that
(Appendix c7) The game stand according to appendix c6,

The game table characterized in that the second effect means is means for executing the third effect from the middle in the third period.
(Appendix c8) The game stand according to appendix c6 or c7,

The game table characterized in that the second effect means is means for executing the third effect partway during the third period.
(Supplementary note c9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes c6 to c8,
The third period is the first period,
The fourth period is the second period,

The gaming machine characterized in that the third effect is an effect corresponding to the first effect.
(Appendix c10) The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c9,

The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(Appendix c11) Production means;
A game machine comprising at least an effect control means capable of controlling the effect means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of effects,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,

  The effect control means is means capable of determining an effect to be executed in the second period in the first period,

  The second period is a period that starts after the first period ends,

  The effect control means is a means for determining at least an effect to be executed in the second period when the first condition is satisfied,

  The directing means is means for executing only a part of the first directing when the first period is in progress.

In the first case, the effect means is a means capable of ending the first effect and executing an effect executed in the second period from the beginning in the second period.
The first case is a case where the first period is in progress.

  Said 1st case is a case where said 1st production is performed by said production control means,

  The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first case is a case where the first condition is satisfied.

100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 226 General winning opening 228 Special drawing starting opening 230 Special figure 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 234 Variable winning opening 300 Main control section 400 First sub control section 500 Second sub control section 208X 1st symbol display area 208Y 2nd symbol display area 2081 1st image display device 2082 2nd image display device 2083 3rd image display device A Hold icon display area B Music selection display area C Lyrics display area

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a display means, and is a gaming machine provided with a display device, and is configured to be able to display a special symbol indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The certain special symbol is a symbol that is not used as a symbol representing the big hit, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and is one of the plurality of types of display. The display of is a variation display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”), and one of the plurality of types of display is different from the first variation display. This is a variation display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”), and the first variation display has a larger display size than the second variation display . It is configured to display one variation display and the second variation display in parallel. Said first variable display is a display with three symbols, the second variable display is a display with three symbols, the first symbol in the definitive in variable display (hereinafter, "first in symbol "hereinafter.) animate the first symbols inflame whether to display stopped (hereinafter, referred to as" first animation display ".) are capable of being configured display, said first animation display, It is an animation display by the first symbol, and the case where the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol after the first animation display is finished (hereinafter referred to as “some cases”). Configured so that the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol after the end of the first animation display. It said second variable display medium symbols (hereinafter. Referred to as "second in" symbol) in the second symbol in is configured to display stops, the first design, the first display size The second symbol is the certain special symbol of the second display size, and the first display size is larger than the second display size. It is a game stand characterized by that.

In addition, a first display unit (for example, the first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, the second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. Yes, the first variation display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine.
In addition, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 ′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device). 2083), and a special symbol (for example, a special symbol, a pseudo-continuous symbol, a middle symbol of FIG. ) And FIG. 18 (o) middle symbols (such as a special symbol of “continue” characters), and the special symbol is not used as a symbol representing a big hit. The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a variable display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first variable display”). (For example, the first symbol display area 208 (Decorative display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c) "), and one display of the plurality of types of display is a set of decorations separate from the first variable display. Symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display (for example, decorative symbol variation display in the second symbol display area 208Y (symbol display areas 208k to 208g)”), and the second variation display. The first variation display has a larger display size than the first variation display, and the first variation display and the second variation display can be displayed in parallel. The second variation display is a display with three symbols, and the first symbol is the middle symbol in the first variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first middle symbol”). Animation to ask whether or not to stop display (Hereinafter, referred to as “first animation display (for example, display of a special symbol stop animation, display of a middle symbol animation)”). , When the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol after the first animation display ends (hereinafter referred to as “some cases (for example, 14 (m)) ”)), and after the first animation display ends, the first symbol does not stop display on the first middle symbol (for example, 15 (l)), the middle symbol in the second variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second middle symbol") in the certain case. Are displayed in a stopped manner (for example, in the case of FIGS. 14J and 15O), the first symbol is the certain special symbol of the first display size. The second symbol is the special symbol having the second display size, and the first display size is larger than the second display size. It is a game machine.
In the certain case, the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second middle symbol before the end of the first animation display (for example, FIG. 14 (j), FIG. 15 (o)). In the case of ()).
Further, according to claim 1, there may be a case where after the first animation display ends, the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol (hereinafter referred to as “some case”). The first symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol after the first animation display is completed. The second symbol is configured to stop display on the middle symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second middle symbol”) in the second variation display, and “the first animation display has been completed. The first symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol later, “the first animation display after the second symbol is stopped on the second middle symbol. Ends and the first animation Emission display has the first symbol in the symbol the first inside after finishing is configured such that there is a case of "Show Stop," may be that of.
In addition, the “stop display” according to any one of claims 1 to 3 may be “a stop display other than a fixed display”.
Further, the stop display other than the fixed display may be a stop display including fluctuation fluctuation in at least one of the three symbols.
In addition, the “animation display by the first symbol” according to claim 1 is “an animation display including a change in the display mode of the first symbol (for example, FIG. 14 (g) to FIG. 14 (l)). 15 (g) to FIG. 15 (k), rotation display, enlarged display of the symbol itself, effect display attached to the symbol, etc. It may be included.
In addition, “animation display including change in display mode of the first symbol” according to claim 6 is “animation display including a scene in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, (for example, FIG. 14 ( g) to the animation display shown in FIG. 15 (l), the animation display shown in FIG. 15 (g) to FIG. 15 (k), the enlarged display of the symbol itself, the effect display attached to the symbol, etc. Or the like).
In addition, the “animation display by the first symbol” according to claim 1 is “an animation display constituted only by a change in the display mode of the first symbol (for example, FIG. 14 (g) to FIG. 14). The animation display shown in (l), the animation display shown in FIGS. 15 (g) to 15 (k)) ”may be used.
Further, the player may be able to recognize whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is continued by the stop display of the second symbol.
In addition, the first variation display may be a display in which one variation display is ended when three symbols are fixedly displayed.
In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a variable display of a set of decorative symbols separate from the first variable display (hereinafter referred to as “third variable display (for example, FIG. 21 (e) ), And the third variation display is a display with three symbols. The variation display is a variation display in the first image display device 2081 (a variation display whose display size is smaller than the first variation display)). The third variation display is configured such that the left symbol may fluctuate, and the third variation display is configured such that the right symbol may fluctuate. The third variation display is configured to be displayed after the first variation display (for example, the variation display in the first image display device 2081 shown in FIG. 21D). May be.
Further, the third variation display is displayed in a state where a certain super reach effect (for example, the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) effect shown in FIG. 21F) is being performed. In addition, after the certain super reach production is started, the certain special symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 21 (j) and FIG. 21 (l)). There may be.

Claims (12)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”).
One of the plurality of types of display is a variation display of a second decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”).
The display size of the first decorative design is larger than that of the second decorative design,
In the first variation display, a first animation display may be displayed,
In at least some of the states in which the first animation display is displayed, the second variation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first animation display is a display of one of the animation displays that indicate whether or not the first symbol is stopped and displayed.
After the first animation display ends, the first symbol may be stopped and displayed.
The first symbol is one of symbols related to the start of execution of the first effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect symbol”).
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
After the end of the first animation display, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed,
When the first symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display before the end of the first animation display,
The second symbol is a symbol separate from the first symbol in the first effect symbol,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
In the first variation display, there is a case where a display in which the first symbol is enlarged is displayed.
In the second variation display, there is no case where the display in which the second symbol is enlarged is displayed,
The first animation display is a display including a display in which the first symbol is enlarged.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3 or claim 4,
After the end of the first animation display, the third symbol may be stopped and displayed,
When the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display,
The third symbol is one of symbols different from the first effect symbol,
The fourth symbol is a symbol separate from the third symbol of the symbols different from the first effect symbol,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 5, Comprising:
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the game ball to be discharged (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display”).
A display of at least a part of the first animation display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed is overlapped with the ball discharge display;
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6, Comprising:
During the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the second variation display is overlapped by the first animation display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6, Comprising:
During the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display is overlapped by the second variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8, Comprising:
During the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variation display is overlapped by the first animation display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
In the first variation display, a second animation display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
A first display means and a second display means;
The display means is the first display means,
The first variation display may be displayed on the first display means,
The gaming table, wherein the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 11, Comprising:
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.